Nortel Planning Guide 2001

DMS-100/DMS-500 Systems

Feature Planning GuideLocal Access DMS SystemsYear 2001

Product/Service Information

Comments and suggestions? Your comments and suggestions are important in helping us create advance planning information that meets your needs, both in print and on the Web. If you are reading this document online and would like to provide feedback through the Web, please click on Comments and Suggestions. If you are reading a hard copy of this document, you will find an attached Reader Response Form that you may complete and return to us by postage-paid mail.

Comments and

Suggestions

Click here to comment

Do you know others who would like to receive information? By completing our Sales and Marketing Subscription form, you will receive brochures, Overviews, Briefs, Product/Service Information bulletins, and other information from Nortel Networks. To sign-up online, please click on Sign Me Up. To complete a hardcopy version of this form, please call 1-800-4 NORTEL and request a Sales and Marketing Subscriber form.

Sign Me Up

Click here to subscribe

This edition of the Feature Planning Guide, covering Rel•14 through Rel•17, will be the last issue available as a printed document. Please look to the Nortel Networks Web site for

advanced planning information in the future. Through the nortelnetworks.com site, you will be able to access updated product and solutions information, online support and

training information, and a variety of other interactive resources.

Feature Planning Guide is published by Nortel Networks. Trademark information on final page. Editor and Designer Matthew Heck Contributors Vernon Apperson, Ven Carver, Melissa Porter, Christian Schwoerke, David Thomas, and the DMS SuperNode Marketing, Business Line Management, and Product Line Management teams

http://www.nortelnetworks.com/cgi-bin/reader_response_form.pl?title=DMS-100/500+Feature+Planning+Guide+2001+50004.11/04-01+Issue+22

http://www.nortelnetworks.com/subscriberform

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 CONTENTS

3

Contents

DMS SuperNode opportunities........................................................................................... 9 At the heart of the Internet revolution.............................................................................................10 Building the high-performance Internet...........................................................................................10 The Nortel Networks advantage .......................................................................................................15 Key players: DMS SuperNode systems ............................................................................................16 New player: Signaling Server Platform .............................................................................................17 From circuit to packet.........................................................................................................................17

Software overview ...............................................................................................................19 Software structure................................................................................................................................20 Optional software in a PCL................................................................................................................23 Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs)..........................................................................................24 Release terms used in this document ................................................................................................25 Quick guide to key services in this document .................................................................................26

DMS release strategy......................................................................................................... 27 Accelerating the transition from circuit to packet ..........................................................................28 DMS PCL support policy ...................................................................................................................32

Feature Planning Guide overview ..................................................................................... 34 About this final edition .......................................................................................................................35 General layout ......................................................................................................................................35 How to read the software descriptions.............................................................................................36 In the Reference chapter ........................................................................................................................38 Training for products discussed in this document..........................................................................38

CONTENTS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

4

Succession packet telephony solutions ............................................................................. 39 A whole new realm of possibilities....................................................................................................40 Building blocks at a glance .................................................................................................................44 Offers the industry’s broadest portfolio of solutions.....................................................................46 Initial availability ..................................................................................................................................49

Standard base features ....................................................................................................... 51 Standard software in PCLs.................................................................................................................52 New standard base features................................................................................................................53

Optional base features ....................................................................................................... 57 Nortel Networks simplifies Peripheral Module loading ................................................................58 XA-Core: a true multiprocessor engine............................................................................................59 New Local Services features...............................................................................................................66 New Local Number Portability feature ............................................................................................69 New regulatory features......................................................................................................................70 Optional OAM features......................................................................................................................74 New optional EADAS interface features.........................................................................................76 New optional ISUP feature ................................................................................................................78

Line access solutions ......................................................................................................... 79 Universal Edge 9000: Integrated Access ..........................................................................................80 ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ......................................................................................................91

Trunk access solutions ...................................................................................................... 93 Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) .................................................................................................94 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ...........................................................................................................108

Remote/switch access......................................................................................................115 Extend Universal Edge 9000 DMS off an RSC-S remote...........................................................116 Extend DSL services using existing remotes: Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL ..................117 Standard base software features ......................................................................................................120 New optional feature.........................................................................................................................122


5

Advanced Intelligent Networking....................................................................................123 New optional AIN features..............................................................................................................124

DMS-500 Long Distance services ....................................................................................133 Competitive advantages ....................................................................................................................134 The changing Long Distance market..............................................................................................135 A complete portfolio of revenue-generating services...................................................................139 New Long Distance features............................................................................................................141

Centrex IP.........................................................................................................................155 Unique advantages.............................................................................................................................156 Building blocks...................................................................................................................................158 Software ordering...............................................................................................................................161 Future services....................................................................................................................................162

Nortel Networks Centrex .................................................................................................163 Design a system. Solve a problem..................................................................................................164 The Nortel Networks Centrex portfolio ........................................................................................165 Why offer Centrex services?.............................................................................................................165 The power of Centrex .........................................................................................................................166 New Nortel Networks Centrex features ........................................................................................167

Residential Enhanced Services (RES) .............................................................................169 New feature opportunities................................................................................................................170 New RES features at a glance ..........................................................................................................172 New Residential Enhanced Services features ................................................................................173

Emergency Number Services (E911) ...............................................................................175 Benefits of DMS E911......................................................................................................................176 Unique in the marketplace................................................................................................................176 New optional E911 features.............................................................................................................177


6

Centrex Internet-enabled Call Center solutions...............................................................180 The portfolio at a glance...................................................................................................................181 Currently in development.................................................................................................................181 More about Centrex Call Centers....................................................................................................182 More about Intelligent Call Management (ICM) ..........................................................................186 More about Centrex Computer-Telephone Integration (CTI) ...................................................188 More about Symposium solutions...................................................................................................190 New optional ICM features..............................................................................................................192 New optional Centrex ACD features .............................................................................................196

OAM&P applications and SuperNode Data Manager ....................................................198 Key benefits of advanced OAM&P applications..........................................................................199 SDM: the OAM&P applications platform.....................................................................................200 A brief look at the SDM frame........................................................................................................202 Current SDM applications................................................................................................................204 SDM portfolio enhancements .........................................................................................................209

Agent Services...................................................................................................................215 Order code consolidation in Rel•15................................................................................................216 Extend return-on-investment with Succession-enabled solutions .............................................221 New Agent Services features............................................................................................................222

DMS-100 Wireless ............................................................................................................ 226 Wireline and wireless features on a single platform......................................................................227 Integrated Wireless Centrex .............................................................................................................228 WIN services ......................................................................................................................................229 DMS-100 Wireless system hardware requirements ......................................................................230 About LWW00007 wireless features...............................................................................................231 Optional base features ......................................................................................................................232 e-mobility services .............................................................................................................................234 Nortel Networks Base Station subsystem......................................................................................238 Service provider features ..................................................................................................................240 CDMA-specific features ...................................................................................................................241


7

TDMA-specific features ...................................................................................................................246 TDMA/AMPS-specific features......................................................................................................251 Fraud control features.......................................................................................................................257 Cell Sites – 1900 MHz.......................................................................................................................258 Networking features ..........................................................................................................................260 Wireless data and short messaging ..................................................................................................262 Subscriber services.............................................................................................................................263

DMS-STP system ............................................................................................................ 267 PCLs in STP005.................................................................................................................................268 New standard DMS-STP features ...................................................................................................268 New optional DMS-STP features....................................................................................................270

Signaling Server platform ................................................................................................ 273 Innovative, versatile platform ..........................................................................................................273 Software releases across the platform.............................................................................................275 BroadBand STP..................................................................................................................................276 Universal Number Portability Master (UNPM) ............................................................................280 Universal Signaling Point (USP) ......................................................................................................281

Reference ......................................................................................................................... 283 Hardware baselines............................................................................................................................284

Optional feature configurations.......................................................................................................285

Hardware evolution...........................................................................................................................287

Software evolution.............................................................................................................................288

Non-CM software baseline...............................................................................................................290

Changes in feature information .......................................................................................................292

New features introduced in this document....................................................................................293

GA features: Rel•14...........................................................................................................................299

GA features: Rel•15...........................................................................................................................302

GA features: Rel•17...........................................................................................................................305


8

GA features: LWW00007 .................................................................................................................307

GA features: DMS-STP system.......................................................................................................310

Index by technical reference ............................................................................................................311

Index by feature name.......................................................................................................................317

Index by order code ..........................................................................................................................324

Index by acronyms and abbreviations ............................................................................................330

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 DMS SUPERNODE OPPORTUNITIES

9

DMS SuperNode opportunities

In this chapter

Section Starting page At the heart of the Internet revolution 10

Building the high-performance Internet Optical Internet Wireless Internet Local Internet Personal Internet eBusiness

10 11 11 12 13 14

The Nortel Networks advantage 15

Key players: DMS SuperNode systems 16

New player: Signaling Server platform 17

From circuit to packet 17

DMS SUPERNODE OPPORTUNITIES NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

10

At the heart of the Internet revolution

Nortel Networks stands as a global Internet and communications leader with capabilities spanning Optical, Wireless, Local Internet, and eBusiness solutions. By creating a high-performance Internet that is more reliable and faster than ever before, our solutions redefine the economics and quality of anywhere, anytime communication — to help usher in a new era of collaboration, communication, and commerce. Nortel Networks serves the emerging and existing needs of service providers, carriers, dot-coms, small and medium-sized businesses, and large corporations in more than 100 countries and territories around the world.

!" For service providers, we offer a wide range of solutions, including products for traditional switching, fiber-optic transport, data networking, mobility, access, cable networks, next-generation IP networks, and more.

!" For businesses and institutions, we offer private branch exchanges, wide area networks, local area networks, metropolitan area networks, call centers, routing systems and gateways, terminals, and more.

Our portfolio — the broadest in the industry — delivers superior price/performance and lower operational/support costs with robustness, security, and scalability.

Building the high-performance Internet

The new high-performance Internet is dramatically changing the way businesses, service providers, and customers communicate and conduct business. But how will this help build a world that’s more interdependent, interconnected, and interactive? Nortel Networks asks the simple question, “What do you want the Internet to be?” And then we listen — to our customers, to end users, to all who answer.

Guided by the answers we received from all over the world, our research and development, acquisitions, and alliances provide first-mover advantage for our customers. To turn dreams into real-world solutions, Nortel Networks pursues a five-pronged strategy to redefine the speed, reliability, quality, and profitability of the Internet: with Optical Internet, Wireless Internet, Local Internet, Personal Internet, and eBusiness solutions, detailed on the following pages.


11

Optical Internet: delivers the high-performance Internet at the speed of light Nortel Networks is the recognized global Optical Internet leader. More than 75 percent of North American and 50 percent of European backbone Internet traffic travels across our optical networking equipment. We provide optical solutions to more than 500 customers globally — more than any other vendor.

We provide the speed, capacity, reliability, and improved profitability needed to enable bandwidth-hungry applications and services. In fact, we offer the highest per-fiber capacity optical networking systems in the world, capable of some 6.4 terabits per second on a single fiber.

With our intelligent Optical Internet capabilities, service providers can increase their profitability by spending less time administrating networks and more time managing services.

Our optical networks provide the highest level of reliability in the industry, delivering carrier-grade quality with less than 30 seconds of unscheduled downtime per year. Now we’re at work making the Optical Internet 20 times faster; five times wider; six times longer; and much, much smarter.

Wireless Internet: the anytime, anywhere high-performance Internet The Nortel Networks new, high-performance Wireless Internet combines the mobility of anytime, anywhere, wireless access with the speed, capacity, and reliability of our industry-leading Optical Internet solutions. By 2004, the wireless subscriber base worldwide is expected to reach 1.4 billion users, and approximately 300 million users will be accessing the Internet from some form of wireless appliance. The race is on, and we offer first-mover advantage.

We’ve already demonstrated wireless applications at speeds more than 25 times faster than today’s industry standard. Now we’re helping service providers deliver the unconstrained access and high bandwidth multimedia content that the second wave of eBusiness customers demand.

Our 3G (third generation) networks provide wireless operators with faster time-to-market and greater profitability. Our solutions offer clear migration paths, allowing service providers to leverage their existing network investments while upgrading. And we work collaboratively with our customers, achieving the fastest time-to-market possible.


12

Local Internet: extends the high-performance Internet to the metro area Nortel Networks is bringing the speed, reliability, and profitability of the high-performance Internet to businesses and neighborhoods. We’re delivering all the benefits of the Optical

Internet into cities and backbone environments. The Local Internet unleashes new business opportunities for service providers by improving their ability to control quality and offer differentiated and value-added services. These opportunities include broadband content, Internet Protocol (IP) services, managed applications offerings, Optical Internet data centers, and enterprise outsourcing. New solutions, such as the following, inaugurate the second wave of eBusiness, an explosion of applications, content, and personalized services that will drive demand for optical-class bandwidth into cities.

!" Optical Ethernet — A key enabler for the Local Internet, Optical Ethernet brings together the reach and reliability of the optical networks and the simplicity and cost-effectiveness of the Ethernet to break the access bottleneck between the enterprise LAN and the service provider backbone.

!" Metro optical solutions — Extending the capacity, flexibility and speed of our optical networking to a large number of business and customer premises for voice, multimedia, and data applications.

!" IP/optical services platform — Delivering IP services over fiber optics, enabling comprehensive network outsourcing and faster, more cost-effective service provisioning.

!" Internet telephony — Applications for building converged, multi-service and efficiently managed networks.

!" High-speed access solutions — The Local Internet on-ramp. Our breadth of packet portfolio breaks through the first mile to homes and businesses. Service providers can leverage any access technology — dial, DSL, cable, or wireless to meet subscriber needs.

!" Virtual private network solutions — Linking business customers, eBusiness suppliers, and partners through a managed service provider offering to provide complex eBusiness services in a highly reliable, secure, scalable and flexible manner.

!" Next-generation management applications — The “glue” needed to bind the high-performance Internet infrastructure and applications — and then deliver services tailored to individual subscriber requirements.


13

Personal Internet: fuels next-generation content delivery By leveraging recent advances in content networking technology, Nortel Networks Personal Internet is a new approach to the global ‘content boom’ that revolutionizes how users and content come together on the Internet. Accelerating the phenomenal content boom around the world is explosive growth in broadband adoption, coupled with insatiable demand for new content, business applications outsourcing, dramatic increases in the number of Web-enabled devices and Web destinations, and globalization of the Internet.

Our Personal Internet solutions introduce a new layer of network intelligence with the distinct ability to customize content to suit end-user wants and needs. Our patent-pending Adaptive Content Routing technology looks far beyond IP addresses to open new opportunities in real time content mapping. Beyond today’s content distribution schemes that merely focus on localizing content, Personal Internet solutions take the next step by enabling content providers to move beyond tracking Web hits to targeting specific audiences and creating profitable content and streaming media services.

This expanding suite of leading-edge content networking products and leading-edge technology serves both subscriber (access) and content (data/hosting center) domains. These strategic locations at the edge of the Internet provide a new control point to deliver immediate access to customized content and targeted delivery — tailored to the location, bandwidth, and technology of each participating Internet user — to help create long-term revenue opportunities for service and content providers.

Personal Internet is as much about addressing the needs of end users who want instan- taneous access to relevant content as it is about the needs of service and content providers who want to target value-added content at pre-subscribed users to create new services and revenue opportunities. Solutions include personal content portals, content personalization platforms, caches and distribution systems along with content switches, request-to-content routers, and network management services.


14

eBusiness: maximizes your return on customer relationships Nortel Networks eBusiness solutions enable businesses of all kinds to learn about their customers, personalize their experiences, win their loyalty, and reach new profitability. So businesses can achieve a higher Return on Relationships (RoR), Nortel Networks can help

create a seamless customer experience by unifying all customer touchpoints: phone, fax, email, Web, wireless, and personal visits. We can provide the highest-quality, customer-focused eBusiness tools and applications, outstanding Consulting Services and Global Customer Support teams, and a reliable, high-capacity infrastructure to dramatically change the way companies address customer needs and the way they interact with partners and suppliers.

Nortel Networks products and services already enable over 170 billion customer-service transactions a year worldwide. And with our number- one ranked Wireless Internet solutions, anyone can conduct eBusiness anywhere; anytime. Key Nortel Networks eBusiness solutions combine

the power of the Internet with business resources, suppliers, and their partners to deliver more profitable customer experiences. !" Advanced speech recognition — simplifies customer access to automated services,

provides companies with substantial savings, and provides a differentiated, competitive edge.

!" Computer telephony — enhances call center productivity to boost both customer satisfaction and service quality.

!" Customer Interaction Center — helps deliver customers to the right resources quickly and sustain loyalty from multiple touchpoints.

!" Network services — help service providers differentiate themselves in the competitive marketplace, benefit from operational efficiencies, and explore new revenue opportunities.

!" Customer Relationship Management — offers comprehensive sales, service, marketing, and eBusiness solutions so a business can optimize customer relationships and expand customer loyalty.

!" Self-service solutions — unify call centers with the Internet to create a new generation of eServices that re-define customer care.


15

The Nortel Networks advantage

To succeed in the present volatile marketplace, network providers need more than leading-edge hardware and software. The unique combination of the following differentiates us from other vendor choices and helps make Nortel Networks an ideal ally in a rapidly changing competitive environment.

!" Convergence: We stand at the center of the real-time convergence of voice and data, wireless and wireline, and circuit and packet switching. With our industry-leading portfolio in convergence technologies, disparate networks come together with common high-bandwidth backbones with open, multivendor access methods. Our next-generation packet-based portfolio, Succession packet telephony solutions, delivers tomorrow’s packet services with carrier-grade quality, turnkey simplicity, and professional services for new providers wanting to install a new network — and for established service providers wanting to transition today’s communications equipment. We’re in a powerful position to unify networks and deliver the new services — such as optical Internet and e-mobility IP services.

!" Speed and agility: Every four minutes a new network opens up; every four-tenths of a second a new user comes on line. An exploding, competitive environment where trends and market conditions can change overnight creates new challenges for everyone. The priorities today are speed and agility — to anticipate and facilitate change. Time is at the cutting edge of competitive advantage, and Nortel Networks delivers new solutions with condensed delivery schedules. We slashed the Moore’s Law timeline in half by doubling optical capacity every nine months in the last four years. Our research and development groups produce an average of three patents a day in our accelerated search to find new ways to help customers exploit the power of next-generation packet networking, right now, today.

!" Expertise and experience: As the first and only company of its kind in the world, our experience is unmatched by anyone else in building end-to-end solutions. Our customer-facing professionals stand ready to provide service and solutions in all types of networks — data, voice, video, wireline, wireless, public, and private — on a global scale. With this excellent worldwide reach (with operations in more than 180 countries and territories) we’re often already established where our customers want to expand. Nortel Networks has research capabilities around the world, including a network of research and development facilities, affiliated joint ventures, and other collaborations fostering innovative product development and advanced design research in 17 countries. Our engineers — in 41 research labs worldwide — deliver global, scalable, high-capacity public and private networks built on the innovation, IP technology, and application-focus that drive the Internet.


16

Key players: DMS SuperNode systems

Nortel Networks continues to advance network provider growth requirements in time-division multiplexing (TDM) digital communication networks with the Digital Multiplex System (DMS) family of switching systems. Incorporating DMS systems and components into Succession packet telephony solutions helps migrate the reliability, service-richness, ruggedness, capacity, and security taken for granted in the traditional circuit-switched voice network into next-generation, carrier-grade, packet-centric solutions. Field-proven DMS SuperNode switches — from local to international systems — operate on a common hardware base platform to help protect existing investments, even as the business takes on new markets or transitions to packet-based Succession-enabled solutions.

DMS-100 system

The DMS-100 system is a DMS SuperNode application that provides superior local exchange (Class 5) services. Today, Nortel Networks offers the largest menu of fully digital telephony and data services in the industry to support the growing demands of a network provider’s subscriber base — including corporations, small- to mid-sized businesses, universities, residences, and work-at-home accounts.

The order codes for DMS-100 software loads begin with the characters LEC to represent a complete Local Exchange Carrier solution.

DMS-200 and DMS-100/200 systems

The DMS-200 system is a DMS SuperNode application that supports advanced Access Tandem (Class 4) toll office services that can support as many as 112,000 trunks in a Large Tandem configuration. A hybrid DMS-100/200 system combines DMS-100 line-side features with DMS-200 trunk-side capabilities in a single system.

Software load order codes for these systems can begin with: !" The characters LEC — the same software used for the Local Exchange Carrier solution. !" The characters LET — to represent the addition of Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS)

operator services capabilities to the Local Exchange Carrier solution.

DMS-500 system

The DMS-500 Local and Long Distance system is a DMS SuperNode application that combines the local residential and business features of the DMS-100 system, toll and operator capabilities of the DMS-100/200 TOPS, and Long Distance services of the DMS-250 system in a single, robust platform. This total solution provides one of the industry’s most application-rich portfolios of carrier services — loaded with major capabilities that are market-ready today.

The order codes for DMS-500 software loads begin with the characters LLT to represent its Local, Long Distance, and TOPS capabilities.


17

DMS-100 Wireless system The DMS-100 Wireless system is a DMS SuperNode application that integrates DMS-100/200 (local/toll) wireline and DMS Mobile Telephone Exchange (MTX) wireless capabilities on a single platform. This solution offers a single point-of-presence for a network provider in both markets. Its innovated integrated subscriber services — including centralized voice mailbox, one-number capabilities, and feature transparency — offer new revenue opportunities.

The order codes for DMS-100 Wireless software loads begin with the characters LWW to represent its Local Wireline/Wireless capabilities.

New player: Signaling Server platform

The innovative Nortel Networks Signaling Server platform offers advanced signaling capabilities in one of the smallest footprints in the industry. Its fully redundant, modular design uses Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) switching as the internal transport system to reduce the possibility of congestion problems when the system runs at high capacity levels.

This flexible architecture provides the platform for an expanding number of advanced networking products, including: !" BroadBand STP, see page 276 !" Universal Number Portability Master, see page 280 !" Universal Signal Point, see page 281

The software order codes for the Broadband STP and Universal Number Portability Master begin with the characters SSR. The development stream for the Universal Signaling Point application begins with the characters USP.

From circuit to packet

Nortel Networks has a long history of designing networks that can be gracefully upgraded as new technologies become available. Today’s highly evolved DMS switch — with its industry-leading portfolio of revenue-generating services, high reliability, superior quality of service, large capacity, and straightforward scalability — provides a solid foundation for future communication services. In an era where data traffic has exceeded voice on the network, Nortel Networks offers solutions that follow an evolution path towards a richer multimedia world where next-generation packet services connect subscribers over a service-rich, high-bandwidth infrastructure.

Succession-enabled solutions open new realms of possibilities With the expanding Succession packet telephony portfolio, Nortel Networks offers the options of transitioning existing time-division multiplexing (TDM) investments or building a new network to deliver telephony, data, and next-generation packet services over a single infrastructure.


18

Providers can create a multiprotocol, standards-based architecture that continues to support today’s revenue-generating services, while driving competitive, next-generation services — including customized services — to many different types of users. With this breakthrough, business objectives can be mapped to new, end-to-end, packet-intensive services that the market is demanding.

PacketBackboneNetwork

Otherservers

CommunicationServer

Any vendorend office

Currentrevenue streams

Emergingrevenue streams

InteractiveMultimedia Server

Programmable Services

Succession-EnabledServices

Such as SIP-enabled servicesand customized/third partyservices

Such as data VPNs, UnifiedMessaging, and e-commerce

Gateway

HeritageServices

Such as Centrex,DSL, and Residentialservices

Significantly expand revenue opportunities with Succession packet telephony solutions

Succession packet telephony networks use a distributed, open architecture, where newly created multimedia services are hardware independent and run on general computing platforms. This distributed architecture provides unprecedented flexibility and helps ensure that the service provider can benefit from accelerating performance and decelerating cost curves of the future.

For more information about the Succession family of packet telephony solutions, see its chapter beginning on page 39.

Begin the journey with Centrex IP Available today, Centrex IP enables a network provider to gain vital experience with delivering Internet Protocol (IP) services within the familiar environment of the DMS system. This evolutionary approach brings together the proven features of traditional Centrex business services with new solutions for managed IP networks.

Now service providers can cost-effectively gain valuable packet-service deployment experience, benefit from early-entrant momentum, and be better prepared for provisioning and managing full-scale multimedia packet-based offerings, such as the Succession packet telephony portfolio.

For more information about Centrex IP, see its chapter beginning on page 155.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW

19

Software overview

This chapter introduces a number of basic concepts and terms used to describe the standard and optional features in DMS-based software loads.

Use this chapter to become familiar with the various terms found throughout this document that refer to software components within and across releases. Since different vendors use the same terminology in varying ways, it is advisable to read this chapter before progressing to the actual software descriptions.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Software structure 20

Optional software in a PCL 23

Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs) 24

Release terms used in this document 25

Quick guide to key services in this document 26

SOFTWARE OVERVIEW NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

20

Software structure

Designed for the fast-changing, expanding global marketplace, the DMS SuperNode system’s advanced distributed-processing software design provides a continually evolving, fault-tolerant communications engine.

The benefits of standard loads Nortel Networks delivers DMS SuperNode system software with a product structure that features a layered software architecture. With a limited number of well-defined interactions among software components, the layered design is easier to develop and test than traditional approaches that rely on thousands of interactions among hundreds of features. And, making feature interactions more predictable and the software design less complex contribute to producing more reliable software.

Software releases for DMS SuperNode platforms are delivered in Product Computing-Module Loads (PCLs). Each PCL contains the full set of generally available features for a particular type of switching application. New capabilities are always readily available in the switch, ready to be deployed without the delay of reloading software.

“PCL” — a universal software load for a particular type of DMS system.

Standardized loads offer the benefits of rapid feature activation, streamlined switch maintenance and administration, and flexible marketing capabilities for the network provider.

Each network provider establishes a unique, custom mix of active and inactive features for each switch by licensing certain optional order codes (and leaving other optional order codes inactive).

“Order codes” — the individual software modules within a PCL.

Whenever features need to be activated, network providers contact Nortel Networks for licensing and activation information. Since the software is loaded on the switch already, no software reloading is required.


21

PCL codes The code given to a PCL contains eight characters, with the following conventions:

PCL code conventions

Initial characters The first part of the PCL code is an acronym that identifies the particular type of switch the software is designed to support. The prefixes seen most often in this document are:

Prefix Switch application LEC North American local exchange office [DMS-100]

LET North American local exchange office with operator services (TOPS) features [DMS-100/200; DMS-200]

LLT North American combined Local, Long Distance, and TOPS office [DMS-500]

LWW North American combined Local Wireline and Wireless office [DMS-100 Wireless]

SSR BroadBand STP and Universal Number Portability Master products on the Signaling Server platform

USP Universal Signaling Point product on the Signaling Server platform

Final digits The last characters in the PCL code increment with each new release. The numbering sequence used varies somewhat across different switching platforms.


22

Tracking LEC, LET, LLT, and LWW PCLs with “Rel•” When this document discusses a new software feature, the description always identifies which PCLs are planned to introduce the feature. For example, a feature called 1000-Block Number Pooling first became generally available with LEC00013, LET00013, LLT00013, and LWW00007 PCLs.

However, in a number of places in this document, it can become confusing or unnecessarily tedious to list a full lineup of three or four PCLs. For simplicity, this publication uses Rel•xx terminology as a shorthand method of referring to common PCLs as a group.

“Rel•xx” — an informal shorthand method of referring to LEC, LET, LLT, and LWW

PCLs that share the same base software (and a number of the same optional features) as a group. For example, “Rel•13” refers to LEC00013, LET00013, LLT00013, and LWW00007 PCLs.

Here are a few examples of this “Release” convention used throughout this document:

Release Refers to, as a group: Rel•17 LEC00017, LET00017, and LLT00017

Rel•15 LEC00015, LET00015, and LLT00015

Rel•14 LEC00014, LET00014, and LLT00014

Rel•13 LEC00013, LET00013, LLT00013, and LWW00007

– and so forth

The “ • ” in the middle of this new Release term helps to differentiate these releases, at a glance, from other platform software loads, such as Release 3 and Release 4 of Succession packet telephony solutions.

Please note that this shorthand only pertains to software that loads into the Computing Module (or XA-Core) in the DMS system. The Rel•xx designation does not include software releases that load into other hardware platforms, such as the Signaling Server Platform (identified by an SSR or USP prefix in release names). See page 24 for more information on Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs).


23

Optional software in a PCL

Each PCL contains many standard features. However, the network provider can choose from many options within the PCL to tailor the service set and meet the provider’s operational requirements.

Each software capability within the switch that can be licensed is associated with an eight-digit order code. Some order codes contain one or two software features. Other order codes contain a large number of features.

All the available software associated with an order code is already present in a PCL — there is no need to load new software before using a generally available feature.

General service (in this

example, AdvancedIntelligent Network)

Number assignment forone or more related

features (in this example,Display Services)A I N 0 0 0 0 8

Order Code Conventions

The initial characters of the code identify the software for a specific type of service. As examples, all order codes beginning with AIN refer to Advanced Intelligent Network options; all order codes beginning with RES refer to Residential Enhanced Services options.

The final digits of a code are simply assigned to differentiate one or more software features from all other features in a service. For example, AIN00008 (Display Services) offers a completely different set of software features than AIN00007 (Call Model Control) or AIN00009 (AIN Services Support).

The majority of order codes are optional: the network provider must license these optional software modules for right-to-use access. Some order codes are standard: the network provider already has access to these software functions and no licensing decisions need to be made.

Please note the FPG describes new software features only; an order code discussed in this document

might have other features already generally available.

Note: the wireless features on a DMS-100 Wireless system use Common Product Code (CPC) numbers, instead of order codes, to license features. This promotes consistency in software provisioning with the DMS-MTX system. The DMS-100 Wireless chapter starts on page 226.


24

Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs)

This FPG also discusses a number of software loads that reside on equipment other than the Computing Module (or XA-Core) of the DMS SuperNode system. The following table identifies where information on these Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs) appears in this document:

NCL products discussed in this document (arranged alphabetically)

Product Starting page

Call Center Management Information System (CCMIS)

184

Centrex IP • CIPL0001

161

Signaling Server platform • SSR3.0 • SSR3.4 • SSR4.0 • SSR5.0 • USP3.0 • USP6.0

276 280 278 279 281 282

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) • SPM00035 • SPM00115 • SPM00116 • SPM00117

97, 104 102, 105 102, 106 103

SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) • SDMN0015

211

uEMS: data management platform for Universal Edge 9000 DMS • DSL Data Release AD3.1 • DSL Data Release AD4.0

88 90

Also, the “Non-CM software baseline” table on pages 290 and 291 in the Reference chapter identifies the minimum release level a PCL in the Computing Module/XA-Core must be to support specific NCLs.


25

Release terms used in this document

The following table defines and gives examples of the software release terms often seen in this document. The terms have been arranged in order from the most general to the most specific.

Term Description Examples

Release — an informal shorthand method of referring to a number of PCLs as a group (specifically, PCLs that begin with the letters LEC, LET, LLT, and LWW).

Rel•17 Rel•14

PCL (Product Computing-Module Load)

— a single universal software load containing all the software modules available at a given time for a particular type of DMS switch. This software resides in the Com- puting Module or XA-Core of a DMS switching system.

LLT00017 LET00014 LWW00007

NCL (Non-Computing Module Load)

— a single software load that resides in any hardware other than the Computing Module or XA-Core of a DMS switching system.

SSR3.0 SDM00015 AD4.0

Service — an informal grouping of order codes, based on common functionality in the network. Although a “service” is a convenient way to discuss a number of software modules, the software options in a service are not ordered together as a single block. Network providers always license optional software at the individual order code level. Chapters in this document have been arranged by informal service categories.

Advanced Intelligent Network Centrex IP Residential Enhanced Services

Order Code

— software modules containing one or more features. Most order codes are optional (these must be licensed separately), but a few order codes are standard (no licensing decisions need to be made).

Network providers license optional software using the eight-character codes discussed on page 23. The numbering scheme for order codes is static and does not change with releases.

UEDG0001 SPMS0001 NI000052

Feature — the smallest division of software associated with a discrete capability. Features are not individually available for licensing (network providers make licensing decisions at the order code level).

Note: If there is only one feature assigned to an order code, then the feature and the order code share the same name.

Geodetic Location Parameter

Flexible Restore

Release Link Trunking


26

Quick guide to key services in this document

To help you find the information you need quickly, the following associates a few key services, using industry-standard terminology, with various chapters in this document.

For details on this service (industry term)

Refer to this chapter (chapter name)

Starting page

911 emergency services (E911) Emergency Number Services (E911) 175

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Centrex Internet-enabled Call Center solutions 180

Centrex business services Nortel Networks Centrex 163

Computer-Telephony Integration Centrex Internet-enabled Call Center solutions 180

Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Line access solutions 79

High-speed data access Line access solutions 79

Intelligent Networking Advanced Intelligent Networking 123

IP Telephony • Succession packet telephony solutions • Centrex IP

39 155

ISDN: Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Line access solutions 79

ISDN: Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Trunk access solutions 93

Local Number Portability (LNP) Optional base features 57

Long Distance features DMS-500 Long Distance services 133

Operator services Agent Services 215

Optical trunking, direct connect Trunk access solutions 93

Packet networking • Succession packet telephony solutions • Centrex IP

39 155

Residential / small business features Residential Enhanced Services (RES) 169

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Succession packet telephony solutions 39

SS7 signaling network • Optional base features • Signaling Server platform

57 273

Voice over DSL Remote/switch access 115

Voice over IP • Succession packet telephony solutions • Centrex IP

39 155

Voice trunking over ATM Succession packet telephony solutions 39

Wireless services DMS-100 Wireless 226

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 DMS RELEASE STRATEGY

27

DMS release strategy

Nortel Networks is doubling our development efforts to deliver the next-generation packet solutions the global marketplace is demanding. This chapter announces our new development plans for North America that will help service providers of all kinds to gain first mover advantage in transitioning to the packet-optimized infrastructure of the future.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Accelerating the transition from circuit

to packet 28

DMS PCL support policy 32

DMS RELEASE STRATEGY NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

28

Accelerating the transition from circuit to packet

To help our customers transition to next-generation packet networking, Nortel Networks is committed to expanding our resources to deliver two quality-driven Succession portfolio releases a year. We will redirect key talent and facilities from the mature DMS platform to the new solutions — resulting in one DMS software release per year, after the general availability of Rel•15 PCLs. This once-a-year release strategy, already in practice with wireless DMS-MTX and international DMS-MMP loads, more closely aligns with the industry’s practice of deploying one release a year — as well as minimizes network churn as customers begin transitioning to Succession packet telephony solutions.

Development: still two releases annually

Ever since Rel•02, Nortel Networks development groups have produced two new product releases a year. Our new plans do not interrupt this well-established cycle. Although these two releases will be available to customers deploying Succession packet telephony solutions, North American DMS systems will “skip” every other release.

Thus, the next DMS release following Rel•15 will be Rel•17 (features originally planned for Rel•16 will be incorporated into Rel•17) with PCL names of LEC00017, LET00017, and LLT00017. The DMS release after that will be Rel•19 with LEC00019, LET00019, and LLT00019.

DMS systems will “skip” every other release


29

Succession releases: a six-month cycle Having previously announced Succession portfolio releases, such as SN03 and SN04, become generally available every six months helps service providers plan and deploy the new, leading-edge infrastructure with the most advanced revenue-generating services in the industry.

By combining the best of the Internet with the best of today’s telephone network, carrier-grade Succession packet telephony solutions reliably transport voice, data, and multimedia traffic over a single infrastructure — to open a whole new realm of revenue possibilities. This multiprotocol, standards-based architecture transports today’s revenue services, while supporting competitive, next-generation packet services — including customized services created by the service provider in an open programming environment.

Refer to the Succession packet telephony solutions chapter, beginning on page 39, for an overview of this packet-based solutions portfolio that helps open new market opportunities,

protect revenue streams, and reduce the total cost of network ownership.

DMS system releases: a twelve-month cycle Since Rel•16 had been scheduled to become available at about the same time as the Succession portfolio’s SN03 release, Nortel Networks has decided to minimize network churn across customer networks by deferring the availability of these DMS features until they can be incorporated with new Rel•17 software development. Thereafter, Nortel Networks will continue to expand current services, robustness features, and regulatory requirements on DMS SuperNode systems with a one-year development cycle. Special focus will be placed on those hardware and software solutions that enable the transition from circuit to packet, such as: !" XA-Core — the multiprocessor Core for offices to transition to a Communication Server

2000 in a Succession packet telephony solution. !" Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) — the optical peripheral that can be transitioned to a

Multi-Service Gateway 4000 (MG 4000) in a Succession packet telephony solution. !" SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) — the dedicated operations, administration, and

maintenance (OAM) solution that can be incorporated as the element manager for the Communication Server 2000.

!" Universal Edge 9000 DMS — the multiservice line peripheral that can be transitioned to a Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway in a Succession packet telephony solution.

Nortel Networks will continue to develop new DMS features and services that provide the greatest value to our customers’ networks. As an example, we are planning to release a group of new Rel•16 software features for the SPM as originally scheduled — ahead of Rel•17 DMS PCLs (see bottom of next page for details).


30

DMS PCLs: released serially In the past, we released LEC, LET, and LLT PCLs in a parallel fashion, at about the same time period. Our new plans now call to release these North American PCLs in a serial rollout to ensure comprehensive testing and verification on the various DMS application environments.

For example, LEC00015 and LET00015 are scheduled to be generally available in May of 2001. LLT00015 is anticipated to become available in September. Refer to the following table for current general availability schedules, subject to change based on market need and engineering requirements.

Scheduled software availability for DMS platforms discussed in this document

Target GA/FVS Platform Releases

DMS-100/200* LEC00014, LET000014

DMS-100 Wireless* LWW00007 Available now

DMS-500* LLT00014

May 2001 DMS-100/200* LEC00015, LET000015

September 2001 or earlier, depending on

identification of FCS sites DMS-500* LLT00015

1Q02 Succession CS 2000 SN03

3Q02 Succession CS 2000 SN04

June 2002 DMS-100/200* LEC00017, LET000017

Sept 2002 DMS-500* LLT00017

* Universal Edge 9000 DMS, XPM, SDM, and other DMS-dependent loads are released along with their LEC, LET, LLT, and LWW (and TOPS with LET/LLT) PCLs. Please note the Rel•16 SPM load will be available at its originally scheduled date (see next).

SPM Rel•16 load available with Rel•15 PCLs To provide continued product enhancements and to help ease the transition to Succession packet telephony solutions, Nortel Networks will deliver the Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) Release 16 software load as scheduled. This SPM00116 NCL will be completely compatible with Rel•15 PCLs, currently planned to be available: !" November 2001 for DMS-100/200 systems !" December 2001 for DMS-500 systems For Rel•17 and beyond, the SPM software releases will be available at the same time as the associated PCLs become available.


31

Sustained products As Nortel Networks continuously adds new technological capabilities to our portfolio, market requirements start to decline for some mature products. The introduction of new technologies has recently affected the development plans for the following existing products.

Sustained systems discussed in this document

Platform Last scheduled release Recommended migration

DMS-STP STBA0050, STSE0050 Signaling Server Platform products See Signaling Server platform chapter, starting on page 273

DMS-100 Wireless LWW00007 DMS MTX, DMS-100, or Succession packet telephony solutions

TOPS and IWS Rel•15, for new features. The software will be delivered in Rel•17, but with no new content.

Succession packet telephony solutions

Although there will be no new feature development on these mature platforms, we will continue to provide regulatory and critical robustness features in software patches. All these systems in the field continue to receive full Nortel Networks customer service support.


32

DMS PCL support policy

With the new software rollout for DMS-100, 200, and 500 systems, the North American DMS PCL upgrade policy changes. DMS PCLs continue to be supported — including emergency outage and non-emergency support — inside a two-year window, as before. But now, in keeping with the long-established practice by network providers of upgrading systems to one new release each year, DMS PCLs must be upgraded from one release to the next, starting with Rel•15. This ends the option of “skipping” DMS releases, previously available when there were two DMS software releases annually. After Rel•15, there’s one DMS release available each year, and the two-year window only permits a software upgrade from one DMS PCL to the next.

The DMS system PCL support policy uses five terms to define software release status:

!" FIRST CUSTOMER SHIP (FCS) When design, coding, and internal laboratory/quality testing of a new PCL software release are complete, the software is loaded into one or more customer-operated DMS systems (previously called verification offices). These offices serve voluntarily as “real-world” applications and are closely monitored and supported by Nortel Networks.

!" FIRST VOLUME SHIP (FVS) After successful completion of the FCS and subsequent “ramp-up” activities, the PCL software release is declared ready for First Volume Ship (FVS), previously called its general availability (GA) date.

!" PRODUCTION Once a FCS software release becomes FVS, it is considered the “Production” release until the next release reaches its FVS date. The Production release is the standard load for DMS system initials and extensions. Nortel Networks offers full software support for each Production release, including emergency outage and non-emergency support.

!" ACTIVE When a new “Production” release becomes available, the network provider need not upgrade immediately to it. Between the time a new PCL comes out and the two-year window ends, the software release currently on a system is considered “Active.” Although a Production release is recommended and routinely deployed to DMS system initials, Nortel Networks offers full software support for an Active release.

!" RETIRED Software is considered “Retired” two years after its FVS date and is not recommended for in-service offices (it is not available for deployment in DMS system initials or extensions). Sup- port for Retired releases is available only under a separate service contract, and is limited to support that does not require patching or other design effort.

As shown in the illustration on the next page, a North American DMS system must upgrade from an existing release to the next (for example, from Release 15 to Release 17 — but not from Release 15 to Release 19). All transitions must result in the loading of a Production release.


33

North American DMS PCL support policy at a glance

Refer to the table below for the schedule when current PCLs are scheduled to become Retired releases. Note: With the retirement of the DMS-STP platform at the STP005 release, the STP005 retirement date has been extended until June 2003. In addition, STP04.1 retirement has been extended another three months to allow customers more time to migrate to STP005.

Supported releases (as of April 2001)

Release status

PCL order code

Retires

LEC00014, LET00014 LLT00014

Nov 2002

STBA0050, STSE0050 June 2003

Production

LWW00007 Feb 2003 LEC00013, LET00013 LLT00013

May 2002

LWW00006 Dec 2001 LEC00012, LET00012 LLT00012

Nov 2001

STBA0042, STSE0042 June 2001 LEC00011, LET00011 LLT00011

May 2001

Active

STBA0041, STSE0041 Mar 2001 Recently Retired

LEC00010, LET00010 LLT00010, LWW00005

FEATURE PLANNING GUIDE OVERVIEW NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

34

Feature Planning Guide overview

The Feature Planning Guide (FPG) serves as a planning tool for network planners, marketers, and others in service provider companies who require detailed information about our software plans — and how these plans can help generate new revenue, cut costs, and streamline operations.

This FPG is part of the continuing commitment at Nortel Networks to provide as much advance-planning information as possible so our customers can confidently make informed investment decisions. By discussing future software developments for the North American market, the FPG informs network providers of new software features designed to help them succeed in the fiercely competitive telecommunications market.

In this chapter

Section Starting page About this final edition 35

General layout 35

How to read the software descriptions 36

In the Reference chapter 38

Training for products discussed in this document 38

Please note The FPG is an advance-planning document, and is not intended to be used as a provisioning guide. Availability dates are subject to change based on market need and engineering requirements. Network planning and provisioning should always be conducted in close cooperation with regional Nortel Networks representatives, and with reference to appropriate technical publications.

Availability dates in this publication refer to our projected release dates, and will not necessarily correspond to the exact availability dates for individual network providers. Businesses and other subscribers should check with their network provider about availability in their areas.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 FEATURE PLANNING GUIDE OVERVIEW

35

About this final edition Software descriptions in this guide provide summaries of new capabilities developed with input from customers and emerging industry and international opportunities and standards. Our developments take full advantage of today’s high-speed, wide-area, packet-intensive, and mobile communications network — so our customers can add high-demand services to their service portfolios and attract new subscribers. This document introduces the reader to the new software features and key hardware developments on the DMS-100, DMS-100/200, DMS-500, DMS-100 Wireless, and Signaling Server Platform systems — with a view to transitioning these investments to the packet-based Succession packet telephony solutions.

This will be the last Feature Planning Guide that will be available in printed form. In the future, advance-planning information will appear on our nortelnetworks.com Web

site. There you will also be able to access updated product and solutions information, online support and training information, and a variety of interactive resources.

General layout

The information in this FPG appears in chapters that contain any number of different sections.

A chapter begins with a box like this

A section begins with a header similar to this

The name of a chapter appears in the outside margin of the header at the top of each page. The main chapters in this document may contain: !" A very brief summary about the chapter or service on the first page. !" In this chapter table of the sections in a chapter. !" An overview of the service’s benefits and capabilities. !" A few chapters may then have a section on Standard Base software that details the new

“standard” features in a release. These are software features that are available in a PCL for use and do not have to be licensed separately.

!" All remaining sections detail new “optional” order codes. Optional software is already part of the PCL loaded into the switch, but must be licensed (by order codes) for access and right-to-use. Refer to the next page for details on the layout of a typical software description found in these sections.


36

How to read the software descriptions

The following example illustrates the typical layout for a software description in this edition of the Feature Planning Guide.

Order code information The first part of a software description pertains to the order code and not the specific features. To help you find information quickly, a distinctive dual-box header visually separates one order code description from another. !" The large solid box on the left identifies the order code by name (“Enhanced 911 Base” in

the above example). !" The smaller box on the right identifies the actual eight-character order code (“ENS00005” in

the above example). This is the number needed to license all the features that follow.

Immediately underneath the solid box, in italics, is a brief summary of the entire order code as a whole (not of any particular feature in the order code). After the order code’s summary appear all the new features available with an order code. Most order codes only have one or two features. But, in some cases, a larger number of features follow after the order code header/ summary, one after the other. Where possible, we arrange the features available in Rel•14 ahead of the features available in Rel•15, followed by features available in Rel•17.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 FEATURE PLANNING GUIDE OVERVIEW

37

Feature information Each description starts with the name of a feature in bold print. If there is only one feature available with an order code, then the order code and feature share the same (or similar) name.

The name of a feature begins with a icon if this is the first time that a particular feature appears in any DMS-100/500 Feature Planning Guide. This icon helps those readers that need to carefully track features from one FPG to another.

Important note about the icon

This icon is often misunderstood to mean a particular feature is new to DMS Super- Node systems. Actually, all the software features discussed in this document are new.

The “New” icon only identifies a particular feature that appears for the first time in any DMS-100/DMS-500 Feature Planning Guide publication.

On the very next line, in SMALLER PRINT, are the PCL(s) that plan to have the feature available (see page 21 for a table of PCL names). If the software loads onto hardware other than the Computing Module or XA-Core, the name of a Non-Computing Module Load (NCL) appears on this line.

The body of a typical feature’s write-up divides into separate easy-to-read parts, each with a separator in SMALL BOLD PRINT: !" KEY CAPABILITIES summarize the feature’s functionality. When available, a number appears at

Technical reference so the reader can request more information about a particular feature from a Nortel Networks representative using this eight-digit development code (also called an “ActID”).

!" PRINCIPAL BENEFITS list target applications and key benefits of a feature from the standpoint of a network provider.

!" MAJOR DEPENDENCIES highlight significant prerequisites for the particular feature in hardware, other software, or both. This information simply serves as a convenient flag, and is not comprehensive (a complete list of dependencies varies according to a network provider’s particular service mix).

If a feature’s description is brief (as many of the software descriptions are in the Standard base features chapter), then these separators are unnecessary and are not used.


38

In the Reference chapter

To help you find the information you need quickly, the FPG provides extensive cross-referencing indexes in the back of this document, showing the page(s) in this publication where particular information appears. The tables and indexes include: !" Minimum hardware baselines for Rel•14 and beyond on DMS SuperNode systems !" Minimum hardware baseline information to support optional features !" Manufacture discontinued hardware and software and their replacements !" Product releases required in the switch to support Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs) !" Changes in existing feature information since the previous FPG !" Features that appear in any DMS-100/DMS-500 FPG for the first time !" Software planned for general availability (FVS) in upcoming releases !" Indexes by feature technical reference, feature name, and order code !" An indexed comprehensive list of acronyms and abbreviations that appear in this FPG

Also, a special reader response card appears at the end of this document. Although this is the final printed edition of the FPG, Nortel Networks encourages you to use this postage-free form to comment on how we can best serve you through our Web site.

Training for products discussed in this document

Thousands of telecommunications professionals expand their expertise each year by taking courses offered through Nortel Networks Training and Documentation Services for Global Customer Service. Our growing portfolio of self-paced courses — including Computer-Based Training (CBT), videos, and workbooks — offers significant cost-effectiveness and convenience. And, our extensive portfolio of instructor-led courses provides the live interaction and hands-on exercises to maximize work performance. Nortel Networks continues to expand course offerings so service providers can access the latest information on DMS products, Succession packet telephony solutions, Preside, OPTera, Wireless solutions, and more.

For more information on our complete training portfolio, contact your company’s training coordinator, or, in North America: !" Call Nortel Networks Global Customer Service at 1-877-662-5669 !" Browse our Internet Web page at:

http://www.nortelnetworks.com/td

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 SUCCESSION PACKET TELEPHONY SOLUTIONS

39

Succession packet telephony solutions

Today, data travels on a public carrier network that was largely designed to carry voice. These existing Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) networks are quickly converging to packet-based networks that can efficiently carry voice, data, and video. Packet networks reduce costs, scale easily, support new, high-margin services, and extend geographic reach. However, each service provider faces the opportunity to transition to packet with a different set of challenges. An Internet service provider wanting to deliver voice services, or an incumbent facing stiff competition from alternate service providers, or a mobile operator needing to evolve to multimedia services all have unique goals, business plans, and requirements that cannot be met with a “one size fits all” offering.

The carrier-grade Nortel Networks Succession portfolio of packet telephony solutions offers the options of transforming an existing network or building a new network. Network providers can create or partner new applications and services simply, quickly, and cost-effectively. This service-independent approach expands revenue opportunities by delivering innovative telephony, data, multimedia, and custom-programmed services over a single, converged infrastructure. Whether the provider is an incumbent, newcomer, or an established full service carrier — or a cable operator, Internet service provider, or mobile network operator — Succession offerings can adapt to any market, any infrastructure, and any business requirement without compromise to efficiency, economy, performance, reliability, or revenue potential.

This chapter summarizes the applications and benefits of this expanding portfolio, and how network providers can protect current investments and revenue streams while beginning the transition to a simplified, multi-service network.

In this chapter

Section Starting page A whole new realm of opportunities 40 Building blocks at a glance 44 Offers the industry’s broadest portfolio of

solutions 46

Initial availability 49

SUCCESSION PACKET TELEPHONY SOLUTIONS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

40

A whole new realm of opportunities

Succession packet telephony solutions break free of today’s constraints to deliver a multiprotocol, standards-based architecture that transports all of today’s revenue services, while supporting competitive, next-generation packet services to many different types of users from one, unified, switching and transport infrastructure. By combining the best of the Internet with the best of today’s telephone network, these solutions can help established carriers and emerging service providers succeed in an increasingly complex and economically challenging global communications marketplace.

Simplifies the network topology The key to offering this unparalleled flexibility is simplicity. Based on open standards, the Succession portfolio’s simplified packet infrastructure replaces today’s complex, node-centric hierarchy and multiple overlay payload networks with a single, modular, geographically dispersed network that performs like a single, unified, yet distributed switch. This flattened topology enables inter-office bearer path connections to be made directly between line-access gateways without the requirement for a tandem or any intermediate trunking gateways.

This efficiency removes the need for Access Tandem offices and eliminates a number of cross-connects, multiplexers, facilities, and peripherals. Having fewer elements to manage offers gains in network reliability, survivability, and service deployment speed-to-market — along with associated reductions in network engineering, training, and operating costs.

LocalExchange

LocalExchange

Gateways

Today’s Network: With Succession packet telephony solutions:

InterexchangeCarrier

InterexchangeCarrier

LocalExchange

LocalExchangeLocal

Exchange

LocalExchange

LocalExchange

LocalExchange

PacketBackboneNetwork

Access Tandem/Transit Office

Central control andmaintenance

Scattered controland maintenance

elements

Internet ServiceProvider

Internet ServiceProvider

Succession packet telephony solutions simplify the network topology

Since Succession elements can be mixed with each other, and interwork with standards-compliant equipment from other vendors, service providers enjoy unprecedented versatility in network planning, deployment, and growth.


41

Protects current revenue streams and network investments While putting voice into packets is easy, offering the full range of services that transparently interfaces with today’s telephone network is dauntingly complex. Succession packet telephony solutions help protect existing hardware network investments, with continuing support for today’s profitable services, including custom calling features, Centrex, data access, and SS7-based intelligent network services. Various Multi-service Gateways transparently convert signaling and bearer traffic between Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) devices and the Succession packet backbone. These gateways enable providers to transition to a broadband network without putting today’s revenue-generating services and network investments at risk: there is no need to modify current multivendor TDM elements, trunking, or back office systems — or to re-develop software features.

Even with a Succession-enabled network in operation, the network provider has free reign to decide when to upgrade individual TDM elements/facilities to packet-focused platforms. To further protect existing investments, some TDM elements can be transitioned to Succession environments with minimal hardware and software upgrades.

Helps capture and retain enterprise accounts

With this breakthrough, business objectives can be mapped to new, end-to-end, packet-intensive services the market is demanding. The multi-service dexterity of this next-generation network offers new ways to attract more subscribers with compelling solutions that could not be supported on legacy networks — along with associated carrier reliability, service manageability, and cost efficiencies.

Now a network provider can easily mix the full range of services in the network today with new, multimedia, personalized, interactive, and mobility-enhancing packet-based services that weren’t previously possible. Our simplified network design and technology-neutral architecture help rush to market a comprehensive service portfolio.

As a high-performance service engine, a Succession-enabled packet telephony solution helps power future growth with unparalleled service diversity. A new generation of collaborative services emerges from the best of the Internet, public switched telephone network, fiber, wireless, and business networks, such as: !" Global voice and data Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) !" Unified messaging !" Integrated multimedia conferencing !" Integrated wireless Centrex !" Softphone and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) terminal support !" Next-generation Call Center applications


42

To truly differentiate a service provider’s portfolio, the Succession portfolio offers a full-featured open programmability solution. This option offers providers (and third-

party developers) an entire range of support tools to quickly create, integrate, provision, test, fine-tune, and manage customized services, including multimedia services based on Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). Reusable JavaBean building blocks rapidly adapt to new service demands. And documented, open Application

Programming Interfaces (APIs) give access to the rich set of underlying Succession call and session management functions and services.

By streamlining both the creation and deployment of new services, the open programmability solution frees the imagination and reduces time-to-market of new,

creative, revenue-generating services on a large scale.

With the Succession packet telephony portfolio, the future of service creation appears in a complete, Java-based, commercial hardware environment on centralized, large-scale servers that can be upgraded easily, so new, revenue-generating services can be made available more quickly across the network.

Delivers carrier-grade quality and reliability

Any new offering that delivers less than the quality, reliability, and ease of use of today’s public switched telephone network (PSTN) services cannot live up to consumer expectations and will have difficulty growing beyond a niche market. Nortel Networks understands the public carrier marketplace and has been successfully serving network providers for decades with demonstrated reliability. Now our world-class robustness, scalability, and quality of service required by global telecommunication providers extend to packet-based Internet Telephony.

A Succession-enabled network delivers end-to-end, high-bandwidth solutions with the carrier-grade quality and lock-tight security demanded by mission-critical services. Demonstrated Nortel Networks best-in-class robustness extends to a packet-intensive environment by: !" Distributing network elements across a physically and logically distributed architecture to

enhance problem isolation and survivability. !" Using fault-tolerant hardware and software technologies to offer field-proven, industry-

leading redundant protection along with highly scalable capacity. !" Separating maintenance functions from network connectivity, so network problems can

be rapidly isolated with independent monitoring, diagnostic, and control capabilities.


43

In contrast to the fixed-bandwidth facilities in use today, packet networks dynamically allocate and share network resources to significantly streamline planning, engineering, and monitoring. Since our simplified, standards-based design reduces the number of discrete operations, management, and transport elements in (and between) networks, there’s associated savings in real estate, power, spares, craftsperson productivity, and HVAC expenses.

Real-world business cases demonstrate capital and operational savings of between 30 and 50%, depending on service mix, growth rates, and the particular Succession packet telephony solution in use. When compared to PSTN solutions, using Succession switched virtual circuits for private line connections can be up to 85% faster to deploy and close to 42% less expensive to operate.

Simplifies deployment by incorporating industry standards

Nortel Networks actively participates in standards forums around the world to promote interworking of packet-based solutions across multivendor networks. A sampling of current and emerging global standards being integrated into Succession packet telephony applications include: !" Trunking interfaces: DS-0, DS-1/E1, DS-3/E-3, OC-3/STM-1, STM-1J, OC-12/STM-4 !" Signaling network (SS7) protocols: BICC, SCCP, ISUP, TCAP, MTP !" Voice over Packet: H.248/Megaco, MGCP, H.323, IEEE: 802.6, PLCP, DOCSIS !" Maintenance protocols: CORBA, SNMP, OSSDI, SIP, SIP-T !" Fiber interfaces: SONET/APS, SDH/MSP !" Class of services: AAL 1/2/5, CBR, ABR, UBR !" ATM Forum: ATM-R specifications, UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0, PNNI 1.0, NNI IISP, AINI, CAC,

TM 4.0, ILMI 4.0 !" International Telecommunications Union (ITU): Q.766, Q.543, I.610, I.432, I.363, G.131 !" Universal protocols: MPLS, TCP/IP, FTP, RTP, Telnet !" Telcordia: GRs, TRs, SRs, CORE, AMADNS, TMN, NEBS !" Safety regulatory bodies: UL, CSA, FCC, EN, ETSI, JSA

Our on-going commitment to evolve with global standards — ready to accommodate future protocols and solutions — minimizes transition risks, speeds the deployment of new services, and enables network providers to add the latest technologies as they become available.


44

Building blocks at a glance

Whether you build new or incorporate existing equipment and facilities, the large Succession packet telephony portfolio offers standards-compliant elements that network providers can combine to address specific business plans and market demands.

Networkintelligence

Packetbackbone

Subscriber access and existing TDM investmentsT

DM

Pa

cke

t

Multi-serviceGateways

Simplified view of Succession packet telephony solutions

The expanding Succession family of software and hardware innovations can be conveniently grouped into the following broad categories: !" Network Intelligence components provide call control, applications, SS7 signaling, and

other centralized services. A growing family of Communication Servers delivers the complete set of telephony features available on today’s PSTN along with next-generation applications, based on SIP and other innovations, across a distributed network.

CS 2000 CS 3000Softswitch

UniversalSignaling

Point

UniversalAudioServer

InteractiveMultimedia

Server

Shasta5000BSN

Full servicesuite

Java-basedsoftswitch

SS7messaging

Audioservices

SIP & custom-ized services

IP policiesand security

Other network intelligence components

Packet backbone

Communication Server (CS) optionsServices / gateway control

IPATM orIP

ATM orIP

ATM orIP

ATM orIP

IP

Key network intelligence components in initial Succession releases For descriptions of these elements, go to http://www.nortelnetworks.com/succession


45

!" A packet backbone network provides a best-in-class multi-service transport and service delivery infrastructure. Able to grow from gigabits to hundreds of terabits per second with superior Quality of Service (QoS), the backbone’s dynamic routing and automatic resource allocation replace today’s fixed-bandwidth, engineering-intensive trunking.

!" Multi-service Gateways tie existing TDM networks with a Succession packet telephony solution. Since gateways provide connectivity to existing PSTN investments, they enable interworking between existing TDM-based and new packet-based investments. #"Access gateways provide technology-independent, multi-service access. These flexible

multi-service gateways support a broad sweep of access technologies, including copper lines, xDSL, cable, private lines, ATM over copper or fiber, and wireless.

#"Trunk gateways enable carriers to leverage existing network equipment, reduce multi-service transport costs, and accommodate rapid traffic growth.

Backbone

routing

Passport15000

MP

LS

do

main

IPd

om

ain

AT

Md

om

ain

OpteraPacketCore

Passport15000 VSS

Passport7480

Shasta5000 BSN

Multi-ServiceGateway 4000

Passport PacketVoice Gateways

CVX 1800Multi-Service

Access Switch

UniversalEdge IADs

CMTS

SIP/IP phones& soft clients

Multi-TerminalAdapter

Passport 5430Router/Gateway

Universal Edge9000 Media

Gateway

Passport8600

Edgeaggregation

Multi-ServiceGateways

Subscriberaccess

Existing TDMinfrastructure

CableMedia

Simplified view of bearer-path elements

For descriptions of these elements, go to http://www.nortelnetworks.com/succession


46

Offers the industry’s broadest portfolio of solutions

Succession packet telephony solutions enable service providers to nimbly recreate themselves to meet new business demands. A large carrier can gracefully add enhanced services for differentiation from competitors or to explore new markets. An emerging service provider can use the portfolio’s rich service innovation tools to carve just the right niche to be a long-term player.

With the industry’s most flexible and versatile architecture, Succession packet telephony networks deliver carrier-grade solutions for all market segments — each with a variety of deployment choices. To simplify the options in this expanding portfolio for network providers, Nortel Networks organizes these solutions into three broad categories: !" Nortel Networks Packet Telephony Trunking Solutions enable packet services between

carrier nodes (packet or TDM), across carrier networks, and to enterprise networks. !" Nortel Networks Packet Telephony Wireline Universal Access Solutions deliver a

comprehensive service portfolio to residential and business end users with a large variety of access options.

!" Nortel Networks Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solutions provide integrated voice and data services with a complete portfolio that includes high-performance access terminals at the customer premises.

Of course, a mixture of solutions within these categories can be deployed to address a provider’s needs across an entire network. For example, carriers providing both local and long distance/toll services might pair a core network solution with an access solution. Or, a service provider may choose one core network solution to evolve an existing network — and another solution for expansion out of territory.

�� Packet Telephony Trunking Solutions

The following three solutions now being developed in this category take full advantage of the cost efficiencies and open standards of packet networks.

Two full-featured solutions The following two solutions are full-featured, industry-standard networks that integrate voice, data, and multimedia that support, initially, a comprehensive feature set from the DMS-200 Access Tandem and DMS-250 Long Distance systems — as well as new feature flexibility and next-generation data services. In the future, these solutions will interoperate with Wireline Universal Access and Integrated Access solutions to provide line-side business and residential features. Gateways that join the TDM and packet backbone domains can be located up to 950 air miles from the Communication Server 2000, to support simplified geographic expansion.

!" Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Full-Featured AAL1

This “full-featured” solution uses an ATM broadband packet backbone with standard AAL1 formatting to deliver functionality that is equivalent to TDM networks. This offering can be deployed as a new network or as an evergreen solution for a hybrid TDM/ATM network.


47

!" Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Full-Featured AAL2/IP This solution initially delivers a comprehensive feature set based on the DMS-250 Long Distance system, with such services as Direct Distance Dialing (DDD), International DDD (IDDD), N00/NXX dialing, calling card services, Carrier Advanced Intelligent Networking (CAIN), prompt and collect services on ISUP agencies, local number portability, virtual private networking, call detail record (CDR) billing, fraud protection features, and more. This solution can be implemented with either standard AAL2 or IP compression to provide an efficient, cost-effective solution for carriers.

Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Targeted AAL2/IP This solution enables service providers to deliver key, high revenue-generating services such as 800/900 Toll-free calling, local number portability, virtual private networking, number translation services, and 1+ dialing. Interoperable with either IP or ATM backbones, this solution features the award-winning Nortel Networks Communication Server 3000, a Java-based softswitch that runs on an open, industry-standards based platform. The commercially available hardware platform enables easy, low-cost network commissioning, and enables network providers to optimize the use of highly skilled engineering and installation teams.

This solution is ideal for network providers who want to enter new markets or grow capacity in existing markets.

��

�� Packet Telephony Wireline Universal Access Solutions The first solution Nortel Networks will deliver in this category provides next-generation packet services to residential and business end users with standard AAL1 formatting.

Packet Telephony Wireline Universal Access Solution – ATM AAL1 This high-capacity local-line solution provides breakthrough value, high return, and low-cost access by extending the use of voice lines to include data and video services. This solution provides our industry-leading voice services over a packet network — while providing high-speed data access over the same copper wire. Line services (based on the leading DMS-100 service portfolio) can be located up to 950 air miles from a single Communications Server 2000.

Next-generation, H.248-compliant line gateways transport bearer traffic over an ATM network with lower costs, faster deployment, and dynamic bandwidth allocation. Switch exhaust is virtually eliminated as additional gateways and communication servers can be added, as needed. Based on open, industry-standard control protocols, this solution can be deployed as a migration from a traditional voice or data network or installed as a new network.

Other universal access solution options are currently being defined for the future.


48

�� Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solutions

The following solutions deliver voice services over high-speed data pipes so the network provider can benefit from the economic efficiencies of integrated voice and data all the way to the edge of the network.

Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solution – Cable Media Currently, voice and data are available to Cable customers — however, separate networks are required. This solution creates new revenue opportunities by delivering video, data, and voice over a converged broadband cable network that connects existing plant investments over an IP backbone. Currently, this solution interworks with the Arris family of Cable Media Termination Systems (such as the CMTS 1500) and imbedded Multi-Terminal Adapters (such as Packet Port) into a complete, end-to-end solution. Nortel Networks plans to extend this interoperability to other prominent CMTS and MTA vendors in the future.

In its first release, this solution is anticipated to support DOCSIS standards and include flow-through provisioning, static and provisioned Quality of Service levels, CALEA regulatory features, and the top 30 revenue-generating CCF/CLASS residential voice services.

Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solution – Wireline This solution supports a wide variety of customer premises-based access options, including industry-leading Integrated Access Devices (IADs) from Nortel Networks. Customer-located IADs connect to an IP or ATM packet backbone, with industry-standard H.248 or Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) providing call control. By integrating all communication over a common uplink, either voice or data can burst to fill the bandwidth available — resulting in highly efficient bandwidth use (to maintain QoS for voice, voice packets are given priority over data packets).

This solution can complement an existing PBX by enabling interconnection to the packet backbone over ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunks. Alternately, a subscribing business could opt for Centrex services to supplement or even eliminate a PBX entirely.

Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solution – IP Clients This solution operates much in the same way as the Nortel Networks Integrated Carrier Access Solution – Wireline solution, above, but supports IP-based software clients in place of IADs.


49

Initial availability

Field trials of various Succession packet telephony solutions are in progress today all around the world, meeting the specific requirements of a wide range of network providers. Please contact your Nortel Networks representative for more information on how to gain first mover advantage with our many upcoming field trial opportunities.

The following summarizes the current near-term plans for the general availability of various Succession packet telephony solutions discussed in this chapter. The scheduled dates for First Volume Ship (FVS) are specifically for the North American market.

Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Full-Featured AAL1 This solution uses Voice Trunking over ATM (VToA) technologies to support over a million Busy-Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) by SN03, with a feature set based on the DMS-200 Access Tandem and DMS-250 Long Distance systems.

Release SN02 – FVS 4Q01 This initial release, for new networks only, introduces the solution by supporting the Access Tandem portion of the total feature set.

Release SN03 – FVS 1Q02 This release, available for new or existing networks, adds the Long-Distance portion of the total feature set.

Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Full-Featured AAL2/IP

This solution integrates voice, data, and multimedia over an ATM or IP broadband packet backbone with a comprehensive service set based on the DMS-250 Long Distance system.

Release SN04 – FVS 3Q02 This release, available for new or existing networks, interworks with legacy investments while offering as much as two million BHCA (depending on call model).

Packet Telephony Trunking Solution – Targeted AAL2/IP

This solution, for new network installations with either IP or ATM backbones, helps service providers wanting to provide key Long Distance and new, customized services. This offering features the award-winning Communication Server 3000 softswitch and support for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interworking for IP client services starting in Release 4.

Release 3.x – FVS 3Q01 This release becomes available in select geographic regions with support for basic number translation services (NTS) and virtual private networking (VPN): !" Release 3.0 supports an IP backbone !" Release 3.1 supports an ATM backbone


50

Release 4.x – FVS 1Q02 This release becomes available in select geographic regions with expanded capacity and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interworking for IP client services.

Release 4.x.1 – FVS 2Q02 This release adds global support of SIP services for use with IP backbones, third-party H.248 gateway interoperability, and basic call interworking with the Communication Server 2000 with ATM and IP over ATM (IPoATM) deployment.

Packet Telephony Wireline Universal Access Solution – ATM AAL1 This local-line solution provides our industry-leading voice services built around an ATM packet backbone. Based on open, industry-standard control protocols, such as H.248 gateway control, this high-capacity solution be transitioned from an existing voice or data network or be installed as a new network.

Release SN04 – FVS 3Q02 This initial release interworks with legacy lines to deliver transparent Residential, Centrex, and Meridian Business Set service operation. Depending on service mix and other engineering factors, this release is projected to support up to 400,000 lines and as many as 80,000 trunks.

Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solution – Cable Media This solution delivers video, data, and voice over a single, IP-based, high-performance converged cable infrastructure, in place of multiple wireline, coax, and fiber overlays.

Release SN03 – FVS 1Q02 This initial release features flow-through provisioning, key residential voice services, and compliance with DOCSIS 1.1 standards.

Packet Telephony Integrated Access Solution – Wireline Ideal for network providers serving small to medium sized businesses looking to control facilities costs, this solution includes a portfolio of leading-edge Integrated Access Devices (IADs) to offer derived-line benefits.

Release SN04 – FVS 3Q02 This initial release, for new networks only, can terminate an enterprise’s T1, PRI, and voice- plus-data over DSL lines using voice over ATM (AAL1 and AAL2 encoding). IAD options are planned to offer 4- to 24-line equivalency.

For more information

For more information on these and future software releases now under development, contact your Nortel Networks representative today or visit the Succession pages on our Web site:

http://www.nortelnetworks.com/succession

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 STANDARD BASE FEATURES

51

Standard base features

All the software features detailed in this chapter are standard on existing DMS SuperNode applications. That is, all are available for immediate use with a PCL and do not have to be licensed separately.

Just as the DMS hardware architecture provides the flexible foundation for a range of different applications, the DMS SuperNode system also hosts a software base that supports a wide variety of service capabilities. The new features discussed in this chapter are part of the core of foundational software common across the family of DMS systems.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Standard software in PCLs 52

New standard base features 53

STANDARD BASE FEATURES NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

52

Standard software in PCLs

The following DMS system software modules comprise the standard software features for the DMS SuperNode platform in North America.

Name Code * Summary of software functionality

Features described in this chapter

Base layer BASE0001

Telecom layer TEL00001

These layers, sometimes collectively referred to as a Communications System Platform (CSP), provide the basic infrastructure for all other order codes.

BAS Generic BAS00003 Contains a long list of fundamental software modules.

Product Upgrade Manager (PUMA)

PUMA0001 Delivers the Product Upgrade Manager software that automates software loading.

SERVORD SERV0001 Streamlines operations of the Service Order (SER- VORD) utility.

XPM load (XPM0xx) Software needed for DMS Extended Peripheral Modules (XPMs).

Features described in other chapters in this document

ESMA (GR-303) Enhancement

SMA00007 Enhances the GR-303 capabilities of the Expanded Subscriber Carrier Module-100A (ESMA) peripheral. Descriptions of new features in this group appear in the Remote/switch access chapter, on pages 120 to 122.

Operator Services Basic (“always provisioned” in ‘LET’ PCLs until Rel•15)

OSB00001 (through

LET00014)

Provides the software foundation for a broad portfolio of operator services. Descriptions of new features in this group appear in the Agent Services chapter, on pages 222 to 223.

* The order codes shown in this table are for reference only. The network provider

does not need to know these codes for licensing.


53

New standard base features

The following are planned to be delivered as standard features; they do not have to be licensed separately.

DMS SUPERNODE PLATFORM STANDARD Provides the software infrastructure for all other order codes.

Flexible Restore LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

Network providers are being challenged to minimize outages. One cause of service disruption is a translations input error. Once an incorrect change has been made, service impact may result until the original translations data are restored.

This Rel•14 feature captures recent translation changes, and the time they were entered, in a readily available, read-only history table. The craftsperson can access this data through standard table control commands (such as Display or Print) as a tool to help determine the root cause of a service outage. Also, this feature enables the craftsperson to produce an editable file that can be used to quickly restore translations data.

With the Flexible Restore feature, the network provider can reduce the time required for data access, analysis, and restoration after a major outage has occurred, particularly service outages caused by inadvertent deletion of a range of tuples (digilator collapse) in core translations tables. By focusing on selected translation tables closely related to call processing, this software feature simplifies identifying the recent changes that led to a translation-related outage.

Technical reference: 59018498

Flash Denial on 911 Calls

LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

This standard feature provides an option that can restrict the flash capability of lines that have dialed 911 and are connected to Emergency Service, Operator, or ISUP Intertoll type trunks. The network provider can set this with a new tuple in table E911OFC, called Deny_Flash, to control the activation of this feature on an office-wide basis.

This software enables the network provider to prevent 911 callers from placing a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) operator on hold by activating features such as three-way calling or call waiting during a 911 call. Keeping a caller from making extraneous calls during a 911 emergency can help PSAP operators provide faster service. This feature replaces patch RIP07.



54

Call Forward Activation LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

Provisioning staff can now assign a Call Forwarding destination Directory Number to a line from the provisioning center. This capability simplifies the rerouting of calls in situations where access to the subscriber’s terminal may not be possible due to fire, storm, or other emergency.

This new efficiency can help reduce the operating costs of providing emergency call re-routing. The subscriber can cancel the Call Forwarding service when access to the telephone set becomes available again.


Automatic Line Insulation Test (ALIT) Enhancement LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

The growth in an office (such as the addition of new peripheral modules) requires coordination between different work groups to ensure that Automatic Line Insulation Test (ALIT) procedure includes the latest “last OE” [Office Equipment, such as Line Equip- ment Numbers (LENs)] in the office. With the intense pressure to provide services quickly, it can be difficult for a work group to update tables for ALIT testing. Up until now, there has not been an easy way for a network provider to know which OE/LENs were untested.

Now, this Rel•14 ALIT enhancement generates a log that informs the network provider of an existing or new OE/LEN (including HASU lines) that: !" Lacks access to test equipment (not datafilled in table MTAVERT) !" Is not scheduled for ALIT (not datafilled in table ALTSCHED)

These logs can be generated on a weekly basis (the default), or at a frequency and time-of-day specified by the craftsperson, for Line Insulation Testing (LIT) only.


HMI Enhancements for C7LKSET LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

To prevent the DMS system from becoming accidentally isolated from the signaling network, this enhancement to C7LKSET Maintenance and Administration Position (MAP) operation prevents a craftsperson from accidentally busying out the last SS7 link in service. This MAP-level human-to-machine interface (HMI) safeguard feature pertains to standard Busy command operations — a new, specific sequence of command interpreter (CI) commands are required to manually isolate the office from the SS7 network.



55

LCM Messaging Overload Management LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

Network providers have a need to measure messaging conditions to pro-actively determine if a network is susceptible to an overload condition that could affect the quality of service. Rel•14 provides an early warning functionality giving craftspeople time to groom Line Concentrating Modules (LCMs) that happen to be approaching messaging overload conditions within the host office. This standard feature involves three main capabilities: !" Generate ongoing unsolicited operational measurements (OMs) in a new MSGPSOC (P-

Side MeSsaGingOCupancy) OM Group to record trends in messaging levels. The system analyzes the message levels on each LCM and its XPM host every ten seconds and shows: #"The number of times the average percentage of messages exceeded 20%, 40%, 60%,

80%, and 95% of link capacity #"The average number of messages received per second over a 15-minute interval

!" Provide a system log indicating when an LCM link approaches a messaging exhaust condition. Once a minute the system determines if the average number of messages on individual datalinks exceeds 60% of the link capacity. If it does, the system generates an informational PM420 log. The network provider can then investigate preventive measures to proactively resolve the condition that is causing the LCM messaging overload.

!" Identify through the Command Interpreter’s Node Assessment Graph (NAG) any PM that may be experiencing an overload condition. This report, updated every hour, now includes an overload field to list PMs that appear in current PM420 logs.

Note: This feature is supported only on XPMs that have the NTSX05AA processor installed.

Technical reference: 59017962, 59017023

NTSX05AA Processor on DTC7 LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

This feature provides software support for a higher performance processor, the NTSX05AA, on Digital Trunk Controller for SS7 (DTC7) frames. Introduced in Rel•11, this processor features a fast PowerPC 603e microprocessor with 64 megabytes of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) — eight times the memory available on the earlier NTMX77 processor — and superior reliability through Error Detection and Correction (EDAC) protection.

In Rel•12, ISDN peripherals, including the Digital Trunk Controller for ISDN (DTCI) frames, required this processor. Now, in Rel•14, the capacity and performance advantages of the NTSX05AA optionally extend to DTC7 peripherals.

This new processor is planned to ship with all DTC7 extensions and initials in the Rel•15 timeframe, and is not mandatory for existing DTC7s in the field.


56

CDN Command Support for Intercept LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

With this timesaving feature, a network provider can reassign a DMS system directory number assigned to an ANCT or an OPRT intercept treatment without having to make a change to Blank Line Intercept (BLDN) first in SERVORD.

This feature helps reduce the amount of manual intervention needed to reassign lines for an Operator or a Machine type of intercept, and is especially beneficial for speeding flow-through Service Order procedures. This capability is already supported with NEW, EST, and ADD commands; Rel•15 now adds this functionality to SERVORD’s Change Directory Number (CDN) command.


DTMF Default Capability LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

To streamline the provisioning of new lines, this Rel•15 feature offers the network provider the option of making DTMF signaling the office default for new lines, as an alternative to today’s Dial Pulse default. With a new office parameter in table OFCVAR, the default signaling type for new lines (except keyset lines) can be set to either DP (Dial Pulse) or DT (Digitone). Of course, even with a default signaling type set to either DP or DT, the network provider can always reassign the signaling type for individual lines.


Datafill 110 Log

LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

The DMS system produces a DFIL110 log when a carrier specified in an E800 or Private Virtual Network database does not appear in table OCCINFO. Currently, this log identifies the carrier by the Carrier Identification Code digits provided by the database, and not by routing number as used in a LINE 138 log. Rel•15 removes the time-consuming task of manually matching DFIL110 with LINE 138 logs, by providing the routing number in the DFIL110 log inside a new Routing Number field.


FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 OPTIONAL BASE FEATURES

57

Optional base features

The base-level software features in this chapter are all planned to be optional. Although they are all delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately before they are available for use.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Nortel Networks simplifies

Peripheral Module loading 58

XA-Core: a true multiprocessor engine 59

New Local Services features 66

New Local Number Portability feature 69

New regulatory features 70

Optional OAM features 74

New optional EADAS interface features 76

New optional ISUP feature 78

OPTIONAL BASE FEATURES NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

58

Nortel Networks simplifies Peripheral Module loading

Nortel Networks Remote Peripheral Module Loading service helps network providers respond more quickly to market demands in a cost-effective manner with no sacrifice to customer service. Working with the network provider’s site technicians, our world-class professionals can remotely coordinate and conduct the loading of new software releases for the peripheral modules of a DMS system, as a preparatory step to a full switch upgrade. Our comprehensive remote network support facilities — coupled with extensive product knowledge and experience — contribute to quick, cost-effective, risk-free upgrades.

This service provides the centralized loading and patching of software loads for Series I, Series II, and Series III peripherals on most DMS systems, including:

#"DMS-100; DMS-100/200 #"DMS-250 #"DMS-250/300 #"DMS-300

#"DMS-500 #"DMS-GSP #"Meridian SL-100

This service does not include those peripherals that: !" Are controlled by platforms other than the Computing Module or XA-Core !" Require on-site or special handling

Benefits of letting Nortel Networks do the work The Remote Peripheral Module Loading service offers the network provider the freedom to concentrate on core business priorities, while delivering the highest quality of service to subscribers. Other benefits include: !" Reducing costs. This service provides a managed, cost-effective alternative to on-site

system upgrades, helping to save time and money associated with hiring and training additional technical support personnel. Our technicians have the broad knowledge base and experience required to: #"Assist in establishing a peripheral module loading schedule #"Copy peripheral module loads and patches to SLM drives/XA-Core #"Upgrade peripherals following best methods guidelines #"Patch current peripheral loads #"Obtain images of the Computing Module/XA-Core load (on request) #"Audit disk volumes and clean old loads and patches

!" Simplifying the software upgrade process. Our technicians conduct centralized upgrade-related services at a time that is convenient for the network provider.

For more information about Remote Peripheral Module Loading, and other solutions in our Global Professional Services portfolio, contact your Nortel Networks representative.


59

XA-Core: a true multiprocessor engine

Now network providers can respond more quickly than ever to market demands with minimal cost and effort. The Extended Architecture Core (XA-Core), an entirely new processing engine for the SuperNode DMS-Core, introduces a new paradigm in capacity planning and engineering by distributing call processing across multiple, independent components in a shared memory design. Network providers simply add circuit packs to expand call-processing capacity, increase memory, and enhance performance, incrementally, instead of today’s practice of assembly replacement. This simplified expandability offers significant improvements in real-time capacity, memory size, and cost of ownership.

Not only can XA-Core provide immediate capacity gains to existing offices, but this flexible Core can also serve as a key component in an office’s future transition to a Communication Server 2000 in a Succession packet telephony solution.

In a single shelf, this modular call-processing engine replaces today’s Computing Module (CM) and System Load Module (SLM) shelves in a DMS SuperNode cabinet to offer more processing power in less space.

A single shelf replaces the Computing Module and System Load Module shelves

On-demand capacity growth Exponential service demand is causing an explosion in need for switching capacity. Network providers are rapidly re-engineering networks to exploit new revenue opportunities — to help prevent losing business to new competitors and to capture market share in new market areas.

The new Core’s modularity permits true seamless growth by simply adding independently scalable circuit packs, while the system is powered up. Not only does this simplified scalability prolong the lifecycle of each circuit pack, but it also offers significant improvements in real time capacity, memory size, obsolescence protection, and cost-of-ownership benefits.


60

PE

Expand capacity by inserting circuit packs into the front and back of the XA-Core shelf

Higher capacity Now there’s immediate relief for offices experiencing real time exhaust due to local number portability, switch consolidation, large tandem growth, and new, complex services. While the DMS-100 local switching system call processing capacity gain is targeted at 2.25 times over a Series 70 EM processor, some Tandem offices have experienced a gain as high as 2.7 times. With the architectural capability to support up to 7 million Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) with ten Processing Elements, XA-Core lays the foundation for delivering high-volume, data-intensive, next-generation services with the Succession portfolio of packet telephony solutions.

XA-Core

Series 70 EM

Series 60

Series 50

Maximum

Capacity

Architectural potential for up to six times the capacity of the largest previous DMS processor


61

Enhanced reliability With its multiple-processor design, XA-Core automatically balances the call-processing load among a series of high-speed processors. A failure of one card has no impact on the processing performed by another, so the system can continue to operate in the presence of processor failures. In fact, the system can remain operational until the last processor fails. Having multiple processors operating in parallel significantly enhances fault tolerance, which can translate into lower cost of ownership and higher subscriber satisfaction. Also, the new Core’s advanced design — including leading-edge circuitry, software, firmware, and diagnostics — enhances XA-Core’s inherent fault tolerance. For example, a unique software checkpoint mechanism can “undo” erroneous transactions on the fly, to minimize transient errors and support a no-loss recovery.

Simpler operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) Since this single shelf replaces only the Computing Module, System Load Module, and a few interface circuit packs in the Message Switch, XA-Core maintains full compatibility with the DMS architecture and protects current DMS investments.

Message Switch (DMS-Bus) Message Switch (DMS-Bus)

SDM SDM

DTC DTCLGC LGC

LCM LCM

LPP LPP

ComputingModule

and SLM

XA-Core

ISM ISMSPM SPM

Enhanced Network (ENET) Enhanced Network (ENET)

Same

architecture

onlychange

Protects current DMS investments

Operations and maintenance displays and commands are similar to those used for the current DMS-Core, to reduce training requirements and changes to local practices. XA-Core can provide on-going savings in craftsperson time spent on maintenance activities. In fact, the new Core: !" Simplifies maintenance with autoprovisioning of new circuit packs !" Offers the craftsperson an expanded command structure, offered by an enhanced switch

operating system that now includes Fault-Tolerant File System (FTFS) capabilities !" Reduces the time to complete image dump backups !" Helps prevent maintenance errors with easy-to-read faceplate LEDs that meet the recently

revised Telcordia GR-2914 specification

Also, in a non-disruptive upgrade from an old to new Core, established two-party calls can stay up during a No-Restart Cutover switch-of-activity (SWACT) procedure that typically takes less than 15 seconds to complete.


62

At the core… XA-Core builds on advances in modern computing technology to provide a shared-memory, multi-processor engine with a seamless, scalable architecture. As a symmetric, tightly coupled multi-processor system, identical (but independent) processors and input/output components access a single shared redundant memory system over a high-bandwidth, low-latency, point-to-multipoint crossbar network (called the XA-Core Interconnect).

. . .

ProcessorElements

Input/OutputProcessors

. . .

. . .

Shared Memory

XA-Core Interconnect Bus

Conceptual layout of the modular XA-Core

To provide a scalable, robust, high-capacity call processing engine with simplified sparing and maintenance, the XA-Core system makes use of three kinds of provisionable circuit packs: Processor Elements for computing capacity, Shared Memory cards for a common memory system, and Input/Output Processors for mass storage and external interfaces. !" Scalable call processing real time: Processor Elements (PEs)

Delivering processing capacity in excess of any existing DMS processor option, multiple PE cards dynamically share the processing load. Even the PE provided for redundancy actively participates in the processing (instead of remaining in standby mode) to enhance reliability and help accommodate faults gracefully.

!" Scalable memory: Shared Memory (SM) cards Multiple, duplicated SM cards provide a scalable shared memory system that serves all PEs. For enhanced performance, each card supports up to 384 megabytes of synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) for both global program and data store.

!" Scalable storage and external interfaces: Input/Output Processors (IOPs) Multiple IOP cards provide mass storage media such as 8-gigabyte disk drives and digital audio tape (DAT) drives with capacity up to 4 gigabytes without compression. These flexible IOPs also support various external interfaces, including high-speed links to the Message Switch and other connections directly to the Core.


63

Processor options: 3+1 and 2+1 XA-Core Processor Elements (PEs) are configured in an “N+1” design, where N number of PEs meets engineered capacity demands, plus one PE for enhanced reliability. By Rel•15, the DMS family offers two PE options: 3+1 and 2+1, with a range of memory options available. Nortel Networks works closely with the network provider to determine if XA-Core is appropriate for an office, when, and at which PE and memory configurations.

Note: XA-Core’s initial 1+1 uni-core version is now superseded by the 3+1 and 2+1 multi-core options.

Upgrades to existing systems Nortel Networks has taken extraordinary steps to ensure that an upgrade to an existing platform minimally impacts the ongoing operation of the system — complete with a safe abort and recovery procedure.

There are two major options to upgrading an existing platform to XA-Core, depending on current site configurations. The standard upgrade, which places the XA-Core in a new extension cabinet, is the least complex and least disruptive process. However, the new

Message Switch 0

Message Switch 1

Filler Shelf

High-Capacity Cooling Unit

XA-Core

Location of XA-Core in DMS SuperNode cabinet When the new Core replaces

the CM and SLM shelves

cabinet increases the office footprint — which is not always possible or desirable. For sites where space is unavailable, the shelf replacement upgrade enables the existing Computing Module and System Load Module (CM/SLM) shelves to be removed and replaced by the XA-Core with no permanent increase in floor space. This method uses a temporary, portable XA-Core that continues service while the CM/SLM is swapped out with the new Core.

To minimize risk, PCL levels must stay the same in the transition from a Series 60 or Series 70 EM to the XA-Core (a PCL upgrade cannot be made at the same time as the hardware upgrade). For example, to upgrade to LET00014 XA-Core, the DMS system must be on LET00014 with a Series 60 or Series 70 EM processor. Once the XA-Core is installed and operational, upgrades can then be made to the PCL level (using the previous example, the LET00014 XA-Core can then upgrade to LET00015 or LET00017).

Sites that exceed 200,000 billing records/hour and 90% CPUTIL on a Series 70 EM should move billing to the SuperNode Billing Application (SBA) on the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) prior to XA-Core deployment. Baseline hardware for the SDM’s DS-512 interface to the Message Switch must be at NTRX50GX.


64

XA-Core software

XA-CORE 3 + 1 NXAC0300 Supports a scalable, multiple-processor core on DMS SuperNode systems. This version offers a configuration of three primary processors plus one processor for reliability.

XA-Core 3 + 1 LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This order code provides software support for the XA-Core’s initial multiprocessor option. “3+1” refers to three primary PEs plus one PE for enhanced reliability.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This true multiprocessor XA-Core configuration helps reduce the time-to-market of new complex services, expands service penetration, supports larger line and trunk concentrations, and enhances performance and reliability — with over 2.25 times the real time capacity of the Series 70 EM processor option.

Note: With Rel•14, 768 and 960 megabyte options are available. Memory options expand to include 1152 megabytes with Rel•15 and 1728 megabytes with Rel•17.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: To upgrade an existing office, the DMS system must be running either a Series 60 or Series 70 EM Computing Module and have the Enhanced Network (ENET) switch fabric. The following need to be installed in the Message Switch: #" Port card: NT9X17AD #" OC-3 Paddleboard: NT9X63AB #" Processor Board: NT9X13DG

Also, a C42 cabinet housing an XA-Core shelf must have a High-Capacity Cooling Unit (NTLX10AA) installed to meet the cabinet’s increased thermal requirements.

Both order codes NXAC0300 and NXAC0200 (see next order code) offer a simple upgrade path for any DMS SuperNode system that has XA-Core’s initial 1+1 uni- core version installed. The required hardware to support the upgrade are: #" Processor Element (PE): NTLX02CA #" Input/Output Processor (IOP): NTLX03AB, NTLX03BB #" OC-3 Packlet (in an IOP): NTLX05AB #" Message Switch OC-3 Paddleboard: NT9X63AB

An associated SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) providing billing for the XA-Core must have the DS-512 interface to the Message Switch at vintage NTRX50GX.

Offices with Rel•12 upgrade with NT9X63AA installed and replace with NT9X63AB after the ONP.


65

XA-Core 3+1 Support for 1152 Meg Memory LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

In Rel•14, the 3+1 version of the XA-Core was limited to 768 or 960 megabyte memory options. Rel•15 adds support for a higher 1152-megabyte memory option.

XA-Core 3+1 Additional Memory Support LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

Rel•17 adds support for 1344, 1536, and (on the DMS-100 system:) 1728-megabyte memory options for the 3+1 version.

XA-CORE 2 + 1 NXAC0200 Supports a scalable, multiple-processor core on DMS SuperNode systems. This version offers a configuration of two primary processors plus one processor for reliability.

XA-Core 2+1 LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES NXAC0200 provides software support for a multiprocessor configuration of “2+1” — two primary PEs and one PE for enhanced redundancy.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS For sites that do not require processing power of the 3 + 1 configuration, this new 2 + 1 option cost-effectively supplies real time and call processing expansions for a wide variety of mid-sized DMS offices — offering over 1.4 times the real time capacity of the Series 70 EM. As a protection of XA-Core component investments, to expand at a later date to the higher 3 + 1 configuration involves only the addition of a PE and software order code NXAC0300.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES Hardware: same as those listed for NXAC0300 (see previous)

XA-Core 2+1 Additional Memory Support LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

In Rel•15, the 2+1 version of the XA-Core was limited to 768 or 1152-megabyte memory options. Rel•17 adds support for 960, 1344, 1536, and (on the DMS-100 system:) 1728-megabyte memory options. This expanded support aligns the 2+1 version with the same options available with the 3+1 XA-Core by Rel•17. For clarification, the following shows the memory options available, at the earliest supported release level, for 2+1 and 3+1 options.

PE type 768 Meg 960 Meg 1152 Meg 1344 Meg 1536 Meg 1728 Meg DMS-100 only

2 + 1 Rel•15 Rel•17 Rel•15 Rel•17 Rel•17 Rel•17

3 + 1 Rel•14 Rel•14 Rel•15 Rel•17 Rel•17 Rel•17

Nortel Networks will help determine the optimum memory size for an office. For more information, please contact your Nortel Networks representative.


66

New Local Services features

These optional features address the special needs of switch owners in the competitive local environment, with features that simplify local office routing and simplify methods to identify, screen, provision, and bill competitive providers.

ENHANCED LOCAL TRANSLATIONS LOC00025 Provides simplified translations for blocking, screening, routing, rate area schemes, and implementation of NPA splits and overlays.

Enhanced Table Compression Tool LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This command interpreter (CI) LINEATTR Compression Tool streamlines the content of the LINEATTR translation table by eliminating redundant data.

In Rel•12, order code LOC00025 introduced the mandatory Service Order (SERVORD) parameters option. With this option turned on, the schema of table LINEATTR changes so that the LTG, DFLTXLP, and DFLTRA fields are no longer needed, but are not removed. The new Rel•14 compression tool provides an automated way to eliminate these tuples that are no longer required. This tool also updates any other tables that reference these removable tuples.

Built-in safeguards protect data when the switch is shared between a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) and one or more Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs). No company-specific data can be changed, unless requested by the data owner (as determined by the loginID).


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The LINEATTR Compression Tool can reduce up to 70% the number of tuples in table LINEATTR. This enhancement provides a labor-saving method of removing the data and helps ensure that remaining table references are accurate.

UOP ENHANCEMENTS LOC00257 Expands uniform outpulsing capabilities introduced with order code LOC00005.

UOP Enhancements LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

UOP (Uniform Outpulsing), introduced with Rel•9, outpulses digits in a uniform fashion with digit manipulation options. UOP enables the network provider to set up uniform outpulsing for Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls to Automatic Intercept System (AIS) and Private Branch Exchange (PBX) destinations.


67

UOP was developed with certain restrictions and limitations. Now, order code LOC00257 expands UOP in the following ways. !" The V (variable) selector with the L (line) route selector is now a supported route with

UOP from standard pretranslations. !" The L selector is now a supported route with UOP from standard pretranslations. !" Optionally, ten digits can be made available to manipulate and outpulse to an AIS or PBX

destination, regardless of how many digits were dialed in an extension call.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By enabling UOP from standard pretranslations and supporting routing with treatment or non-treatment extension-dialed calls, LOC00257 incrementally expands the capabilities of uniform outpulsing.

To minimize impacts on local practices, all table DIGMAN selectors currently used with UOP are still supported and the trunk types currently supported with UOP are the same with this new functionality.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: LOC00005 Dialing Plan Translation Enhancements

RELEASE LINK TRUNKING FOR EQUAL ACCESS END OFFICE EQA00031

Completes directory assistance calls over originating office trunks instead of tying up resources at a TOPS office.

Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

With EQA00031, a Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) office can use Release Link Trunking (RLT) to relinquish the control of a call to an originating Equal Access End Office (EAEO) for call completion.

When a subscriber selects to have a TOPS office complete a directory assistance call, the TOPS office sends to the originating EAEO office an RLT request. This new option, RLT, is implemented as a per-trunk option in table TRKOPTS, and is operable only over directly connected ISUP IT trunks. If RLT is received on a trunk with RLT provisioned, then: !" The connection to the TOPS office is dissolved !" The number in the Generic Activation Parameter (GAP) is converted to a dialable format !" The EAEO uses the derived number to translate, route, and bill the call as if the subscriber

had manually dialed the number


68

If an RLT request is received on a trunk without RLT provisioned, the call routes to treatment and the system generates a DFIL324 log.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With order code EQA00031, TOPS offices can conserve trunking resources since the EAEO’s trunks, instead of the TOPS office’s trunks, are occupied with call completion attempts. Both local and toll calls are supported, with Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) records generated at the EAEO, based on the type of call.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: EQA00001 Equal Access for Local Office

Hardware: This functionality uses only ISUP IT trunks that connect an EAEO directly to the TOPS office. RLT is not supported through an Access Tandem or through another EAEO to the TOPS office.

FNPA DATA CALL ROUTING LOC00258

Simplifies the switch translation datafill needed to add bearer capability routing for an FNPA translation.

FNPA Data Call Routing LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional software simplifies the switch translation datafill to provide bearer capability routing for a Foreign Numbering Plan Area (FNPA) translation by adding route map functionality to table FNPACONT.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

A new subtable in FNPACONT, called RTEMAP, provides bearer capability routing for a FNPA translation. With this efficiency, the network provider does not have to re-direct the translation to table OFRTMAP, as is needed today to provision this functionality. The new subtable simplifies the provisioning of the switch translation datafill to help enhance craftsperson productivity and reduce the probability of provisioning errors.

To further reduce datafill tasks, the existing capability to perform bearer capability routing for an FNPA translation by using table OFRTMAP remains unchanged and continues to be supported with LOC00258 active.


69

New Local Number Portability feature

The following feature helps simplify the management of complex numbering plans in the competitive local environment fueled by regulatory, competitive, and industry-wide number exhaust developments.

SSP ROUTE DETECTION FOCUSED ON OVERLOAD DETECTION LNP00202 Routes LNP calls with ten-digit ACG control to datafilled treatment on Fault Overload Detection.

SSP Route Detection Focused on Overload Detection LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

ACG (Automatic Code Gapping) enables an Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) Service Switching Point (SSP) to control queries to the Service Control Point (SCP) database and to protect the SCP from overload conditions. When order code LNP00200 is active, a Local Number Portability (LNP) call encountering an active 10-digit ACG currently routes to the AIN final treatment.

Order code LNP00202 enables the network provider to pre-select a treatment from a list of extended treatments. Ten-digit, ACG-blocked LNP calls then route to this specific treatment only.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this provisioning simplification, the network provider can quickly specify how the system handles LNP calls during overload conditions. When an LNP call encounters 10-digit ACG control, the DMS system sends the call to the treatment the network provider datafilled in table LNPOPTS.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: LNP00200 Local Number Portability GR-2936


70

New regulatory features

Network Broadcast Delivery The United States Congress passed in 1994 the Communication Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA) act to assist law enforcement agencies in the interception of digital and other communications. The CALEA law, U.S. standards bodies, and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rulings have defined the functional requirements for telecommunications service providers to assist law enforcement agencies in conducting lawfully authorized electronic surveillance. To meet the provisions of CALEA, this DMS service began in Rel•10 the rollout of features to lawfully access and deliver call content and call-identifying information of DMS switch-based subjects to legal authorities.

U.S. NETWORK BROADCAST DELIVERY NBD00003 Enables carriers to meet the provisions of the Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA).

Punch List Capabilities LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

In Rel•14 order code NBD00003 provides Packet Data requirements and Punch List items as identified in the FCC ruling 99-230, adopted August 26, 1999: !" The Packet Data requirements necessitated the support of interception and delivery of

ISDN BRI B-channel and D-channel packet data to an authorized law enforcement agency over an ISDN BRI line or X.75 trunk

!" The Punch List items include: #"Content of subject-initiated conference calls #" Subject-initiated dialing and signaling information #" In-band and out-of-band signaling #"Dialed digit extraction

Technical reference: 59018022, 59018034, 59018041, 59018048, 59018013, 59018020

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

NBD00003 continues to expand so the network provider can meet regulatory requirements as they become defined. The euphemistic “Punch List” is the latest suite of requirements from the FCC, in consultation with the FBI and other government agencies, designed to enhance lawfully authorized electronic surveillance to more effectively thwart illegal activities.

Two other Punch List capabilities not listed above (Party Hold/Join/Drop on Conference Calls and Timing of Information) have been generally available since Rel•12.


71

Agency Separator LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the service provider to separate surveillance data on a given switch on a per-law enforcement agency basis. United States Network Broadcast Delivery (USNBD) users are assigned to specific agencies and can only view/edit surveillance data pertaining to their assigned agency.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Previous to this feature, the data related to monitoring any subject and the data related to call content and call data resources for all surveillance on the switch were accessible to any agency user. With the introduction of this feature, service providers can limit specific USNBD users to only have access to a certain agency’s interception data. Only an authorized ADMIN user has the privilege to view or modify data pertaining to any agency or collect data about all surveillance on the switch.

If there is a requirement for just one agency on the switch, or if separation is not required in a particular market, this feature can be disabled on a per-switch basis.

ISUP Call Control Channels LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enhances NBD00003’s monitoring capabilities by introducing switched call content channels (CCCs) to an agency’s recording devices. A switched CCC sets up a connection to a remote recording device (for delivery of call content) on a per-monitored call basis.

This software uses the Agency Separator feature (see previous) to associate each link with a specific agency.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature uses remote switched links in place of the current dedicated links, with no modification to the current operation of the X.25 data links. With today’s dedicated links, a line or trunk CCC is constantly connected to a law enforcement agency’s recording device with a constant H4L3 tone (C-tone) until the subject goes off hook. The removal of the tone triggers the agency’s recording devices. Now, with switched links, there’s no more need to have a constant connection to an agency to deliver call content information. As soon as the subject becomes active on a call, the system establishes a connection to the law enforcement agency and recording starts immediately.


72

This efficiency can provide significant savings to law enforcement agencies, allowing them to centralize at a single site the recording functions for numerous surveillances, regardless of subject locations.

As before, NBD00003 protects the general public’s privacy by switching speech information and generating X.25 messages only on particular subjects as duly authorized by legal authorities.

Government Emergency Telecommunications Service With Government Emergency Telecommunications Service (GETS) in United States networks, authorized users (at the federal, state, and local level) receive enhanced routing and priority treatment through the public switched telephone network during periods requiring national security and emergency preparedness (NS/EP) response. This service enables switching offices to recognize a GETS call, give it priority treatment, mark it as High Probability of Completion (HPC), and interwork with other carrier networks to pass the HPC status of the call for subsequent priority treatment.

GOVERNMENT EMERGENCY TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE (GETS) GETS0001 Enables local exchange carriers to be a part of the U.S. government’s effort to enhance communications service during emergency situations.

HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

One of the existing network capabilities in the High Probability of Completion (HPC) feature is HPC Trunk Queuing (HPC TQ). This capability, provisionable on a per-trunk group basis, queues an HPC call against a busy public trunk group in a route list until either: !" A member of that trunk group becomes idle. Once a trunk is available, the system

processes a queued HPC call before any other call. !" A specified maximum queuing time elapses. If this timer elapses, the queued HPC call

advances to the next treatment.

The new HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing feature expands the HPC TQ feature by enabling this capability to be provisioned on an office-wide basis, rather than on a more time-consuming per trunk-group basis.

The parameters that can be set using Office-Wide Call Queuing include: !" Maximum time an HPC call will wait for an idle trunk before next treatment. !" Maximum number of HPC calls that can simultaneously queue on a supported public

trunk group queue. !" The announcement or tone, if available, to be played to an HPC call in a trunk group

queue.


73

If needed, any public trunk group can be datafilled in table TRKOPTS to be excluded from Office-Wide Call Queuing.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By significantly simplifying HPC Trunk Queuing provisioning tasks, this feature helps reduce operating costs by cutting the time and effort to provide trunking for High Probability of Completion calls.

To minimize impact on local practices, this feature follows the same limits (such as max calls queued per office and trunk queue size) as HPC TQ, and is available for any public trunk used by HPC TQ (specifically, IT, T2, TO, ATC, and CELL).


74

Optional OAM features

With the Service Order (SERVORD) utility, craftspersons have a streamlined method to complete service activation tasks. This interface helps reduce the time to respond to subscriber requests and changes. With the Translations Verification (TRAVER) utility, craftspersons have a streamlined method to verify routing and screening datafill.

REDUNDANT FEATURE SERV0003

Saves time and operating costs by reducing manual intervention in flowthrough operations between the DMS switch and provisioning systems.

Redundant Feature Enhancements LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

These enhancements continue the rollout of features begun in Rel•9 and continued in Rel•11 that enable the Service Order (SERVORD) utility to accept certain add and delete functions formerly rejected during the flowthrough process.

Without SERV0003, a service order is rejected when an attempt is made to:

!" Add a line option that is already assigned on a line.

!" Delete a line option that is not presently assigned to the line.

With SERV0003, in both cases, SERVORD permits the flowthrough process to continue and simply indicates whether the command sequence was successful or not.

New Rel•14 enhancements to order code SERV0003:

!" Extend Redundant Feature support to an additional set of features for Call Forwarding. The supported Call Forwarding features are: CFB, CFBL, CFD, CFDA, CFDVT, CFE, CFF, CFGD, CFGDA, CFI, CFIND, CFK, CFMDN, CFO, CFRA, CFS, CFTANN, CFTB, CFTD, CFTOD, CFU, CFW, CFWN, CFX, CFXDNCT, CFXVAL, CUSD, SCF, IECFB, IECFD, CBU, CDU, CBI, CBE, CDI, and CDE.

!" Add Redundant Feature support to the CHF (Change Feature) command in SERVORD. The CHF command supports the above Call Forwarding features as well as these features previously supported only for ADO and DEO commands: ACB, AIOD, AR, CDT, CNDB, CTD, COT, DSCWID, FCTDNTRA, FRO, FRS, LPIC, PIC, INTPIC, SC1, SC2, SC3, CCW, CWT, DENYU3WC, 3WC, XFER, MWT, SCRJ, DRCW, ACRJ, DGT, CND, CNAMD, LVM, ADSI, DCF, CUSD, DISCTO, FGA, GLTC, LCDR, PPL, PRK, VMEADENY, and WUCR.



75

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

These Rel•14 software enhancements to SERV0003 significantly expand the list of features (“line options”) that no longer produce two major causes of SERVORD rejects at the network provider’s provisioning system. The costly, time-consuming provisioning rework formerly needed to respond to “Already exist, inconsistent data” and “(name of feature) is not an existing option” responses is eliminated.

The network provider can also enhance ongoing operating cost savings with Redundant Feature capabilities added to the CHF command. This efficiency can eliminate rejects formerly encountered when the craftsperson tried to change a feature that was not previously assigned to a line.

GENERIC OAM BAS00004 Offers time-saving operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) features to simplify maintenance procedures and help increase new service velocity.

TRAVER Billing Enhancement LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement to the existing TRAVER troubleshooting tool adds the tables associated with Multiunit Measured Rate (MUMR) billing to the output. Tables MUMRTAB and MRSANAME are now shown, along with other translations tables accessed by a call. This efficiency makes it possible for network providers to set up Local Measured Rate tariffs with the MUMR feature.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to BAS00004 helps speed the deployment of Local Measured Rate service by conveniently confirming datafill for local measured rate translations. This feature also helps speed the troubleshooting of MUMR billing problems by verifying billing translations without having to make test calls.


76

New optional EADAS interface features

This software stream enables the DMS system to support Engineering and Administrative Data Acquisition System (EADAS) interfaces. This multivendor interworking helps maximize the efficiency of available network resources to enhance call completion ratios.

EADAS MAINTENANCE BUSY USAGE OAM00010

Delivers Trunk Group Maintenance Busy Usage Measurements in the 5-minute Network Manager polling.

EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides Maintenance Busy Usage measurements of Trunks Groups identified to the Network Traffic Management Operations System during the five-minute polling for Network Management data.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this feature, a network provider can better assess why trunks are overflowing or why blockage has occurred by identifying trunk outages due to maintenance activity. Improved root-cause data can help enable the Network Traffic Management Operations System to provide automated congestion relief to the network.


MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OAM00004 EADAS Data Collection and Hardware Inventory Interface Plus either: OAM00005 Network Management Interface OAM00006 NetMinder Interface

NEW NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROLS OAM00012

Offer new controls to handle calls efficiently during high traffic periods.

Bearer-Independent Cancel To LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This congestion control diverts a percentage of the traffic destined for a specific destination point code (terminating end office). With this feature, the network provider can specify: !" The percentage of traffic to divert !" Whether the control applies to Hard to Reach (HTR) traffic or all traffic


77

The next feature, Bearer Independent Code Specific Reroute, can be used to specify where this diverted traffic should route.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This control, used during high-traffic periods, helps protect a terminating edge switch and the signaling network from overload conditions. It enables the network provider to specify separate traffic thresholds for Easy To Reach (ETR) and Hard To Reach (HTR) traffic (such as numbers associated with popular radio station contests).

The NetMinder interface has also been updated to handle this new control.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OAM00005 EADAS Network Management Interface

Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This control enables the network provider to specify an alternate route for traffic intended to route to a terminating end office. This code-specific reroute uses a particular NPA-NXX to assign a secondary office. This feature is an additional option under the Flexible Reroute Control.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This code-specific reroute function enables the network provider to better control traffic flow during high traffic levels. This feature can also be used to temporarily bypass mis- provisioned data in an originating office and permit Initial Address Message Plus (IAM+) messages for a particular code to be sent to a valid end office. This feature supports the 4-digit Carrier Identification Code (CIC) plus 15 digits.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OAM00005 EADAS Network Management Interface


78

New optional ISUP feature

ISDN User Part (ISUP) SS7 trunking capabilities help increase the efficiency of interoffice trunking facilities and the opportunities for revenue by supporting network-wide services. With SS7 ISUP trunk signaling, premium services, such as Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) and a wealth of customized AIN-based services, can be easily and efficiently extended across the network. ISUP improves call setup times for inter-office calls, including 800 services, E911, Operator Services, and Private Virtual Network calls.

FLEXIBLE ISUP CAUSEMAP ISP70008

Enables the local service provider to customize the DMS Cause to Treatment Map.

Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

When an SS7 ISUP Release (REL) or SS7 ISUP Address Complete (ACM) message delivers a cause value indicator, the DMS system accesses the Cause to Treatment Map (CAUSEMAP) table to determine what treatment to apply to the call. Currently, this hard-coded internal table is not visible to or customizable by the service provider.

ISP70008 converts CAUSEMAP to an external table that may be viewed and altered by the DMS system network provider, using standard table editor commands.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

A customizable ISUP CAUSEMAP enables service providers greater flexibility in configuring their networks to meet the challenges of managing both inter-network and intra-network traffic in today’s competitive environment.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ISP70001 Base ISUP

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 LINE ACCESS SOLUTIONS

79

Line access solutions

This chapter discusses key direct line-access solutions for DMS systems. Also in this document, see the Remote/switch access chapter, starting on page 115, for information about new DMS Switch Remote and GR-303 features.

Universal Edge 9000 The future-ready Universal Edge 9000 is an integrated multiservice access platform that delivers a full array of services, including high-speed Internet access, video conferencing, virtual private networking, and transparent LAN services. Able to address multiple applications, the Universal Edge 9000 can be deployed as a line peripheral in a DMS central office or as an outside plant enclosure, as a full-sized digital loop carrier (DLC) that can feed any GR-303 compliant switching system, as a smaller GR-303 DLC for remote sites requiring fewer lines, or as a packet-ready media gateway in a Succession packet telephony network.

The Universal Edge 9000 is ideal for supporting emerging revenue-generating data services — such as Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) offerings — in addition to traditional POTS services. In place of multiple single-port line cards, the platform features Multicircuit Line Cards that offer the ease of plug-and-play provisioning and provide a flexible, scalable voice and data access solution across a network.

ISDN BRI Nortel Networks ISDN BRI offering is an integral part of our broad portfolio of access technologies. Even as new access solutions (such as cable modems and xDSL) enter the market, BRI continues as a strong choice, offering substantial growth potential and many revenue-generating opportunities for carriers. ISDN BRI empowers a whole new set of applications — such as telecommuting, Internet access, access to on-line services, small office/home office (SOHO), video conferencing, LAN-to-LAN connectivity, teleradiology, remote health care, point of sale, teleteaching, remote broadcasting and sound transfer, interactive publishing, and more.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Universal Edge 9000: Integrated Access 80

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 91

LINE ACCESS SOLUTIONS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

80

Universal Edge 9000: Integrated Access

Nortel Networks offers a variety of Multicircuit Line Cards to accommodate a wide variety of subscriber loop services, from POTS to emerging data access technologies — including ADSL and G.Lite applications. To ease deployment of data services to the consumer market, its service portfolio includes ADSL Multicircuit Line Cards that deliver voice service and multi-megabit data access with operational simplicity.

The Universal Edge 9000 supports a range of network interfaces so service providers can make full use of existing transport architectures: !" Voice traffic in conventional networks travels over standard TDM interfaces, and, in a

Succession packet telephony environment, the Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway uses advanced ATM capabilities to merge voice and data into a single stream.

!" Data traffic routes over an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) interface into the service provider’s data network for delivery to wide area networks (WANs), Internet service providers (ISPs), and campus or corporate LANs.

The Universal Edge 9000 can be cabinet-installed or rack-mounted with a customized mix of Multicircuit Line Cards

The platform’s modular architecture helps make the transition easier from an existing Universal Edge 9000 in a conventional network to a Succession packet telephony solution. With minor hardware modifications and new software, a Universal Edge 9000 DLC, Universal Edge 9000 Remote, or Universal Edge 9000 DMS can be converted to our packet-ready Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway.


81

Universal Edge 9000 applications This adaptable solution can be configured: !" As a voice and data peripheral off a DMS host or Remote Switching Center-S (RSC-S):

Universal Edge 9000 DMS The Universal Edge 9000 DMS is the designated line peripheral for integrated voice plus DSL services. It can also be deployed as a high-density POTS/RES vehicle supporting up to 2048 lines per frame — nearly double the capacity of the Line Concentrating Module (LCM) in a slightly smaller footprint. Front-access cabling and future engineering modifications permitting back-to-back placement of frames enable the service provider to gain maximum advantage from the platform’s high-density properties.

!" As a GR-303 broadband Digital Loop Carrier: Universal Edge 9000 DLC For network providers with existing AccessNodes (Access Bandwidth Manager and Copper Distribution Shelves), the addition of Universal Edge 9000 shelves can greatly increase POTS capacity and enable delivery of new, revenue-generating DSL services. With support for a full suite of narrowband as well as a range of DSL services, the Universal Edge 9000 can be deployed with an Access Bandwidth Manager (ABM) to provide a flexible, high-density solution for new DLC implementations. (The High-density POTS-24 Multicircuit Line Card is the delivery vehicle for high-density POTS services on the Universal Edge 9000 DLC.)

!" As a low line size GR-303 DLC: Universal Edge 9000 Remote The compact Universal Edge 9000 Remote supports the same features and services as the full-sized DLC, but on a scale suitable for installations ranging from 96 to 200 lines. It’s easy to add shelves to meet increased demand, and shelves at widely scattered sites can be linked to a single access mediation vehicle, called the Host Digital Terminal (HDT).

Four key Universal Edge 9000 applications: DLC, DMS, Remote, and Media Gateway


82

!" As a packet-ready Succession line gateway: Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway Deployed on the edge of a converged network, the Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway serves as the interface between subscriber lines and the Succession ATM fabric. Switched lines over ATM (SLoA) and private lines over ATM (PLoA) capabilities provide a clear migration path from the TDM to the Succession packet environment and offer the advantages of scalable capacity and the geographic flexibility offered by a distributed architecture. The Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateway also supports conventional TDM narrowband services and DSL data services.

Universal Edge 9000 DMS: A diverse service portfolio

Various Multicircuit Line Cards, developed specifically for the Universal Edge 9000, expand the cost-efficiency and versatility of this platform. Each shelf has 16 slots for these service cards. To simplify ordering and accelerate service delivery, the Multicircuit Line Cards on the Universal Edge 9000 DMS platform are provisioned in quarter-shelf units, with each unit containing four Multicircuit Line Cards. The following are descriptions of the Multicircuit Line Cards currently planned for the Universal Edge 9000 DMS. !" High-density POTS-32 Multicircuit Line Card supports up to 32 POTS/RES lines, aligning

it with standard DMS line group configurations. A frame fully loaded with these cards can accommodate up to 2048 POTS/RES lines. That is nearly double the capacity of a 1280-line Line Concentrating Module (LCM) frame — in a slightly smaller footprint.

!" Service Adaptive ADSL plus Voice (4+4). This four-port Multicircuit Line Card supports two industry-standard DSL service types: full-rate ADSL (up to 8 Mbps downstream/1 Mbps upstream) and G.Lite (1.5 Mbps/512 kbps) — plus analog voice services.

!" SmartDSL plus Voice (10 +10). This is the ideal service for the growing number of users seeking an economical DSL solution with the bandwidth required for streaming video and downloading audio clips and other large data files. Featuring faster asymmetric rates than standard G.Lite (3.5 Mbps/768 kbps versus 1.5 Mbps/512 kbps), SmartDSL can meet the demands of these and other high-capacity applications. The 10 service ports on the integrated SmartDSL Multicircuit Line Card, which delivers analog voice as well as data services, enable service providers to reap the economies of high-density deployment. SmartDSL also offers some of the advantages afforded by G.Lite, such as reduced power consumption. The SmartDSL card is compatible with popular G.DMT-compliant customer devices, such as those equipped with Alcatel or ADI chipsets.

!" Service-Adaptive ADSL plus Voice (8+8). This second-generation eight-port Service-Adaptive ADSL Multicircuit Line Card provides the same capabilities as the earlier four-port version with twice the density. A Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf fully provisioned with these cards can deliver broadband data integrated with voice services for up to 128 lines.


83

Simplified service management The DMS Maintenance and Administration Position (MAP), a service management tool known for its simplicity and solid performance, is the primary OAM interface for administering voice services on the Universal Edge 9000 DMS. Administering DSL data services requires a new management platform, the Universal Edge 9000 Element Management System (uEMS). A flow-through provisioning feature enables craftspersons to use the Service Order (SERVORD) utility to enter DSL subscriber provisioning data (see page 86 for more information about this flow-through provisioning feature, planned for Rel•17).

Service providers can choose from two commercially available servers for the uEMS: a Hewlett-Packard OpenView or a Sun Solaris platform. A powerful system based on the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), the uEMS features a graphics-based interface that speeds monitoring and troubleshooting. Among the centralized functions handled by the uEMS are: !" Provisioning of the broadband data services for Universal Edge 9000 DMS platforms hosted

by multiple nodes !" Activation and management of data services !" Distribution and loading of broadband data software

A fully configured uEMS currently supports up to 150 shelves (a planned capacity expansion is expected to increase this number to 300 shelves) at geographically dispersed locations. Other advantages include support for popular management information bases (MIBs) and time- and work-saving features, such as extensive color coding, event handling capabilities, and integrated graphing software. The system also supports a Common Object Request Broker (CORBA) interface, allowing the uEMS to be integrated into a network-wide management overlay, such as Preside management solutions from Nortel Networks or an integrated management system from another vendor, such as Telcordia’s Network Configuration Manager (NCON) system.

Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL: Using LCMs to deliver DSL services Another economical option for the delivery of DSL services is the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL, a multiservice access vehicle that can be deployed in existing DMS Line Concen- trating Modules (LCMs). This compact version of the Universal Edge IMAS platform fits in the space occupied by a single LCM line drawer to support 40 lines of full-rate ADSL or G.Lite service, popular with consumers. Its support of up to 64 lines of symmetric DSL (SDSL) enables the delivery of voice over DSL (VoDSL) — a low-cost solution for expanding the number of voice circuits available to prime business customers. For maximum deployment flexibility, the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL is also available in: !" A standard rack-mount configuration for central office deployment. !" A wall-mounted option, ideal for installation in multiple dwelling units (MDUs) and multiple

tenant units (MTUs). For more information about the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL, see pages 117-119 in the Remote/switch access chapter.


84

New switch-based Universal Edge capabilities The following features are all planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they are licensed individually.

UNIVERSAL EDGE 9000 DMS PLATFORM UEDG0001 Supports new switch peripherals that deliver traditional narrowband POTS, plus new revenue-generating broadband service capabilities, from a single platform.

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This software enables the delivery of the full spectrum of Nortel Networks POTS/RES features on all current and future Universal Edge 9000 DMS Multicircuit Line Cards that support analog voice services. The first of these cards to roll out is the High-Density POTS Multicircuit Line Card, which becomes generally available with software release Rel•14. Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards, which deliver DSL data access as well as analog voice services, will be introduced with subsequent software releases.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" High service density with footprint efficiency. Not only does the Universal Edge 9000 DMS have a smaller footprint than the LCM frame, its maximum service density is also substantially greater than the LCM. Each Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf provisioned with High-density POTS-32 Multicircuit Line Cards can handle up to 512 lines — for a total deployment of 2048 lines per frame (in contrast to 1280 lines with an LCM frame).

!" Alignment with DMS configurations. Each High-density POTS card is equipped with 32 ports, aligning the card with standard DMS line signaling groups.

!" Easy transition to packetized Succession environment. In addition to superior POTS density and service versatility, this platform also offers protection against stranded investment. An existing platform can be transitioned to a Succession media gateway in a converged data and voice network with new software and minor hardware modifications.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: A bundled software bridge, PLU00001, is needed in Rel•14 for the DMS CM or XA-Core to support Universal Edge 9000 DMS voice and OAM functions

Hardware: Nortel Networks offers Multicircuit Line Cards for the Universal Edge 9000 DMS in half-shelf packages. Packages containing the POTS-32 card include: #"POTS-32 Half Shelf (NTNB49DA) with eight High-density POTS cards #" POTS-32 and LC Filler Half Shelf (NTNB49KA) with four High-density

POTS cards and four filler cards

Full provisioning of a Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf with High-density POTS cards requires two NTNB49DA packages


85

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement enables the full spectrum of POTS/RES narrowband services to be provisioned on integrated voice and DSL data Multicircuit Line Cards. The first of these cards, the 4+4 (four-port) Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite plus Voice Multicircuit Line Card, is available with Rel•15 PCLs.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The advent of integrated voice and data Multicircuit Line Cards turns the Universal Edge 9000 DMS into a true multiservice platform. Now, cards supporting various service combinations can be deployed on the same shelf. In areas with emerging demand for DSL services, a shelf can be split-provisioned with High-density POTS-32 cards and integrated voice and DSL data cards. This deployment flexibility enables service plans to be optimized for revenue production and cost containment — and enables the service provider to be able to respond swiftly to fluctuations in demand.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: • Four-port Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite plus Voice Multicircuit Line Cards • DS-3 ATM Network Interface Cards

Firmware Download for TDM Controller Card LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature greatly simplifies the reconfiguration of the TDM controller cards on the Univer- sal Edge 9000 DMS (each shelf has two cards). Instead of requiring physical modifications, the network provider can complete this task through Computing Module downloads of new configuration data, delivered on tape by Nortel Networks.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Firmware Download feature substitutes a single-step reprogramming procedure in place of the manual steps of physically pulling the TDM controller cards and replacing them with cards bearing the new configuration data. This enhancement: !" Reduces costs. The expense of making physical changes to the TDM cards is eliminated,

with far less time required for craftspersons to complete the reprogramming tasks. !" Promotes service continuity. A simple download procedure minimizes the possibility of

service disruptions. !" Increases flexibility. Firmware-based reconfiguration allows the service profiles on a

Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf to be easily adjusted to meet fluctuations in demand. !" Accelerates repairs. Firmware Download cuts the time required to put a replacement

spare into service after the removal of a defective card.


86

Flow-through Provisioning LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

As with other services provided through DMS Computing Module/XA-Core software, craftspersons can use Service Order (SERVORD) to enter provisioning data for voice services delivered by the Universal Edge 9000 DMS. These entries are reflected immediately in the switch’s service profiles.

With Rel•17, SERVORD can also be used for flow-through provisioning of DSL data services — even though these services are not directly supported by Computing Module or XA-Core software. After the craftsperson enters DSL provisioning data, it is transferred to the Universal Edge 9000 Element Management System (uEMS) — the administration platform for DSL services (see pages 88 through 90 for more information about the uEMS). As with SERVORD provisioning of voice services, new DSL provisioning entries are reflected immediately in the DSL service profiles.

In addition to the provisioning of a service type, such as ADSL or G.Lite, SERVORD can also be used to throttle individual subscribers’ data rates, allowing bandwidth-based pricing structures to be created.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Accelerated service delivery. Flow-through provisioning streamlines service turn-up, enabling rapid processing of orders for high-margin voice and DSL data packages. The ability to respond to these orders more quickly improves customer satisfaction and promotes a faster return on investment.

!" Reduced training costs. Minimal training is required, since the Maintenance and Admin- istration Position (MAP) is already familiar to DMS system craftspersons. In addition to cutting costs, this similarity can also help accelerate service rollout, accelerating overall service continuity, especially during the initial rollout phase.

!" Improved efficiency. Using a single OAM interface for key provisioning and administrative tasks helps increase craftsperson efficiency.

Auto-homing of DS-30Bs LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature helps streamline the installation of Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelves by automatically configuring the DS-30B links that connect each shelf to either: !" A Line Group Controller (LGC) or Line and Trunk Controller (LTC) in the central office !" A Remote Switching Center-S (RSC-S) at a remote site

This automated configuration tool replaces the manual setting of dipswitches to confirm the length of the DS-30B links.


87

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By eliminating the manual setting of dip switches to optimize DS-30B operation, this feature: !" Increases service velocity by speeding up the installation of new shelves !" Frees craftspersons for other functions !" Eliminates the human errors that can result from manual intervention

Using the DS-30B as the link to the switching environment provides significant benefits over other options. Its 250-foot maximum reach is far greater than the length of the DS-30A links used to connect the LCM. The extra length provides greater flexibility in the placement of new equipment frames, which might be a crucial consideration in planning an expansion of the line capacity of a central office.

Enhanced Alarm Reporting

LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature refines the processing of MAP-level alarms originating from the Universal Edge 9000 DMS, making it easier for the craftsperson monitoring the system to identify the problem that generated the alarm.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Augmenting the information provided by alarms can dramatically abbreviate troubleshooting procedures, reducing the likelihood that minor faults will turn into service disruptions or cause other serious problems. This efficiency helps reduce expenses for troubleshooting and repairs and bolsters customer satisfaction.


88

Broadband data software The software that supports the delivery of DSL services on the Universal Edge 9000 DMS is a Non-Computing Module Load (NCL), distributed on a CD-ROM and installed onto the Universal Edge 9000 Element Management System (uEMS) — the OAM platform for DSL services. The uEMS, a powerful, SNMP-based management system, is the platform ultimately responsible for performing OAM tasks that apply to broadband data traffic. It resides on a commercially available server — either the Hewlett-Packard OpenView or the Sun Solaris platform. Its graphics-based point-and-click operation shortens troubleshooting and monitoring activities and simplifies adds, moves, and service changes.

�� DSL Data Release AD3.1

Enables xDSL services This initial software release — available in conjunction with Rel•15 — supports delivery of data services on the four-port version of the Service-Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite Multicircuit Line Card. The service-adaptive capability allows each data port on a card to be remotely programmed for the service type desired by the subscriber — ADSL or G.Lite. Full-rate ADSL offers maximum rates of 8 Mbps downstream/1 Mbps upstream, and G.Lite can deliver up to 1.5 Mbps/512 kbps. The actual data rates achieved with either of these services is dependent on the condition of loop facilities and the customer premises equipment devices used. Service providers also have the option of stepping bandwidth down in 32 kbps increments to minimum rates of 128 kbps downstream/64 kbps upstream for both ADSL and G.Lite, to support multi-tiered service offerings.

To access DSL services, the subscriber can choose from a variety of industry-standard G.DMT and G.Lite customer premises equipment (CPE) devices. For a list of compatible CPE devices, consult the Nortel Networks Web site at

http://www.nortelnetworks.com/corporate/programs/dslinterop/index.html#companies

Supports DS-3 ATM Interface DSL Data Release AD3.1 supports a 45 Mbps DS-3 link to provide the ATM interface for the aggregation and backhauling of data traffic. To promote service continuity and overall reliability, the ATM interface supports “cold SWACT” (“1+1”) redundancy in this release.

Principal benefits !" Offers new revenue opportunities with high-margin DSL services. The introduction of

DSL services helps diversify the provider’s service menu, bolstering the options available to business customers and Internet-savvy consumers. Capturing and retaining these elite subscribers are important ingredients for future revenue growth.

!" Supports multi-tiered pricing structure. The data rate on the 4-port Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite card (as well as subsequent integrated DSL data and voice cards) can be stepped down in 32 kbps increments to support a marketing plan that includes several bandwidth-based service levels.


89

!" Speeds service turn-up. Service Adaptive capabilities enable remote programming of subscriber-selected services. This means new orders can be processed quickly — accelerating access to new revenues, increasing subscriber satisfaction, and reducing processing costs.

!" Incorporates Quality of service (QoS) capabilities. The DS-3 ATM interface supports ATM QoS operations so the network provider can confidently enter into service level agreements (SLAs) with businesses. QoS controls enable service providers to deliver predefined levels of service to different customer applications.

Software dependencies The order codes for DSL release 3.1 are: !" NTZP97DP for loading on the Hewlett-Packard uEMS !" NTZP97DQ for loading on the Sun Microsystems uEMS

Delivery of analog voice services on the integrated Multicircuit Line Cards requires a Rel•15 (or higher) PCL with the optional order code UEDG0001 licensed.

Hardware dependencies For data backhauling, the two-port DS-3 ATM Network Interface (NTNP35AA) is required. The planned packages for the four-port Service Adaptive ADSL plus Voice Multicircuit Line Card include: !" 4+4 Service Adaptive ADSL Half Shelf (NTNB49GA) that contains eight 4-port Service

Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite plus Voice cards. !" POTS-32 and 4+4 Service Adaptive ADSL Half Shelf (NTNB49EA) that contains four

POTS-32 cards and four 4-port Service Adaptive ADSL plus Voice cards.

A Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf fully provisioned for Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite requires two NTNB49GA packages. A split provisioning scheme (half POTS and half integrated access) requires one NTNB49GA and one NTNB49EA package per shelf.


90

�� DSL Data Release AD4.0

New services Release AD4.0 — the second release providing DSL data services — becomes available with Rel•17, with support for the following DSL services: !" SmartDSL delivers an upper-tier data rate (3.5 Mbps/768 kbps) in a 10-port integrated

Multicircuit Line Card. The card is compatible with popular G.DMT-compliant customer devices, such as those equipped with Alcatel or ADI chipsets.

!" Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite (on 8-port Multicircuit Line Card) offers the same voice and data functionality (including remote service programming) provided on the 4-port card (available with the previous release, AD3.1) with twice the density.

Principal benefits !" Increased service density. Both the SmartDSL cards and the 8-port version of the Service

Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite cards significantly boost the service capacity of each Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf. A frame fully provisioned with the SmartDSL card, for example, can deliver an upper-tier broadband data rate plus analog voice services to 640 subscribers.

!" Expanded service menu. The SmartDSL card significantly expands service options. With its upper-tier downstream data rate, SmartDSL supports a broad range of applications and higher service densities to help the network provider competitively market high-bandwidth services. Enhanced video streaming and faster Internet downloading are just two examples of the performance improvements that can be expected from SmartDSL.

!" CPE compatibility. The SmartDSL card interworks with a wide array of G.DMT-compliant customer premises equipment. For a list of compatible CPE devices, consult the Nortel Networks Web site at: http://www.nortelnetworks.com/corporate/programs/dslinterop/index.html#companies

Software dependencies The order codes for DSL release 4.0 are pending. This 4.0 data release requires a Rel•17 (or higher) PCL with the optional order code UEDG0001 licensed.

Hardware dependencies Packages containing the Multicircuit Line Card for SmartDSL service are planned to include: !" 10+10 SmartDSL Line Card Half Shelf (NTNB49FA) that contains eight 10-port Smart

DSL plus Voice cards. !" POTS-32 and 10+10 SmartDSL Line Card Half Shelf (NTNB49JA) that contains four

10-port SmartDSL plus Voice and four POTS-32 cards.

A Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelf fully provisioned for SmartDSL plus voice requires two NTNB49FA packages. A shelf split between high-density POTS and SmartDSL plus voice requires two NTNB49JA packages.


91

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

Benefits of BRI The Nortel Networks standards-based Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) services easily integrate voice and data for a wide variety of point-to-point and multipoint applications. National ISDN has been implemented across DMS systems in a way that delivers maximum flexibility while reducing equipment and maintenance costs. BRI service offers premium quality and greater bandwidth to subscribers while offering carriers a proven way to generate revenue.

By bringing the power of the digital network to line and trunk access, ISDN provides powerful benefits: !" Because ISDN BRI brings together features from customer-premise equipment and from the

DMS switch, end users have access to more feature options. BRI’s digital features mirror and surpass analog offerings.

!" Nortel Networks BRI complies with National ISDN standards, making features, peripherals and customer-premises equipment interoperable with multivendor equipment.

!" BRI is easy to install and inexpensive to administer and maintain, decreasing the overall cost of ownership to the network provider.

!" With the explosive growth in high-speed access, network providers are perfectly positioned to take advantage of existing investments in BRI technology.

New optional BRI feature The following is an optional feature. Although this software is delivered with a PCL load, this order code must be licensed separately.

NATIONAL ISDN-2 BRI FUNCTIONALITY NI000052 Adds new features and enhanced capabilities for NI-2 services on the DMS SuperNode platform.

On Demand B-Channel Packet LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

In addition to transmitting packet-mode data on the D-channel, the user can now activate X.25 packet data on either (or both) 64 kilobit B-channels on an on-demand basis for much faster packet throughput performance. This enhancement enables the B-channels to be used for both packet and circuit applications.

While one B-channel is in use for packet mode data, the second B-channel can be used for a simultaneous voice or circuit-switched data session. Upon completion of the B-channel packet-mode data call, that B-channel can then be used for circuit-mode calls. Previously, packet data over a B-Channel was available only on a non-dialable, nailed-up basis.


92


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Packet service can now be provided without the need for a nailed-up B-Channel connection, freeing system resources. With this feature, a dynamic B-Channel connection is available between the user terminal and the DMS packet-handler function.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 TRUNK ACCESS SOLUTIONS

93

Trunk access solutions

This chapter discusses two strategic trunk-access solutions available today with the DMS SuperNode system.

The versatile Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) supports direct-connect optical trunking, significant footprint savings, reduced operating costs, and carrier-class reliability — on a scalable, evolvable, multi-application platform. Beyond helping to reduce office cost of ownership, the SPM can also be transitioned to an integral Multi-service Gateway in the next-generation Succession packet telephony solutions.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) technology is particularly well suited for connecting private branch exchanges (PBXs) and Internet service providers (ISPs) to local exchanges. PRI is a trunking technology that typically delivers 23 64-kbps “B” (bearer) channels for payload traffic and one single 64 kbps “D” (data) channel for all signaling and call control (other configurations are possible). Because of its higher throughput, adaptable bandwidth, and fast call set-up, PRI connectivity is ideal for ISP and PBX trunking, or to serve as a trunk interface between central offices.

Also in this document, refer to the Remote/switch access chapter (starting on page 115) for discussion about Switched Remote and GR-303 features.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) 94

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) 108

TRUNK ACCESS SOLUTIONS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

94

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM)

Reduce cost of ownership with direct SONET trunking The Nortel Networks Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) opens the door to new opportunities by introducing Optical Carrier signal-level 3 (OC-3) interfaces directly into the DMS SuperNode system. This flexible, multiple-application platform brings the latest high-speed trunking technology to the DMS family with a modular, scalable, world-class design that prepares the DMS office for the transition to next-generation multi-service packet networking.

Now tandem and large end offices can gain new operating-cost savings by simplifying office operations; cabling; powering; planning; engineering; and heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) costs — while enhancing the quality of service to subscribers. A single frame with two SPMs has the same footprint as a Digital Trunk Equipment (DTE) frame, yet supports up to 4032 DS-0s with OC-3 links. This significantly reduces the number of switching-peripheral frames — helping to trim the trunking footprint at least 4.2 times compared to DTC configurations. And, since the SPM is a full “front-access” cabinet, even more floor space can be reclaimed by installing SPMs back-to-back or as close as 6 inches to the building walls.

Saved floor space

3 ft. required clearance for front access to cabinets

12 in. clearance from walls

3 ft. required clearance for front access to cabinets

50 frames, 3,200 packs, full equipment fill

3 ft. clearance for front access to frames

12 in. clearance for back-to-back frames

12 frames, 192 packs, 30% fill

Interfacing 48,000 trunksto the DMS systemwith Digital TrunkControllers...

Interfacing 48,000 trunksto the DMS systemwith SpectrumPeripheral Modules...

Recapture valuable floor and shelf space with the cost-reducing SPM

Plus, Nortel Networks designed spare processing capacity and hardware slots (near 70% free shelf space in initial releases) to help make the SPM future-ready for other trunk services, to meet network provider requirements.

The reduction in peripheral frames, batteries, and rectifiers in the office can translate into lower power expenses — some five to ten times less than existing lineups. Engineering, planning, and physical provisioning tasks associated with adding new trunks are cut by as much as 48 times over a DS-1 office — with the potential to reduce total cable termination by 21 times the equivalent DS-0 capacity configuration.


95

Beyond reducing operating costs and significant space savings, the SPM also helps: !" Simplify maintenance by integrating with DMS operations, administration, and mainten-

ance (OAM) systems. All hardware modules support hot insertion/hot extraction — helping to reduce service disruptions. And the modular, scalable frame — with space-saving front access — offers a long list of fault detection and isolation enhancements.

!" Enhance reliability by reducing the number of points-of-failure in the system. Redundant optical switch links, impressive low bit error rate, duplicated crossover links, and no optical-to-electrical conversions also contribute to high in-service time. Hot standby common equipment can switch over without dropping current stable calls.

!" Open revenue opportunities. The SPM’s wide bandwidth, scalable processing, and flexible SONET payload mapping makes this an ideal integrated platform for easy entry into data services, video (including video conferencing), and other high-bandwidth offerings. And the SPM’s multiple-application architecture simplifies the deployment of new revenue-generating services, quickly, without increasing peripheral count.

!" Protect investments. Not only does the SPM provide an ideal DMS-integrated platform to expand high-bandwidth services, reduce the cost of switching office ownership, and enhance service reliability today — but it also can support a transition to a Multi-service Gateway in a next-generation Succession packet telephony network.

New capabilities at a glance !" Integrated Echo Cancellation enables deployment of long-haul trunks from the DMS SPM

to a distant switch without having to de-multiplex (de-mux) the SPM OC-3. SPM-integrated echo cancellation saves network providers the costs of investment in external cancellation equipment and associated inter-connection points and their associated powering and floor space requirements. See page 100.

!" The Private Exchange Trunks feature on SPM permits Direct Access Line (DAL) and Private Exchange/Foreign Exchange (PXFX) trunks to function on the same SPM for DMS-500 switches. This is enabled with the creation and use of a new terminal type and exec lineup, making it possible to consolidate service for DAL and PXFX on a single switch rather than, as in the past, having to use two SPMs for this purpose. See page 97.

!" Rel•15 supports DMS-100 and DMS-250 PRI trunks on the same SPM. This efficiency simplifies office configuration and provisioning for DMS-500 system sites.

Helps reduce costs with direct

optical trunking


96

!" Network providers seeking to bring their OAM&P functions under a single umbrella will welcome the Reach Through Surveillance feature. This feature provides transport network access to the SPM through SuperNode Data Manager (SDM), enabling transport personnel to use the same interface on the SPM that they use for the rest of their transport network. See page 104.

!" The new Synch Resource Module enables the SPM to synchronize off a Building Integrated Timing System (BITS) clock to meet the stricter timing standards required for SONET. This yields accurate timing between digital offices for highly reliable, stable voice and data transmission. Also, the DMS Message Switch and its subtended peripheral modules can synchronize off the SPM instead of a separate BITS interface. See page 106.

!" PRI (Primary Rate Interface) trunk carriers now have additional ways to maintain and monitor their networks with Q931 and Q921 Message Tracing. This feature gives carriers a streamlined way to troubleshoot ISDN PRI B and D channels, either at the trunk group level or on individual lines. See page 102.

!" Rel•14 introduces software patching on the SPM with the existing Post Release Software Manager (PRSM) database. This feature enables the network provider to perform an in-service application of SPM patches in the same manner currently used for XPMs. Release 15 extends this capability to an even greater number of SPM loads. See page 102.

SPM Non-Computing Module Loads (NCLs)

Separately orderable NCLs provide software functionality locally on the SPM. These software releases provide limited downward compatibility with PCLs at the DMS-Core (for compatibility details, refer to the “Non-CM software baseline” table on page 290) and align with PCL releases in the following ways:

SPM release name

NCL order code (used in this chapter)

Associated CM/ XA-Core release

SP14 SPM00035 Rel•14


SP16 SPM00116 Compatible with Rel•15


Because software functionality requires a certain PCL release at the Computing Module/XA-Core and a certain NCL release at the SPM, both PCL and NCL order codes appear under the feature name in the software descriptions in the remainder of this section.


97

More information For a summary of hardware baseline information for the SPM on DMS SuperNode systems, see page 285 in the Reference chapter in this document.

For a brief multimedia tutorial on SPM benefits and evolution, access this URL: http://www.nortelnetworks.com/spmtutorial

New SPM capabilities

Significant incremental ISDN PRI features are scheduled to be supported on the SPM in Rel•14 through Rel•17. For details, see the tables included in the Primary

Rate Interface (PRI) section, on pages 110-111, in this chapter.

SPECTRUM PERIPHERAL MODULE BASE SPMS0001

Delivers software support for Nortel Networks next-generation, high-speed, optical inter-office trunking.

Private Exchange Trunks on SPM PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables Direct Access Line (DAL) and Private Exchange Foreign Exchange (PXFX) trunks to function on the same SPM for DMS-500 systems. Although DAL and PXFX trunks use the same terminal type, prior to Rel•14 they had different “exec” lineups that prohibited network providers from datafilling the DMS-500 switch to provision DAL and PXFX trunks on the same SPM.

This Rel•14 feature creates a new terminal type and exec lineup. !" The new terminal type, (ABSPX) for PXFX trunks, can be provisioned on the same SPM

along with DAL trunks. !" A new exec lineup, (PXSPMX) for PXFX trunks, provides equivalent exec functionality as

the currently used SP FX exec lineup (PXDTCX) on the SPMs.

This feature is transparent to network providers not requiring this functionality.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Before Rel•14, a service provider with a DMS-500 system needed to use at least two SPMs for handling local office PXFX trunks and long distance DAL trunks. By creating an equivalent exec lineup for the PXFX trunks, this feature makes it possible for the DALs and PXFX


98

trunks to co-exist and function on the same SPM — to lower capital and operating costs, streamline engineering, and simplify OAM&P.

This feature also offers a special upgrade procedure to activate the new functionality that does not cause a loss of service in an active switch.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: SPM NCL: SPM00035

Black Box Fraud Prevention Over OC-3 PTS PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement extends the revenue protection of the Black Box Fraud feature in order code BAS00064 (first generally available in Rel•08) to OC-3 links using the per-trunk signaling (PTS) protocol. Billing systems use answer supervision signals to mark the start of charges in a call billing record. Although fraudulent, it is possible to suppress or delay the return of answer-supervision signals from a PBX (or other terminating device, euphemistically called a “black box”). This practice resulted in improper billing and lost revenues to the network provider.

This feature helps inhibit fraud by allowing only a one-way transmission path until the terminating device returns answer supervision signals. The originating party still hears call progress and comfort tones, but two-way communication is impossible before the DMS system receives answer supervision.

This software also offers an optional timer that will tear down the call if answer supervision has not been received within one, two, three, four, or five minutes (datafilled on a trunk-group basis). If this timer is used, the DMS SuperNode system pegs an operational measurement (OM) and creates a log (TRK 610) whenever the black box fraud timer expires before receiving answer supervision signals.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Black Box Fraud Prevention can help recoup revenues to the network provider from calls that were previously not billed due to fraud by “black box” customers, resellers, and carriers at the terminating end. SPMS0001 now extends this simple, effective revenue protection to optical spans with PTS signaling.

To help the network provider identify possible fraud violators, the TRK 610 log contains key information, including the originating agent, terminating trunk, called number, calling number, and time-out value.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



99

Internal Routing PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature implements Message Transport Protocol internal routing for the SPM to route SS7 call processing messages to the correct SS7 signaling link for transmission. With the implementation of this feature, the engineering rules for determining when external routers are required are now based on the trunk and message quantities, rather than the peripheral type installed. External routers are still required for large offices.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this feature, External Routers (LIU7s) in the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) are no longer automatically required with an SPM, helping to save capital investments, operating costs, and LPP card slots. Current SPM sites with external routing activated have the option of continuing with that implementation or change to internal routing, consistent with engineering rules.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


SS7 Channelized Access PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides Network Interface Unit (NIU) based channelized access for SS7 signaling for the SPM OC-3 interface, consistent with the current Digital Trunk Controller (DTC) implementation. Channelized access routes 64 kbps timeslots to carry signaling information to the Link Interface Unit for SS7 (LIU7). The use of NIU-based channelized access enables termination on a selected LIU7, and removes the need for a channel bank (MUX) to gain access to the DS-1 span. Channelized access enables the network provider to provision and maintain a channelized access path from the OC-3 carrier to the SS7, and does not perform any actions on the data that travels along this path.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

While there are no changes to the channelized access functionality itself, this feature does extend the functionality to SS7 links on the SPM OC-3 interface. This efficiency removes the need for a channel bank and supports integrated SPM OAM&P.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: SPM NCL: SPM00035 Hardware: SPM with an OC-3 interface, an LIU7, and a NIU


100

LEC Echo Cancellation PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This standard feature provides software support of integrated SPM Echo Cancellation for Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) ISDN User Part (ISUP) trunking. This enables deployment of long-haul trunks from the DMS SPM to a distant switch without the requirement to de-multiplex the SPM OC-3 span.

Datafill determines which trunks are eligible for Echo Cancellation. The SPM then dynamically applies cancellation when required. In the case of fax/data calls, the SPM does not allocate echo cancellation — based on the receipt of a valid G.164/G.165 tone or the User Service Indicator (USI) field in the Initial Address Message (IAM).

The eligible LEC ISUP trunk types are IT, ATC, TI, TO, T2, IBNTI, IBNTO, and IBNT2.

Voice Service Processors (VSPs) need to be installed in the SPM for integrated Echo Can- cellation. There are three circuit packs available from Nortel Networks that provide either 64-millisecond or 128-millisecond tail delay in varying increments. Resources may be dedicated or pooled, based on traffic characteristics.

This feature also provides additional logs and surveillance information.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

SPM-integrated Echo Cancellation saves network providers the cost of investment in external echo cancellation equipment, facilities, and related inter-connection points and their associated powering and floor space requirements. And, since there are fewer connections and points of possible failure, integrated Echo Cancellation can also enhance network reliability.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: SPM NCL: SPM00035 Hardware: NTLX66BA, NTLX85AA, or NTLX66AA


101

Carrier Banner Enhancements PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

SPM carrier alarms arrive from the SPM as unique carrier alarms from the carrier maintenance subsystem (unlike XPMs, alarms are not generated from the node maintenance subsystem). The resultant alarm logs are carrier (CARR) logs, indicated at the trunk banner.

Since the SPM implements a 1+1 uni-directional protection-switching scheme, there is an active and inactive OC3RM (OC-3 resource module). The payload carriers are contained within the section/line carriers in the currently active OC3RM. When the OC3RM switches activity, the payload is then carried by the newly active OC3RM’s section and line carriers. If an OC-3 section carrier or STS-3 line carrier on an inactive OC3RM is made manually busy (manB), no alarm alerts the network provider that the SPM is in a protection group simplex mode. This can make the SPM vulnerable, since no protection switch capability exists and no indication alerts the network provider to this potential risk.

To prevent this scenario, SPM00035 introduces new software that has the system generate a new alarm whenever the OC-3 section or STS-3 carrier on an inactive OC3RM is man-busied. The alarm indication follows the same alarm scheme as other SPM carriers: !" The alarm is set against the line carrier on the active OC3RM !" A CARR log is generated !" At the carrier Maintenance and Administration Position (MAP), the “alarm” column value

increments !" With the carrier posted at the carrier MAP level, a MAP command execution outputs the

new alarm !" If the TRK (trunk) banner clears, it then changes from a “.” to a “C” — if the TRK

banner already had a “C” due to a previous carrier alarm (SPM or DTC), no additional indication displays


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The principal benefit in this enhancement to the carrier alarms in the TRK banner is to alert the network provider when an inactive OC3RM has placed either the OC-3 section or STS-3 carrier off-line, or both. By providing a unique alarm at the TRK banner for SONET carriers, these enhancements also maintain compatibility with current alarm schemes for legacy carriers.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



102

Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) PCL: LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015 NCL: SPM00115

KEY CAPABILITIES

These feature help to significantly reduce operating costs associated with the delivery of software patches for the SPM. In Rel•14, the CEM, OC3, and DLC loads are patchable. Rel•15 expands patchable loads to include DSP and VSP software.

The same infrastructure in use today for delivering and applying patches to the DMS system applies to these features. SPM patching is modeled on the Extended Peripheral Module (XPM) patching tool set. The “patchability” of each load is comparable to that of XPMs.

Technical reference: Rel•14: 59012158, 59012246, 59014578, 59014583, 59015313, 59014588 Rel•15: 59026415, 59026468

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Prior to Rel•14, fixes for the SPM were delivered by maintenance loads that required the SPM software to be reloaded. The new patching capability enables network providers to use the existing Post Release Software Manager (PRSM) database to apply SPM patches in the same manner currently used for XPMs — to extend in-service time, streamline maintenance procedures, and lower operating costs.

Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability

LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015 NCL: SPM00116

KEY CAPABILITIES

With this message traceback feature, service providers can troubleshoot their PRI/ISDN networks at the trunk group level or on individual lines.

The ISDN user-network interface data link layer protocol is specified in Q.921. The data link layer provides the logical links between the customer premises equipment (CPE), and the exchange termination. It is responsible for the transmission and error-free delivery of information over a physical medium.

The ISDN user interface network layer 3 (Q.931) establishes, maintains, and terminates network B-channel and D-channel connections over ISDN between communicating application entities. Those connections can be direct circuit-switched ISDN calls, packet connections made via circuit-switched access to a packet switched public data network (PSPDN), or a packet access to the ISDN packet handler via D-channel information services.

With the Q931 and Q921 Message Traceback feature in SPM00116, the command interpreter (CI) uses a command set structure similar to the Extended Peripheral Module (XPM) debug


103

tool, with the same formatting currently used on the Digital Trunk Controller for ISDN (DTCI) trace for Q931 and Q921 messaging.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature provides an ISDN troubleshooting tool to enable network provider maintenance personnel to trace incoming and ongoing Q931 and Q921 messages, enabling fault isolation to expedite recovery procedures. The similarity between DTCI and SPM traces also stream-lines local practices, lowers training requirements, and speeds various maintenance procedures.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


Resource Module SWACT

LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017 NCL: SPM00117

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature supports a nightly Switch of Activity (SWACT) of SPM Resource Modules (RMs), establishing a scheduled activity switchover to the inactive RM. In a manner similar to XPM peripheral SWACT procedures, the target RM remains active after the switchover until the next SWACT procedure. The system scheduler initiates a routing SWACT of the Common Equipment Module (CEM) and RMs on a daily basis and divides the results of this SWACT into four classes (all four classes generate a log or display a message at the MAP terminal). The system stores passed and failed SWACTs in the maintenance record, and provides failure reasons for SWACTs that happen to fail.

For system robustness, the RM SWACT feature will: !" Terminate, if a warm SWACT is not possible !" Be InSv for the SWACT to occur !" Provide a SWACT-back capability if the post-SWACT audit fails

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By enabling scheduled SWACT activities on all of an SPM’s CEM/RMs, this feature helps verify that the SPM will be able to process calls after an unscheduled RM SWACT activity.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: SPM NCL: SPM00117 Hardware: NTLX82AA/BA CEM processors


104

REACH THROUGH SURVEILLANCE SPMS0014 Permits network provider transport monitoring and maintenance centers to use an existing OAM&P system to retrieve performance parameters on the SPM.

Reach Through Surveillance LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables network provider transport monitoring and maintenance centers to query the individual and the whole carrier of the SPM for monitored performance parameters on the OC-3 Resource Module (RM). This software provides transport network access to the SPM through the DMS SuperNode Data Manager (SDM). Using Transaction Language-1 (TL1) messages, a customer network element (NE) is able to retrieve carrier information from the SPM.

The design for this feature can be viewed as two server-client frameworks integrated back-to-back: !" One framework handles OC-3 performance data queries. The server is on the DMS

system; the client is on the SDM. Communication between them is via Remote Procedure Call (RPC).

!" The other framework handles TL1 message transport. The server is implemented on the SDM, and the client is on the customer NE. Communication between them is via TCP/IP.

This optional feature is controlled by a parameter in the OFCOPT table.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With the ability to be queried by transport NEs already in place on transport equipment, this feature enables the SPM to fit into the current monitor and maintenance structure of the customer network. With this feature, transport personnel use the same interface on the SPM that they use for the rest of their network when dealing with fiber troubleshooting. Also, to help reduce capital costs and speed deployment, this feature uses current Nortel Networks product offerings and existing messaging software to transport and receive TL1 messages.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: • SPMS0001 Spectrum Peripheral Module Base • SDM00014 NCL on the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM)

Hardware: Client’s monitoring system must be capable of sending and receiving TL1 to and from the SDM via TCP/IP.


105

OC-3 LINE TIMING SPMS0040 Introduces an early option to setting SPM’s OC-3 interface towards Telcordia GR-253 synchronization standards.

OC-3 Line Timing PCL: LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014 NCL: SPM00035

KEY CAPABILITIES

This new, optional functionality exploits the high phase resolution and sampling frequency provided by the SPM to improve synchronization performance and meet the optical (SONET) synchronization standards GR-253 on the SPM’s OC-3 output.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Message Switch (MS) clock can be configured to use the SPM as a source of timing for the entire DMS office, as an alternative to operating the SPMs in a loop-timed configuration.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: NT9X53AD Digital Phase Lock-Loop Clock Card

TRUNK CARRIER SOFTWARE OPTIONALITY CONTROL – ISUP/PTS SPMS0016 Controls the number of ISUP/PTS trunks on the SPM. See under SPMS0017 for details.

TRUNK CARRIER SOFTWARE OPTIONALITY CONTROL – PRI SPMS0017 Controls the number of PRI trunks on the SPM.

Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015 NCL: SPM00115

KEY CAPABILITIES

Order codes SPMS0016 and SPMS0017 offer ways for a network provider to match purchases of trunk capacity with network requirements. Today, network providers license trunk capacity in 2016 trunk batches (the full capacity for a SPM). Service providers that do not need to provision SPM trunks in such large batches can use these new order codes to purchase a right-to-use (RTU) license for a portion of this capacity.

Rel•14 (A59018431) added tuples to table OFCOPT to control the number of carriers assigned to SPMs in a single office through the use of office parameters. SPMS0016 and SPMS0017 add SOC functionality for the OFCOPT variables SPMS-MSGTRK_CARRIER and SPMS_PRITRK_CARRIER.


106

!" SPMS0016 controls provisioned SPM DS1P carriers with assigned ISDN User Part (ISUP) and Per-Trunk Signaling (PTS) trunks.

!" SPMS0017 controls provisioned SPM DS1P carriers with assigned Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunks.

Technical reference: 59018431, 59027128; also see NTP 297-8991-901

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Controls enable the network provider to restrict the number of provisioned DS1P carriers assigned with either ISUP/PTS or PRI trunks to a limit set through an RTU password. The limits are separately set between the network provider and Nortel Networks on an individual office basis to enable network provider full flexibility in trunk assignment. Based on contract terms, additional capacity can be licensed at a later time.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: SPMS0001 Spectrum Peripheral Module Base

SYNC RESOURCE MODULE SPMS0050 Supports external synchronization from an SPM within DMS SuperNode networks.

SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015 NCL: SPM00116

KEY CAPABILITIES

In a digital network, synchronization provides accurate timing between digital offices to ensure reliable, stable voice/data transmission. This feature satisfies the stricter timing standards required for SONET, enabling the DMS Message Switch (MS) to synchronize Building Integrated Timing System (BITS) clock timing off an SPM using a Sync Resource Module.

The SPM external sync interface (ESI) timing option supports external synchronization from an SPM via traditional BITS DS-1 timing reference. The DMS system can use this input timing information to synchronize the Message Switch clocks and distribute the timing signals to all peripherals on the switch. This functionality takes advantage of the high phase resolution and sampling frequency provided by the SPM, improving synchronization performance over the entire network — while meeting SONET standards on the SPM’s OC-3 output.

SPM ESI timing is an alternative to the current OC-3 line-timing or OC-3 loop-timing implementation used by SPMs to meet SONET synchronization standards. Note that all three SPM timing configurations are mutually exclusive applications.

Technical reference: 59030631, 59031339; also see NTP 297-1001-130, GR-253-CORE, and GR-1244-CORE


107

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The SPM ESI feature provides traditional DS-1 external timing reference inputs (two BITS feeds) for the SPM, so the network provider can benefit from distributing the SONET-quality timing to all subtending DMS peripherals.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: Rel•15-based PCL and SP16. This functionality replaces order code SPMS0040 OC-3 Line Timing

Hardware: This feature requires that the DMS system has an NT9X53AD clock card on the Message Switch as well as two SPMs equipped with NTLX44AA Sync Resource Module cards


108

Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

The smart choice for Internet service providers With more people connecting to the Internet every day, Internet service providers (ISPs) are looking for more efficient trunking and high-quality connections, as well as new ways to generate revenue. PRI links are the choice of leading ISPs all across North America for a number of reasons:

!" PRI provides greater throughput than channelized T1 (DS-1) connections because of its clear channel (or out-of-band signaling) capability. In each PRI link, the 64 kbps D channel controls the resident B channels, taking the call setup and signaling out of the channel that is being used to transfer data. A call terminated via a T1 trunk uses 8 kbps of the 64 kbps channel for in-band signaling, reducing the actual throughput available for data by more than 12 percent.

!" Out-of-band signaling means faster call setup and tear down times, so network providers can serve more subscribers per trunk. The faster call setup also helps increase customer satisfaction and loyalty, reducing expensive customer churn. And 56K modem manufacturers recommend using PRI for ISPs who want to deliver a higher quality of service for their customers.

!" Circular Hunting evenly distributes traffic across service-provider access facilities, reducing modem burnout and processor usage. Traffic becomes more predictable, enabling simpler fault isolation. Circular Hunting also enhances subscriber convenience because only one published directory number is required for dialup access.

!" PRI delivers the subscriber’s number and/or name along with each session. The carrier can use this information for account authentication, billing and usage tracking, and database lookups. This data can also be used as an effective way to help block spammers and hackers.

!" PRI can terminate all call types, including analog modems (28.8K, 33.6K, 56K) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) customers. Unlike T1 trunks, PRI trunks don’t require costly additional equipment on the back end to connect BRI customers. Because both analog and digital traffic can be transmitted over the same PRI link, both types of customers can call into a single published phone number, reducing directory number maintenance activities and further lowering operating costs.


109

Well-suited for PBX accounts PRI has proven to be the trunk of choice to serve business PBX accounts due to such built-in features as: !" Dynamic call-by-call channel allocation accommodates changing traffic requirements (say,

from INWATS to OUTWATS) instead of static service designations, as in traditional T1 channels.

!" More PBX users can be supported than over traditional T1 spans. Further efficiencies can be gained by supporting as many as 20 PRI spans with one “D” channel (plus a back-up “D” channel for redundancy).

!" Advanced network services such as Calling Line ID, message services, hotel/motel services, and videoconferencing. PRI transparently extends Centrex features from the central office and enables PBX and Centrex users to enjoy the same features as if they all had the same service.

!" Two B-channel transfer capability causes a PBX to immediately release an ISDN trunk after transferring a call to provide more trunk capacity. This efficiency is particularly ideal for organizations that use centralized attendants, automatic call distribution, voice mail systems, and interactive voice response systems.

New PRI features New ISDN PRI capabilities described in this chapter include:

!" LTID enhancements. The number of Logical Terminal Identifiers (LTIDs) that can be screened on a directory number increases from 12 to 2,160 for each PRI interface.

!" 4ESS/5ESS PRI Interworking. The DMS system can now support AIN triggers that enter the network from Lucent Technologies 4E/5E trunks.

!" E911 screening improves emergency service by transmitting an actual station number, rather than the customer premise equipment billing number, when an emergency call comes in from a PBX or other types of NI-1 DMS system PRI links.

!" Circular Hunting OAM enhancements. Network providers can set up Circular Hunting OAMs to provide total counts for all 220 members (previously, this data had to be calculated manually on an individual basis).


110

Rollout of PRI capabilities Existing and future ISDN PRI functionality extends to both Extended Peripheral Module (XPM) and Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) platforms on different schedules. The following tables detail when a particular feature is scheduled to be first available on each platform. There are two tables: the first details the NI-1 environment and the next details the NI-2 environment.

NI-1 environment: planned feature rollout on XPM and SPM platforms

XPM platform SPM platform

Feature Order code Release Order code Release

Basic call

Calling Name/Number

D-Channel Backup/NFAS

NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

Circular Hunt NI000036 Rel•10 NI000036

SPM00033

Release Link Trunking (RLT) NI000024 Rel•08 NI000024

Call Forward Interface Busy NI000049 Rel•13 NI000049

ISA (Call-by-Call) NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

Network Redirection and Reason NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

SPM00035

4E/5E Network Side/intrwrk w. AIN NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

4E/5E User Side Variant NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

LTID Expansion (from 12 to 2160) NI000033 Rel•15 NI000033

SPM00115

Q931/Q921 Message Trace N/A N/A SPMS0015 SPM00116

Call Screening NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

Digital Test Access NI000033 Rel•08 SPMS0015

NTNA #911 Screening NI000041 Rel•17 NI000041

SPM00117

PRI Private Networking NI000033

Dialable Wideband Service NI000073 Rel•08 Not ported


111

NI-2 environment: planned feature rollout on XPM and SPM platforms

XPM platform SPM platform

Feature Order code Release Order code Release

SPM PRI NI-2 Enabler N/A N/A SPMS0018

Calling Name / Number NI000030 Rel•09 NI000030

Circular Hunt NI000035 Rel•10 NI000035

Hotel / Motel NI000032 Rel•09 NI000032

D-Channel Backup / NFAS Rel•08

Basic Call Rel•08

Screening Rel•08

Call-by-Call Rel•08

Location Indicators Rel•12

OFM 13 Data Link Monitor Rel•11

OFM 14/130 D-Channel Backup

NI000043

Rel•11

NI000043

SPM00033

2BCT NI000018 Rel•09 NI000018

Dialable Wideband Service (DWS) NI000040 Rel•09 NI000040

Call Forward Interface Busy NI000047 Rel•13 NI000047

Message Services NI000037 Rel•11 NI000037

E911 Screening NI000038 Rel•12 NI000038

SPM00035

LTID Expansion (12 to 2160) NI000043 Rel•15 NI000043 SPM00115

Q931 / Q921 Message Trace N/A N/A SPMS0018 SPM00116

Digital Test Access NI000043 Rel•08 NI000043 SPM00117

Circular Hunt OAM Counter enhanc. NI000035 Rel•17 NI000035 SPM00117

PRI across Multiple SPMs/XPMs NI000039 Rel•12 Not ported

B-Channel Packet NI000034 Rel•11 Planned – TBD


112

New optional PRI capabilities The following features are all planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

PRI NI-2 BASE NI000043 Provides basic, standardized NI-2 ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services.

Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement to order code NI000043 expands the number of Logical Terminal Identifiers (LTIDs) for National ISDN-2 (NI-2) environments. This feature increases the maximum number of LTIDs that can be screened on a directory number from 12 to 2,160 per PRI interface. With this software, incoming calls can be directed to a specific terminal on each interface.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By allowing more LTIDs for each PRI interface, this optional software for NI-2 environments can help network providers better use system resources to help control operating costs.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NI000022 ISDN PRI Base

PRI NI-1 BASE NI000033 Delivers base functionality needed for PRI services in a NI-1 environment.

Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NTNA LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement to order code NI000033 expands the number of LTIDs for NTNA (Nortel Networks North America) facilities. This feature increases the maximum number of LTIDs that can be screened on a directory number from 12 to 2,160 per PRI NI-I interface. With this software, incoming calls can be directed to a specific terminal on each interface.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By allowing more LTIDs for each PRI interface, this optional software for NTNA environments can help network providers better use system resources to help control operating costs.


113

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NI000022 ISDN PRI Base

Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides the network-side PRI interworking of the 4ESS/5ESS variants with Advanced Intelligent Networking (AIN) on the DMS system. This feature supports trunk types N449 and N459 on the NTNA variant only.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this feature, the DMS system supports available network-side features and DMS AIN triggers that enter the network through N449/N459 PRI interfaces. This multivendor compatibility increases switching flexibility throughout the network.

NTNA E911 SERVICES NI000041 Enhances Nortel Networks proprietary ISDN PRI service to interwork with emergency services.

NI-1 E911 LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This E911 screening feature enables service providers to identify and present the actual station number behind customer premise equipment (CPE) to the emergency bureau, so that emergency services can be directed to the CPE’s actual location rather than to the CPE’s billing directory number location. This capability supports NI-1 (NTNA) PRI connections to the DMS system.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to order code NI000041 provides a valuable community service by sending actual station data behind the CPE. This enables emergency teams to respond faster to crisis calls made through PBXs or other types of NI-1 DMS PRI links.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NI000033 PRI NI-1 Base


114

CIRCULAR HUNT SERVICES - NATIONAL ISDN 2 NI000035 Enhances National ISDN PRI to promote trunk availability for Internet traffic. See under NI000036 for details.

CIRCULAR HUNT SERVICES - NTNA NI000036 Enhances Nortel Networks proprietary ISDN PRI to promote trunk availability for Internet traffic.

Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

The Circular Hunting feature increased the number of PRI trunks on a single interface from 50 to 220. Now, this Rel•17 enhancement expands the operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) capabilities for all 220 trunk group members. The software addresses both NI-1 NTNA and NI-2 facilities, under separate order codes.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this enhancement, the network provider can view total OAM activities associated with all 220 trunk group members. Manual calculation will no longer be necessary to compile this data, saving the provider time and resources.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: Order code NI000035 requires NI000043, PRI NI-2 Base Order code NI000036 requires NI000033, PRI NI-1 Base

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REMOTE/SWITCH ACCESS

115

Remote/switch access

DMS remotes provide highly flexible and cost-effective methods of distributing advanced services. These solutions provide powerful platforms for digital integration, network simplification, exchange area consolidation, and penetration into new markets or territories. Switch remotes extend DMS SuperNode host switch services deeper into the network. Remote access vehicles — operating as digital loop carriers (DLCs), next generation digital loop carriers (NGDLCs), and sophisticated servers — offer a variety of high-speed data and wideband business services.

The Nortel Networks family of Subscriber Carrier Modules (SCMs) offers service providers a wide choice of switch access interfaces that flexibly meet a variety of applications for both DMS system and third-party transmission products. These direct digital interfaces offer numerous economic and operational benefits to network providers deploying digital loop carrier and residential broadband access systems. This chapter discusses enhanced features for the newest member of the SCM family for GR-303 capabilities: the Expanded Subscriber Carrier Module-100 Access (ESMA).

Also in this document are details on the following direct line and trunk solutions: !" Line access solutions chapter discusses Universal Edge 9000 and ISDN Basic Rate Interface

(BRI) services [beginning on page 79] !" Trunk access solutions chapter discusses Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) platform and ISDN

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services [beginning on page 93]

In this chapter

Section Starting page Extend Universal Edge 9000 DMS off an

RSC-S remote 116

Extend DSL services to existing remotes: Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL

117

Standard base software features 120

New optional feature 122

REMOTE/SWITCH ACCESS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

116

Extend Universal Edge 9000 DMS off an RSC-S remote

Nortel Networks now offers more ways to extend advanced digital subscriber line (DSL) services to remote businesses and subscribers — while using less space to support lines at a Switch Remote. Beginning with Rel•14, the Universal Edge 9000 DMS can be subtended off a Remote Switching Center-S (RSC-S).

While the Universal Edge 9000 DMS supports a long list of telephony features (see the Line access solutions chapter, beginning on page 79), of particular interest to many providers is this remote’s support of various DSL services. With the DMS Extended Distance software, and a link permitting up to a 13-millisecond roundtrip delay, an RSC-S can be as far as 650 miles away from the DMS switch site. Beyond this point, subtended Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelves can deliver high-demand DSL services to subscribers. Also, at a future time, the Universal Edge investments can be transitioned to serve as multiservice gateways in a Succession packet telephony network.

Extend DSL and other services deeper into the network using existing RSC-S investments

Additional benefits offered by this enhancement include: !" The subtended shelves occupy less space than Line Concentrating Modules (LCMs) to

support subscriber lines.

The high-density Universal Edge 9000 DMS shelves require less space to support lines

!" The RSC-S continues to provide Emergency Standalone (ESA) and Intraswitching

capabilities. !" The Universal Edge 9000 shelves can be transitioned at any future time to serve as Universal

Edge 9000 Media Gateways in a Succession packet telephony solution, to provide a long-term return on investment.


117

Extend DSL services to existing remotes: — Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL

Now there’s a low-cost way to enter the high-speed data services arena — without the limitations of DSL Access Multiplexers (DSLAMs). Nortel Networks has creatively packaged leading-edge DSL services into the space occupied by a standard line drawer of the DMS Line Concen- trating Module (LCM). The new Universal Edge Intelligent Multiservice Access System (IMAS) XpressDSL quickly and rapidly extends revenue-generating, high-speed data services to remote locations.

The Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL stands as the industry’s first DSLAM-less, carrier-class, broadband access system that combines multiple DSL transmission support with high-capacity Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) switching. Comprehensive Quality of Service (QoS) capabilities deliver premium-quality services over DSL with greater integration, higher densities, and lower infrastructure costs.

This quick-to-market solution can cost-effectively deliver in the space of an LCM drawer: !" 40 lines with full-rate Asynchronous DSL (ADSL) or G.Lite !" 64 lines with Symmetric DSL (SDSL) !" A mix of 20 lines with ADSL/G.Lite and 32 lines with SDSL

Integrated with DMS frames

Since the network provider uses existing DMS investments, the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL provides a convenient, low-cost entry into xDSL revenues and helps make DSL deployment more ubiquitous across a serving area. In many cases, robust DSL capabilities can be installed in present DMS LCM equipment within one hour. This fully integrated solution reuses existing LCM power and VF cabling for quick installation in non-cabinetized frames, such as: !" Frame-based LCMs in:

#"DMS-100 and DMS-500 SuperNode host #"DMS-10 host #"Remote Switching Center-S (RSC-S) and Remote Switching Center (RSC)

!" Star Remote Hub !" Outside Plant Access Cabinet (OPAC) !" Remote Line Concentrating Module (RLCM) !" Remote Subscriber Line Equipment (RSLE; DMS-10 only) !" Outside Plant Module (OPM)

Special kits are available to quickly upgrade OPAC and OPM remotes in the field.


118

Deliver ADSL, G.Lite, and other high-speed services with existing remotes

Delivers long-term benefits Now generally available, the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL sets a new standard for DSL access platforms. Benefits of the platform include: !" Low-cost service entry. With small size and simple installation, this is the ideal vehicle

for launching competitively priced DSL service packages. For example, a service provider operating a DMS-100, DMS-500, or DMS-10 system with multiple remotes can cost-effectively introduce DSL services to the entire service area.

!" Leveraging of current LCM investment. Since it can be deployed in existing LCM line drawer locations, the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL enables inventoried equipment to be used for the delivery of advanced DSL services.

!" Deployment versatility. In addition to any non-cabinetized LCM remote, the Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL can also be rack-mounted for installation in central offices or wall-mounted to serve in multiple dwelling units (MDUs) or multiple tenant units (MTUs).

!" High service density. From a single LCM line drawer position, this solution can deliver up to 64 lines SDSL service or up to 40 lines of full-rate ADSL/G.Lite service.

Simple hardware design Measuring 3.8 inch high by 12.68 inch wide by 18.4 inch deep, this module installs easily and cost-effectively into a vacant Nortel Networks DMS LCM drawer position. The assembly houses three card slots: !" Two interchangeable line-card slots for any mix of:

#" 40-port card for full-rate Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) ADSL or G.Lite delivery #" 64-port card for SDSL delivery Each port supports multiple classes of QoS and up to 128 virtual circuits. The line cards are hot swappable.


119

!" One interchangeable Chassis Switch Card (CSC) feeder slot #"Contains 622 Mbps ATM switch per CSC #" Supports DS-1 Inverse Multiplexing for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (IMA), DS-3 User-

to-Network Interface (UNI), or OC-3 UNI feeder #"Offers daisy-chain aggregation of local Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL shelves

Incorporates market-leading technology with creative, efficient packaging

Simple software requirements The Universal Edge IMAS XpressDSL requires Universal Edge IMAS software 5.2 release or higher. This solution operates independently of the PCL deployed in the DMS system: any PCL release may be used.

Interworks with Universal Edge IMAS This third-generation technology contains all of the advanced ATM features of the full size Universal Edge IMAS — including the same operating software and most of the same cards.


120

Standard base software features

The following are standard features; they do not have to be licensed separately.

DMS SUPERNODE PLATFORM STANDARD Provides the software infrastructure for all other order codes.

Double-Density ESMA LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This standard feature provides software support for a new type of Expanded Subscriber Carrier Module-100 Access (ESMA) frame that accommodates in a single footprint: !" As much network capacity as two traditional ESMA frames !" Doubles the number of DLCs that can be supported by a single ESMA frame

The new double-density ESMA frame complements, and does not replace, existing ESMA frames. The new TR-303 subscriber module frame is ideal for applications that have high ccs levels across the P-side channels (say, from high line concentration at an RDT or from high-traffic services such as ACD with Integrated Channel Banks).

In comparing the two types of frames:

Expansion shelf

Today’sESMA frame

Double-DensityESMA frame

ESMA shelf

Extension shelf

ESMA shelfLin

ks

toE

NE

TL

inks

toE

NE

T

ESMA shelf

ESMA shelf

ESMA shelf

ESMA shelf

!" Today’s configuration permits up to two ESMA shelves with an extension shelf in a single frame. The traditional ESMA frame continues to be the solution of choice for ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) services and for applications that have relatively low traffic levels across P-side DS-1s. In these low ccs applications, an extension shelf can be added to expand line concentration at the frame. An extension shelf is not needed with the new double-density frame.

!" The new double-density frame uses the same shelf and the same circuit packs that are in use with the ESMA today, but with an enhanced bulkhead and reworked cabling/power to accommodate up to four ESMA shelves (and no extension and expansion shelves).


121

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Designed for network providers wanting to minimize the number of transport facilities between the Host office and DLCs, the new double-density ESMA frame enables customers to provision twice the number of ESMA shelves in a single frame. Not only does this feature use DLC facilities efficiently, but this enhancement can also result in fewer frames in a lineup, with associated on-going savings in power, engineering, and heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC).

Since this new frame is optional, and intended for new installations and extensions, there’s no requirement to upgrade (or replace) traditional ESMA frames in the field to this new design. Plus, by using the same ESMA shelf and cards as provisioned in the traditional frame, the new frame helps to trim operating costs by supporting established local provisioning, sparing, and maintenance practices.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: NTMX90BA Shelf and frame

RDT Table Expansion LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

Today, the DMS system limits the number of remote digital terminals (RDTs) subtended off a DMS SuperNode system to a maximum of 255. Rel•14 expands the RDT Inventory table to permit as many as 500 RDTs to be supported by the switch.

Note: This feature expands the maximum number of RDTs that can be subtended, but does not increase the total traffic capacity of the shelf or the links to the system’s ENET frame.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Of interest to network providers expanding into new markets — and new geographic areas with smaller populations — this table expansion permits additional RDTs to be supported by a DMS system. While the total number of calls supported does not change, the near doubling of remote terminal support significantly helps broaden networking options, deepens network penetration, and helps avoid stranded capacity — using existing ESMA investments.

ESMA 2688 Voice Line Support LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

Previously, the DMS-100/500 system datafill limited the number of lines on a peripheral that uses the AccessNode proprietary GR-303 protocol to a maximum of 2048 lines. Now, this Rel•17 feature raises the datafill restriction so network providers can provision all 2688 lines of a Universal Edge 9000 Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) when this remote digital terminal uses the cost-effective AccessNode proprietary protocol.


122

So a single ESMA can serve all 2688 POTS lines in a Universal Edge 9000 DLC, the DS-0s between the ESMA and the Universal Edge 9000 are split into two Interface Groups: !" The first Interface Group covers traffic over the traditional maximum of 2048 lines !" The second Interface Group controls the remaining lines, up to a maximum of 640

This feature also extends to the Universal Edge 9000 Remote, but with a maximum capacity of 2520 POTS lines.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By expanding tables and datafill, and supporting multiple Interface Groups, this standard feature enables network providers to use the full capacity of the Universal Edge 9000 DLC from a single ESMA peripheral. This enhancement can be provisioned with a minimum of effort (for example, no new multi-line card slot is needed for the second Interface Group).

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: Maximum line support is based on 2688 POTS lines and a Universal Edge 9000 DLC with seven shelves (each shelf with 16 POTS 24-port cards). Other hardware/ service mixes at the Universal Edge 9000 DLC may reduce the supported maximum

New optional feature

The following feature is optional: although this ships as part of a PCL load, the service provider needs to license this software to use it.

SUBSCRIBER CARRIER MODULES BAS00016 Enhances operations of a variety of DMS Subscriber Carrier Module remote elements.

SMS/SMS-R Loopback LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature offers a way for the network provider that has pair gain devices to reduce expensive truck rolls to complete maintenance tasks. This order code offers software support for remote loopback paths on protected pairs from the pair gain device to the DMS Subscriber Carrier Module-100S (SMS) or DMS Subscriber Carrier Module-100S Remote (SMS-R).


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With this feature, the network provider can check lines and facilities connected to pair gain devices without the significant expense of dispatching craftspersons to the remote site.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 ADVANCED INTELLIGENT NETWORKING

123

Advanced Intelligent Networking

Since 1987, Nortel Networks has proven its commitment to intelligent networking. We have been in the forefront of early intelligent network (IN) initiatives, such as IN/1, IN2, IN1+, and MVI (Multivendor Initiative). And we have been a development leader in the Telcordia-defined advanced intelligent network (AIN) from the start by providing Signaling System No. 7 (SS7) capabilities on the DMS SuperNode Family. This dedication to intelligent networking continues with our support for both Telcordia-specified AIN releases and the international Capability Set (CS-1) standards defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU).

From platform-level software enhancements to application-level services, the DMS SuperNode platform focuses on supporting: !" Network communications with improved base switching and trunk signaling capabilities. !" Optimum network operations with service switching point (SSP) and signaling transfer

point (STP) software enhancements that meet and exceed Network Reliability Council performance standards.

!" Higher network usage with new revenue-generating services that invite subscriber use and take advantage of the expanding intelligent network.

In this chapter

Section Starting page New optional AIN features

Service Enablers Base Release 8 Service Enablers Base Release 9 Service Enablers Base Release 10

124 126 130

ADVANCED INTELLIGENT NETWORKING NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

124

New optional AIN features

The following features are all planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

SERVICE ENABLERS BASE RELEASE 8 AIN00280 Provides base functions required to support the continuing rollout of GR-1298/1299-based AIN Service Enablers.

Service Enablers Base Release 8 LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

AIN00280 serves as a prerequisite for all other Release 8 order codes and provides: !" Continuing updates for AIN Service Enablers operations, administration, maintenance,

and provisioning (OAM&P) and Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) capabilities. !" Ongoing regression testing to promote a smooth integration of powerful Release 8 trigger

capabilities into provider networks.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

AIN00280 enhances existing tools and features to support the new capabilities introduced in Service Enablers Release 8 that enhance network efficiency and expands revenue opportunities by enhancing signaling and information processing and increasing messaging flexibility.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: AIN00270 AIN Service Enablers Base Release 7

TERMINAL RESOURCE AVAILABILITY AIN00281

Supplies a lookahead trigger for determining the availability of terminating lines, thus enhancing terminating service efficiency.

Terminal Resource Availability LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This new feature supplies a lookahead trigger for determining the availability of terminating lines. At any point in the Terminating Call Model (TCM) where originating or terminating lines have not yet been alerted, this software enables the DMS system to launch a query on calls attempting to terminate to a line. This enables the service provider to distribute calls across local switched lines or redirect calls to other network nodes (the actual call distribution is dependent on SCP service logic).

This feature implements the Terminating Resource Available (TRA) trigger of the AIN TCM, helping to enhance current AIN trigger detection point processing capabilities.


125

The TRA trigger consists of the following functions: !" TRA trigger detection and processing !" TRA trigger request message and processing !" Response processing, including:

#"Continue messages #"Forward_Call messages #" Send_To_Resource messages


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Terminal Resource Availability feature gives service providers more flexible signaling and service processing capabilities across terminating services according to such parameters as time-of-day or level-of-use. AIN00281 can help decrease signaling traffic volume for a given service and reduce processing load across multiple network elements.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


CARRIER USAGE PARAMETER AIN00282

Enables the local SSP to select carriers by call type.

Carrier Usage Parameter LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional software enables the DMS system to treat the carrier(s) specified in an Analyze Route, Forward Call, or Create Call message from an SCP as preferred carriers rather than forced carriers. The local SSP looks ahead at translating a call and matches the type of call with the preferred carrier designated by the Carrier Usage Parameter field.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Carrier Usage Parameter feature enables the SSP to select the most appropriate carrier by call classification (such as local, intraLATA, or interLATA). This can be used to offer complex services, such as least-cost carrier selection based on time of day for certain call classifications (based on dialed digits). Since a similar SCP-based solution would be very complex in comparison, AIN00282 can be a cost-effective way to simplify efficient carrier selection and enhance call completion rates.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



126

SERVICE ENABLERS BASE RELEASE 9 AIN00290 Provides base functions required to support the continuing rollout of GR-based AIN Service Enablers.


KEY CAPABILITIES

This order code serves as a prerequisite for all other Release 9 order codes to expand AIN functions, including software support for:

!" Continuous ringing tone during Send_to_Resource processing

!" Message-triggered dial pulse (DP) to dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) converter

!" Streamlined assignment of public feature code (PFC) and specific feature code (SFC) trigger items to customer/residential groups

!" Expands Line Attribute Response Processing (LARP) to include PFC and N11 triggers that override originating-line attributes

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

AIN00290 enhances existing tools and features to support the new capabilities introduced in Service Enablers Release 9 that offer service providers expanded revenue opportunities and greater maintenance efficiencies.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


EXTENDED RINGING TO STOR AIN00291 Adds continuous ringing tone during a Send_to_Resource process to make it transparent to callers.

Extended Ringing to StoR LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

After a receiving a no-answer response for a given call, the SCP returns a Send_to_Resource (StoR) message to the originating caller. Without AIN00291, power ringing and ringback tones are interrupted during StoR processing. With AIN00291, these tones continue during the StoR action, using the Intelligent Peripheral for StoR functions.



127

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

AIN00291 enhances the Send_to_Resource process by inserting continuous ringing tone to makes it transparent to the calling party. Without this enhancement, the lack of call progress sounds could encourage the originator to hang up before receiving treatment.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: AIN00290 AIN Service Enablers Base Release 9 Hardware: To connect the SSP to an Intelligent Peripheral, PRI trunking is required

DIAL PULSE CONVERTER AIN00292 Activates the dial pulse to dual-tone multi-frequency converter on the DMS system.

Dial Pulse Converter LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides dial pulse (DP) to dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) conversion upon receipt of the DP converter parameter in the Send_to_Resource (StoR) message. DP to DTMF conversion outpulses both the dialed DP digits and the equivalent DTMF tones to the terminator or Intelligent Peripheral.

Now originating lines with customer terminals that use DP can reach and use an Intelligent Peripheral in the network that processes only DTMF tones for menu-driven services (such as telephone banking and ticket reservations). Note: In addition to some service limitations, some originating agents do not support DP conversion to DTMF.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

AIN00292 permits non-DTMF calls to receive same treatment as DTMF calls, enabling broader access to DTMF-driven services throughout a serving area.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



128

PFC TRIGGER ADMINISTRATION AIN00294 Offers enhancements to help manage customer groups and to override SSP parameters.

PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

With this feature, the service provider can assign public feature code (PFC) and specific feature code (SFC) trigger items to customer/RES (residential enhanced services) groups. Only RES and ISDN BRI agents are allowed to trigger on PFC and SFC triggers that are subscribed at the customer group level. Individually subscribed triggers take precedence over group-based subscribed triggers.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

To help facilitate widespread deployment of AIN services in a single turn-up process, this feature enables the service provider to assign an AIN service to a large set of lines, such as an office or customer group, while allowing the service to be disabled or enabled (AINDENY option) on individual lines within the group.

This group-level AINDENY option helps make AIN services easier to implement than provisioning individual lines, separately.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


PFC Trigger Line Attributes LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the service provider to assign the Line Attribute Response Processing (LARP) option to public feature code (PFC) trigger items in table TRIGITM. A new LARP option called REDIR offers gives service providers the flexibility to let the response processing — on a trigger that overrides originating-line attributes — to be treated as a redirection or no-redirection.

This enables the network provider to override billing and redirection information on a per-FPC basis. With AIN00294, the charge number and the redirecting number are available options for LARP processing.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to the LARP feature enables:


129

!" The service provider to use the redirection parameters in cases where a call has to be forwarded after encountering PFC triggers.

!" The response from the SCP to a specific PFC trigger to bypass the originator’s line screening, to override the toll restrictions imposed by the originator’s line attributes (such as Toll Deny).

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


N11 LINE ATTRIBUTES AIN00293

Adds forwarding attributes to the Line Attribute Response Processing (LARP) trigger.

N11 Line Attributes LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature expands the existing LARP functionality to include new call forwarding fields to the trigger items table. This features gives service providers the flexibility to let the response processing — on a trigger having overriding line attributes — to be treated as a redirection or no-redirection. This gives the service provider a simplified way to override redirecting parameters and charge number.

The redirection and forwarding attributes represent additional information that can be associated with a particular trigger line attribute. The redirection option treats the call associated with the trigger to be considered as a redirection in the response processing. The forwarding attributes are also optional attributes, controlled by selection of those attributes in the trigger item table.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to the LARP feature enables: !" The service provider to use the redirection parameters in cases where a call has to be

forwarded after encountering N11 triggers. !" The response from the SCP to a specific N11 trigger to bypass the originator’s line

screening, to override the toll restrictions imposed by the originator’s line attributes (such as Toll Deny).

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



130

SERVICE ENABLERS BASE RELEASE 10 AIN00300 Provides base functions required to support the continuing rollout of GR-based AIN Service Enablers.


KEY CAPABILITIES

This order code, a prerequisite for all other Release 10 order codes, introduces the Call Party Handling framework specified in Chapter 21 of GR-1298. This framework for multi-party services enables external databases to control transactions. The various order code options in Release 10 offer software support of: !" GR-compliant disconnection handling !" Limiting how long a call can connect to an Intelligent Peripheral !" Enabling certain calls to override some interLATA toll restrictions

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


ORIGINATE DISCONNECT AIN00301 Processes disconnections at both ends of a call in compliance with GR-1298 and GR-1299 to provide services with less caller interaction.

Originate Disconnect Event LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This order code builds on Telcordia’s Call Party Handling framework by adding O_Discon- nect and O_Disconnect_Called event arming in the Trigger Item Data model with call party handling determined by which party disconnects the call. With AIN00301, the system can treat disconnections (either at the calling or receiving end) in calls that implement AIN services according to specifications outlined in GR-1298 and GR-1299. The SCP receives the disconnection information and processes several parameters, including user ID, bearer capability, leg, and disconnection cause.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

A service provider can use the functions in AIN00301 to create and enhance services that help subscribers save time and simplify multiple calling sequences. For example, these capabilities can be used as part of a service that enables an originator currently on a call to start a new call without going onhook after the called party hangs up.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



131

TIMEOUT EVENT AIN00302 Offers an accurate timer that can be used in conjunction with SCP to track and control event-driven processes.

Timeout Event LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

AIN00302 offers a precise timer that can be flexibly used by services controlled by the SCP to time call events (such as tracking the duration of a current call against the remaining time on a prepaid calling card). When the monitored process times out, the system then queries the SCP call logic for further instructions.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

AIN00302 offers precise timing triggers built on Telcordia’s Call Party Handling framework. This can be creatively used to create or enhance services, such as sending a call to treatment when a prepaid calling card account depletes.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


TSTRC TIMER ENHANCEMENT AIN00303 Provides up to 60-minute connection to an IP when the caller prompts a message in calling an AIN-provisioned party.

TSTRC Timer Enhancement LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

When an originating party triggers an announcement or tone in calling to a number with AIN services, the length of time allotted for that announcement — that is, the length of time connected to an Intelligent Peripheral (IP) — can now be pre-set by the service provider. AIN00303 provides two capabilities: !" The network provider can set the maximum duration of a connection to the IP between 0

and 60 minutes with the AIN_TSTRC_TIMER variable in the OFCENG table. !" The TSTRC timer is now under the control of the originating (triggering) SSP instead of

the remote SSP hosting the Intelligent Peripheral.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This connection timer gives the service provider a simplified way to control the maximum duration of a connection to an Intelligent Peripheral, to help promote the most efficient use


132

of AIN resources and facilities, while continuing to enable messages of variable lengths to be played back to calling parties.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


SEND TO RESOURCE ENHANCEMENTS AIN00304

Gives carriers expanded support in extending AIN service across different LATAs.

Send to Resource Enhancements LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

AIN00304 expands DMS SSP functionality, providing support for carrier, alternate carrier, and second alternate carrier in the send to resource (StoR) message. This helps facilitate calls made to an Intelligent Peripheral (IP) that may be located in a different LATA.

This feature also implements a new translation pattern for processing the destination address, introducing StoR-specific line attributes to override the originator attributes, if required. Specifically, this will enable a StoR routing to bypass certain interLATA toll restrictions when connected to a remote IP.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This order code offers two major advantages to the service provider: !" Lowers capital and operating costs. Enabling the SCP to choose from a set of carriers

to connect originators to a centrally located IP eliminates the need for an announcement server in every LATA.

!" Operates transparently. Since this software has the StoR message parameters override the originator’s toll specifications (such as Toll Deny) to establish the call set up with a remote IP, the subscriber is unaware of the process and multiple charges are not incurred in making interLATA connections to the IP.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES


FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 DMS-500 LONG DISTANCE SERVICES

133

DMS-500 Long Distance services

The DMS-500 Local and Long Distance system is a DMS SuperNode application that combines local services of the DMS-100 switch, toll and operator services of the DMS-100/200 Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) portfolio, and Long Distance services of the DMS-250 system. In addition to the trunk connections supported by the DMS-250 switch, the DMS-500 system delivers all line types currently supported by the DMS-100 system for residential and business applications.

The DMS-500 system is a total solution with one of the industry’s most application-rich portfolios of carrier services loaded with major capabilities that are market-ready today. These include local services, Long Distance services, call center services, operator services, data services, and more. And, as part of Nortel Networks Succession packet telephony solutions, the DMS-500 system is uniquely positioned for the evolution to data-centric communications.

The descriptions of new Local features in LLT00014, LLT00015, and LLT00017 PCLs appear throughout this document. This chapter discusses the DMS-500 system as a whole — and then details new Long Distance features.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Competitive advantages 134

The changing Long Distance market 135

A complete portfolio of revenue-generating services 139

New Long Distance features UCSB0001 Universal Carrier Services Base CAIN0100 NetworkBuilder Messages

141 151

DMS-500 LONG DISTANCE SERVICES NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

134

Competitive advantages

The high-capacity DMS-500 system offers the following benefits to the service provider: !" Accelerated delivery of new features to quickly generate new revenue opportunities through

new services, new markets, and new end-to-end telephony offerings. This full-featured Local and Long Distance system delivers revenue opportunities on both sides of the switching business.

!" Easy growth to match market needs with a modular, scalable system architecture. Net- work providers can add processing capacity, memory capacity, trunk capacity, and services — as they are needed. For example, a DMS-500 system can easily grow from a relatively small configuration up to 100,000 ports though incremental additions. Enhanced processors, additional switching matrices, peripherals, and trunk cards can be added without redesigning the system or interrupting service.

!" Investment protection with an evolutionary path to a next-generation, multiservice Succession packet telephony solution.

!" Maximum market flexibility for service providers: #" Selling or reselling Long Distance services. #"Operating with or without operator services. #"Offering business and residential line services.

!" Lower costs and higher operational efficiencies gained in combining DMS-100/200 and DMS-250 system services: #"Reducing front-end hardware requirements. #"Reducing office site and environmental requirements. #"Centralizing operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P).

!" Expanded pre- and post-sales service support to build a network, train the staff, and operate the network, if needed.

!" Multi-vendor network operability with the DMS-500 SuperNode system’s open architecture. This service-rich platform makes extensive use of advanced signaling systems, such as SS7, ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI), and Intelligent Network (IN).


135

The changing Long Distance market

The DMS-500 switching system is designed to support profitability and growth in an environment of heightened competition. Nortel Networks has had the unique privilege of working with carriers around the world — including over 75 carriers in North America — to build successful businesses in this fiercely competitive market. With a dominant market share in North America, Nortel Networks has established itself as the preferred supplier of Long Distance solutions.

According to the latest figures available, Long Distance carriers generated over $99 billion in toll revenues and local telephone companies provided about $9 billion of toll service in 1999. When combined, the total Long Distance market was more than $108 billion. Since divestiture, interstate-switched access minutes have nearly quadrupled to about 600 billion, and Long Distance carrier toll revenues have more than doubled from $39 billion to $99 billion.1 Even a small percentage of share in this expanding market could translate into millions of dollars.

The convergence of regulatory, technology, and market forces is completely redefining the business of providing Long Distance service. The tidal wave of regulatory reform in North America is overturning state and local barriers prohibiting enterprises from offering interstate or intrastate telecommunications service or information service. This regulatory upheaval opens up new opportunities in long haul services.

The rapid growth of the Internet and the corresponding advancements in packet data technology have spawned what many believe is the next new technology paradigm: Voice over Packet (VoP). Indeed, by most accounts, data traffic now approximates that of voice — but is growing at a far faster rate. Data revenue has not kept pace with the volume increases, however, and service providers rely almost entirely on voice traffic for their revenue.

Into this chaos, toss a fast-growing portfolio of many other new technology choices — voice recognition, Intelligent Networking, interactive services, bandwidth-hungry data applications, and more. These services are deployed on networks more sophisticated than ever, requiring more specialized operations, administration, maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P) expertise than before.

On top of this, as network providers seek profitability and growth in the Long Distance free-for-all, there is a need to balance these technology choices with a host of business choices. Should you own your own facilities, or resell Long Distance on other carrier’s circuits, or both? Manage or outsource the administration of your networks? Deploy advanced services on a switch, Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) platform, or workstation LAN?

In light of all these considerations, network providers have to steer carefully considered courses.

1 Trends in Telephone Service, FCC, December 2000.


136

What kind of carrier to be? Today, the Long Distance market is served by widely divergent types of carriers — from the full-service carrier that owns its own nationwide network to the reseller who offers customers a discounted price on services it buys from others and delivers on leased facilities.

!" “Facilities-based” carriers tend to own almost all of their own network facilities (such as switches, transmission systems, and special access lines). Their own business offices manage their accounts, provide customer service, and bill subscribers.

!" “Switchless” resellers, sometimes known as “true resellers,” lease network facilities to provide Long Distance services. From the subscriber’s perspective, these companies look like Long Distance companies (as they market and sell services branded with their name) but, in fact, they are reselling a carrier’s switching, access, transmission, and billing systems.

!" Wholesalers, also known as “aggregators,” do not own or lease Long Distance facilities; they simply resell volume blocks of Long Distance service provided and billed by others.

!" The wholesale market has also seen the emergence of another type of Long Distance company: the Carriers’ Carrier — that builds extensive fiber optic and microwave circuits primarily to sell to other carriers, rather than to retail to end customers.

Components of business success

The question is whether it is advantageous to serve as a carrier — owning and controlling its own switches — or as a reseller, capitalizing on facilities provided by other companies. Here are some considerations that weigh into this decision:

!" Network costs. Carriers that own their own switches and transmission systems are in control of ongoing operating expenses. In addition, as new technologies become available to reduce operations costs — such as improvements in access and transmission systems or centralized network management systems — the savings can be seen immediately. Carriers that rely on others to provide facilities may or may not see these savings passed along in lease rates. For switchless resellers, network acquisition and management costs (which can represent 60 to 70 percent of total costs) are determined and controlled by a third party that is also likely to be a competitor in the retail market.

!" Features. Network features, such as sophisticated new calling capabilities, are controlled by the network provider. Carriers that own their own switches determine which features to purchase, based on their own knowledge of their customers. Given that many sales are won or lost on feature availability and flexibility, providers would be hard-pressed to offer a competitive edge when they do not control the set of features they could offer. Further, resellers that don’t own the switches are also unlikely to be invited into the feature design process.


137

!" Customer information. The organization that owns the Long Distance switch and billing system also has the associated customer information, including name, number, billing data, and usage trends. The billing data produced by switches is extremely valuable input to target marketing programs. Which customers bill more than $1000 a month in Long Distance charges? Which ones are candidates for a new bundling of services? Which business customers have grown more than 25 percent in the last three years? For switchless resellers, this kind of information is in the hands of a carrier who could also be a competitor.

!" Quality. Control and responsibility over quality of service is determined by the provider that owns the switch. In the event of a service problem, the customer can become aware that his service is not actually provided by the “branded” carrier but by another carrier. In this case, customers are likely to question whether they should be getting their service directly from the carrier that owns the facilities.

!" Fraud. Typically, the reseller that does not own its own Long Distance switch is responsible for the costs of fraudulent use of the phone system — over which it has no control. On the other hand, carriers that own their switches can implement fraud prevention systems to control or eliminate this cost.

!" Brand identification. Whether the carrier owns its own switches or procures switch services from another carrier, it is essential that the call be “branded” appropriately. When Long Distance customers reach directory assistance and recorded announcements, for example, they should hear the name of the company selling the service — which might or might not be the company that owns the switch. The technology is available to have switches and audio processing platforms brand calls for different carriers, but the control for implementing this capability correctly will rest with the carrier that owns the switch platform.

Staying ahead in the Long Distance market

Competition in the Long Distance market is fiercely aggressive, with price discounting supple- mented with brand recognition and market differentiation. Carriers are investing heavily in promotion and advertising, service customization, and international expansion in order to continue steady growth levels.

In the United States, expected industry deregulation will result in further levels of competition as new entrants, including the incumbent network providers, attempt to grab market share. This in turn will result in new levels of competition based on price, branding, differentiation, and niche marketing.

The successful interLATA, intraLATA, and international Long Distance carrier will need to provide all these components: !" Service parity. Whatever the unique needs of each territory or market, the first step in

entering the market is to move swiftly to provide service parity. At a minimum, new entrants will be expected to offer 1+ outbound, 800 number service, calling cards, and operator backing for all services. All of these services are available on the DMS-500 platform.


138

!" Differentiating services. To win business and residential subscribers from existing carriers, they must perceive advantages to making a change — and these benefits have to outweigh the inconvenience and uncertainty of change. The successful Long Distance provider makes on-going investments in service offerings to differentiate itself from other carriers. Of course, differentiation doesn’t necessarily mean additional services; it can mean innovative pricing or creative packaging of existing services. The DMS-500 system offers an impressive portfolio of enterprise network services, information database services, data and video services, custom dialing plans, and trunk routing capabilities — the tools for competitive differentiation.

!" Speed to market. When technology or consumer readiness signals a new market opportunity, the winning provider is the first to capitalize on that opportunity. When speed to market is measured in weeks, not months, success can depend on a close partnership with a key supplier that has the experience, resources, and financing necessary to support rapid business launch and service delivery.

!" Brand recognition and image. Yankee Group research has shown that consumers are driven more by brand loyalty, brand recognition, and reliability than by price — which ranked only fifth in importance in a recent poll. With that in mind, it’s essential for a Long Distance company to clearly identify itself as the carrier handling a call — known as call branding — so the consumer can associate the provider with valued services. DMS software can trigger call branding even for calls that bypass the end office, such as dedicated access line calls, to promote the carrier’s name.

!" Premium service quality. The growth of all-digital — even all-fiber — networks has raised the stakes on what is deemed “quality” service. In addition to signal quality, customers expect highly reliable networks for all their Long Distance services, even services that are not perceived to be “mission-critical.” End-to-end surveillance and troubleshooting capabilities are essential for uncompromising performance.

!" Competitive price. By helping to reduce operations cost, the DMS-500 system enables carriers to offer competitive pricing to their wholesale and retail customers. The superior service record of Nortel Networks Long Distance switching systems simplifies service maintenance — helping to reduce the on-going costs of maintaining quality service.

!" Successful selling in niche markets. Successful providers develop customized products aimed at unserved niche markets. These niches may be particular to a given region, or may be a result of business, demographic, or geographic characteristics. The flexible DMS-500 system helps simplify creative bundling of services. And switch owners wishing to resell blocks of capacity or services to other carriers will find that the flexible DMS-500 system gracefully serves multiple customers — with separate branding, billing, and service capabilities available to each customer.


139

A complete portfolio of revenue-generating services

For new and established players alike, success in the Long Distance market is inevitably linked to the portfolio of service offerings. With a Long Distance provider already presubscribed, customers are not likely to go through the trouble of switching providers unless they can see advantages in doing so.

At minimum, Long Distance providers are expected to offer outbound 1+, 800 number service, calling cards, and operator backing for all services. Competitive advantage, however, requires more than service parity. It requires strategic differentiators, such as debit card acceptance, voice recognition, global virtual private networking, and telecommuting service. Basic and differentiating services are both required for success, and all of these services and more are available on the DMS-500 switching system — and can be creatively packaged to match the network provider’s business strategy.

800 Service

900 Service

Travel Cards

Account Codes

PIN Numbers

Operator Access

VirtualPrivate Networks

Calling Cards

Call Detail Recording

Table Stakes Services

Hotline Service

ANI Screening

Speed Dialing Plans

Differentiating Long Distance services

Competitive Differentiators

Networked Centrex

Global Virtual Private Networks

Telecommuting Service

Dialable Wideband Service

Networked ACD

Fraud Control Features

Voice Print Services

Follow-Me Service

Call Prompter

Audio Text

Voice Recognition

Debit Card Acceptance

End User MMI

Voice Response


140

Value-added DMS-500 Long Distance services In addition to basic Long Distance services, the competitive Long Distance provider will augment revenue and market share opportunities by offering a mix of the following switch-based services, all available through the DMS-500 platform. !" Information database services. When industry-standard interfaces and protocols are used

among network elements, the DMS-500 system can interwork with external multivendor databases to deliver sophisticated revenue-generating services, such as: #"N00/NXX direct dial services #"Account and authorization codes #"Calling card services #"Local number portability

!" Routing and screening. To support

premium levels of service, service providers can tailor call-handling features and privileges based on a wide range of call criteria, such as routing by: #"Carrier Identification Code #"Time of day #"Personal identification number

InformationDatabaseServices

N00Number Services

Authorization Codes

Calling CardAuthorization

Routing andScreening

CIC Routing

Inter Machine Trunks

Time of DayScreening

Account Code ANI Screening

Class of ServiceScreening

Release Link Trunk

Multiple DialingPlans

Full 10 DigitRouting

7 Digit VPN Routing

15 DigitInternational Dialing

Speed Dialing

Hotline Dialing

User Partition

Switched-Based Long Distance Services

Enterprise Networks,Data, and Video

Services

VirtualPrivate Networks

ISDN PRI Services

Dedicated AccessLines

Switched 56 Kbps

Dialable WidebandServices

Debit/ CardPrepaid

Summary of switch-based services available with DMS-500 system

!" Enterprise network, data, and video services. Service providers can offer various services that use public telecommunications facilities to create enterprise networks that cross LATA boundaries. For example, Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) enable multi-location businesses to route private network traffic through public facilities and cross LATA boundaries to other company branches without the expense of leasing private lines. The DMS-500 system supports a broad range of interexchange data and video-switching applications that are growing at an increasing pace as businesses expand operations and require sophisticated communications technologies to keep them competitive.

!" Multiple dialing plans. The DMS-500 system can recognize, process, and route different

signaling protocols and multiple dialing plans to attract business accounts. Examples of high-demand Long Distance dialing services include: #"Private dialing plan #" Speed dialing #"Hotline numbers


141

New Long Distance features

The following Long Distance features are all planned to be available with the DMS-500 platform. New Local features are detailed in other chapters throughout this document.

UNIVERSAL CARRIER SERVICES BASE UCSB0001 Provides the software infrastructure for all other Long Distance order codes.

Billing Enhancements LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature populates Call Detail Recording (CDR) fields needed by the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) to support CDR to GR1100 Bellcore (Telcordia) Automatic Message Accounting Format (BAF) conversion. Because the BAF format is very different from the CDR format, additional information must be captured and reformatted.

This feature modifies or creates new CDR fields, tables, logs, and MMI mechanisms that enable the SDM to support accurate CDR-to-BAF conversion.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature is designed for carriers whose back-office billing systems are configured to process BAF-formatted billing records.

ISDN PRI Enhancements LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature permits the building of the Charged Party Number from the address digits stored in the DEFCLID field in table CALLATTR.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature enables an ISUP Charge Number to be built on PRI calls that terminate to SS7 Feature Group D or SS7 Inter-Machine Trunks provisioned with option ISDNXFER turned on — regardless of what parameter is received in the incoming setup message.


142

Charge Number Delivery Enhancements LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature adds additional billing information data or call blocking capability to DAL, SS7, and operator-assisted calls.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature expands billing information options to facilitate customer billing or eliminate unwanted billing generation on specific calls.

ISUP Exit Message Support LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the development and processing of an ISUP exit message when a call to an Access Tandem is routed to an interexchange carrier. The system populates a time-stamp and other relative data into call event status-related fields in the call detail record.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

To help expand revenue and customer satisfaction, this standard feature enables the service provider to capture additional types of information that can be used to provide enhanced billing alternatives.

STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature adds a new Ambiguous Code (AMBI) Selector to table STDPRTCT. This new selector permits a call to re-enter STDPRTCT screening, and enables the application of different screening to calls that have different called-party-number address lengths.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature enables up to three different screens to be applied to a call in table STDPRTCT. This additional screening can help improve call handling without increasing administrative workload.


143

Table Trunk Group Changes LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This standard feature bundles a number of additions to DMS-500 software capabilities. This software adds: !" A new option, TRGPREFX (trunk group prefix) to Direct Access Line (DAL) trunk group

options. If TRGPREFX is selected, the SMNPA is prefixed to the 7-digit Called Party Number in the CollectedAddressInfo parameter of the Info_Collected_Message prior to the SCP query.

!" Two new adjacent switch-type values to the ISUPIDX field of the SS7 Equal Access Network Trunk (EANT) trunk group: USC2AT (Access Tandem) and UCS2IXC (Interex-change Carrier). These new values provide the same far-end switch type identification functionality as the existing ISUPIDX field UCS2EAO (Equal Access End Office).

!" Two new call codes to the AMAREC option of the ORIGACC field: #"Call Code 110 – for InterLATA station-paid trunks #"Call Code 117 – for InterLATA Public Switched Digital Service (PSDS) trunks


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" The option fields in DAL trunk table TRKGRP provide additional information for Carrier AIN (CAIN) SCP queries.

!" The new values in the ISUPIDX field provide more granularity for far-end switch type identification.

!" The new subfields in ORIGACC provide more granularity of originating call trunk types.

TNS Delivery LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

LLT00013 added a new option, TNSDELV, to tables CICROUTE and TR533CIC. That feature permitted the delivery of the Circuit Code (CKTCODE) in the TNS parameter on national calls accessing the CICROUTE or TR533CIC tables for routing information.

Now, this LLT0014 feature modifies tables CICROUTE and TR533CIC to increase the range of the option field CKTCODE. The software also adds a new option RESERVE2 to table CICROUTE, for future use.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature more closely aligns value of the TNS Delivery function with Telcordia Standard GR-349 CORE.


144

Special Number Handling LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature introduces Modified Operator Signaling (MOSS) on Feature Group C (FGC) trunks, and also adds a new operational measurements group, EADLD, for future use.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

MOSS signaling supports operator platform connectivity when the connection is through Feature Group C trunks.

NetworkBuilder Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE

LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enhances the ability of the DMS-500 system to route operator-assisted Carrier Advanced Intelligent Network (CAIN) calls — such as 0+, 00-, and 01 international operator calls — by using the mandatory OPCHIDX field in the CICROUTE table as an index into the OPCHOICE table.

This enhancement adds new functionality in the processing of the Off Hook Delay trigger detection point (TDP) at the Collect Information PIC in the Telcordia AIN 0.2 Call Model. When this trigger is encountered: !" The DMS-500 system sends an Info_Collected query to the SCP/Adjunct !" The SCP/Adjunct responds with an Analyze_Route message

This feature creates new routing functionality if the CalledPartyId Nature of Address (NOA) in the Analyze_Route message is one of the following: !" Subscriber number, operator-requested, with CalledPartyId of NXX-XXXX !" National number, operator-requested, with CalledPartyId of NPA-NXX-XXXX !" International number, operator-requested, with CalledPartyId of CC+NN !" No number present, operator-requested, with CalledPartyId of “No Digits”


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature expands the ability of the DMS-500 system to route operator-assisted CAIN calls (0+, 00-, and 01 international operator calls).

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: CAIN0100 – NetworkBuilder Messages CAIN0512 – CAIN OFFHKDEL Trigger


145

CDR to AMA Compatibility AMA Enhancements

LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

These two features enable the DMS-500 system to generate billing records that resemble Telcordia GR-1100 records.

The Nortel Networks DMS-500 switch produces billing records in a proprietary billing format referred to as Call Detail Records (CDRs). The data captured into a CDR includes dialed number, called number, origination time, disconnect time, and the like.

Another type of billing record is the Bellcore Automatic Message Accounting Format (BAF), defined in Telcordia GR-1100-CORE Generic Requirements. BAF records are very different from the CDR records, not only in file structure but also in content.

To support the generation of BAF records, with a subset of the Telcordia specification, these features enable the DMS system to capture additional billing information. Various values obtained from MIBS on the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) are duplicated in the new AMAPARM table on the DMS-500 system. Once a CDR has been properly formatted, the system transfers the record to the SDM for pegging specific billing operational measurements, tracer records, and billing tool support.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" The CDR to AMA Compatibility feature formats CDR records so they resemble BAF records. These files can be later sent to the SDM so for convenient transfer to the network provider’s downstream processor.

!" The AMA Enhancements feature populates the key fields needed to support CDR-to-BAF conversion.

AMA Alternate Billing LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides NetworkBuilder support for the AMA (Automatic Message Accounting) Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP) parameter “AMAAlternateBilling Number” in incoming “analyze_route” messages.

The service control point (SCP) delivers this information to the service switching point (SSP) for inclusion into BAF billing records (see CDR to AMA Compatibility/AMA Enhancements features, above).



146

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature implements AMA Alternate Billing Number functionality and adds the call processing needed to support this parameter.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: CAIN0100 – NetworkBuilder Messages CAIN0501 – CAIN SPECDIG Trigger CAIN0512 – CAIN OFFHKDEL Trigger

Trunk Group Changes

LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

To implement new trunk-routing features on the DMS-500 switch, table TRKGRP expands to include several new pieces of information needed to provide correct AMA billing information for calls originated on these trunks.

This feature adds: !" New options (AccessID, TRN, and LDCUST) to the TRKGRP table. The AccessID and

Trunk Rating Numbers (TRNs) are used as data for the AMA billing records. LDCUST is an option on originating per-trunk signaling (PTS) and SS7 Equal Access Network Trunk (EANT) trunks connected to a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) and is used to: #"Determine the structure code/call code (SC/CC) to be generated. #"Control whether SS7 Application Transport Parameter (APP) and Service Activation

Parameter (SAP) parameters are built in the outgoing SS7 IAM. #"Provide support for a new AIN TCAP assignment authority.

!" A new sub-field, OrgSARec, to the existing AMAREC options vector, to determine the type of Call Code generated for the AMA billing records.

This feature interacts with the following features (listed by technical reference): !" 60009591 – ISUP Enhancements !" 60009567 – AMA Enhancements !" 60009571 – TCAP Enhancements !" 60009580 – CDR to AMA Compatibility


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature provides AMA billing information needed to support new trunk-routing features on the DMS-500 system.


147

RTEATTR Enhancements LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

The RTEATTR table applies attributes to a call based on the particular route destination chosen. This table provides an interface to control the delivery of SS7 and PR optional parameters, as well as the ANSCDR functionality and the called number replacement — all based on the terminating route selection. This table is accessed by an index stored in the SX route selector.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enhances table RTEATTR so the service provider can control optional outgoing parameters based on the terminating route.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: UTRS0003 – Routing Enhancements I

SAP Parameter Changes

LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature is responsible for updating and creating the Service Activation Parameter (SAP) parameter during route advancing.

When the DMS-500 system traverses a list of choices that leads to the determination of a route used to attempt termination, the process is called route advancing and can be accomplished in different ways, one of which is in-switch route advancing.

An Analyze_Route message contains routing information used to terminate the call. This message supplies NetworkBuilder the routing parameters needed to route advance. If translations are not successful with individual routing parameters, NetworkBuilder continues through each of the received indexes without further consultation of the SCP of trigger tables.

Upon receipt of an Analyze_Route message, the system examines the contents of the message for a SAP parameter, and one of two actions will be taken: !" If a SAP parameter is present, the system appends the feature code of “TTA Avoidance” to

the existing SAP parameter in the outgoing ISUP IAM. !" If a SAP parameter is not present, the system will create one and append the feature code

of “TTA Avoidance” to the outgoing ISUP IAM.



148

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature enhances call routing efficiency on the DMS-500 system.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: CAIN0100 – NetworkBuilder Messages

Default Routing 1 LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides default routing capability for toll-free 8YY calls in response to various error scenarios and network management functions. Now the DMS-500 system provides default routing of an 8YY toll-free call to another switch in any of the following situations: !" A query is blocked by Automatic Code Gapping (ACG). !" A query is blocked due to switch hardware failure. !" The DMS-500 switch T1 timer times out prior to receiving or recognizing a response. !" The DMS-500 switch receives an Analyze_Route or Send_to_Resource response message

with a fatal application or protocol error. (A fatal application or protocol error detected in a Disconnect message won’t trigger default routing).

!" A fatal network error is detected in response to a reply to the query. !" The DMS-500 switch receives a Report_Error or Application_Error message in response

to a query. !" The DMS-500 switch receives a TCAP message with a Reject component in response to a

query.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature helps improve customer satisfaction by enhancing the reliability of 8YY toll-free call completion.

Also see the Default Routing 2 feature in CAIN0100, NetworkBuilder Messages (in Rel•15) on page 153 in this chapter.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: CAIN0100 – NetworkBuilder Messages CAIN0500 – CUSTDP Trigger CAIN0501 – CAIN SPECDIG Trigger CAIN0511 – SPECFEAT Trigger CAIN0513 – CAIN TOLLFREE Trigger CAIN0900 – Automatic Code Gapping CAIN0901 – Manual Code Gapping


149

Local Incoming CIC Routing LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

A Carrier Identification Code (CIC) identifies the local exchange carrier or interexchange carrier that will route a call to the appropriate termination point. The Local Incoming CIC Routing feature enhances the DMS-500 system’s ability to route a call based on a received CIC=0110 in an ISUP or a Bearer Independent Call Control (BICC) IAM, by adding a new tuple to table OFCVAR called LOCAL_CALL_CIC_ROUTE. This new office parameter eliminates the need to datafill the CICRTE option in table TRKGRP, which causes all received CICs to route using CIC routing.

This feature creates new CIC routing functionality for calls under the following conditions: !" The call originates on an SS7 Feature Group-D (FGD) trunk. !" The new office parameter LOCAL_CALL_CIC_ROUTE is set to “Y” (on). !" The incoming ISUP or BICC IAM message contains a Carrier Identification Parameter

(CIP) with a CIC = 0110. !" The Nature of Address (NOA) of the received IAM’s Called Party Address (CPA)

parameter is not equal to the spare value “1111000.”

If all of these conditions are true, then the call accesses table CICROUTE to determine a Serving Translation Scheme (STS) to determine a route.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature enhances how the DMS-500 system routes calls using carrier identification codes.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: UTRS0001 – Long Distance Translations and Routing

CIC Trigger Subscription LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enhances table TR533CIC to enable subscription to NetworkBuilder (and to associated call processing). With this feature, the DMS-500 switch can interrupt call pro- cesssing for toll-free calls at various points in call (PICs) to obtain specific instructions for continuing the calls. At each PIC, conditions associated with specific service triggers are evaluated to determine the next best action to take. Technical reference: 60009555

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature enables more efficient handling of toll-free calls.


150

Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

The NetworkBuilder SSP can interrupt normal call processing at various points in call (PICs) according to the Telcordia AIN 0.2 Call Model. At each of these PICs, Trigger Detection Points (TDPs) may be encountered. In general, TDPs are points in call processing when a trigger is examined. If the conditions associated with that trigger are satisfied, then the action indicated by the trigger is taken.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature provides software development in LLT00015 to analyze digits and populate IAM (Initial Address Message) messages based on either a CAIN (OFFHKDEL) or an 8YY (SPECDIG) query response.

ISUP Enhancements LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature adds support to receive, build, and send two optional ISUP IAM parameters, both based on ANSI.T1.113 standards: !" Application Transport Parameter (APP) – has one or more Generic Operation Parameters

(GOPs) encapsulated within it. !" Service Activation Parameter (SAP) – contains a set of feature codes with a minimum of

one feature code allowed.

With the office parameter BUILD_ISUP_APP_SAP set to YES and a call originates on a Feature Group D trunk with the LDCUST option, call processing determines if the APP and SAP should be built. If these parameters are built, then table RTEATTR is checked to see if they should be blocked. Technical reference: 60009591

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enhances call routing efficiency by supporting two new optional parameters, APP and SAP, that can be embedded with the IAM. This feature accesses information from table TRKGRP in new fields created by Rel•15 feature 60009574, Trunk Group Changes.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: UTRS0003 – Routing Enhancements 1 CAIN0100 – NetworkBuilder Messages CAIN0200 – CAIN Extension Parameters CAIN0512 – CAIN OFFHKDEL Trigger


151

NETWORKBUILDER MESSAGES CAIN0100 Provides a variety of tools to enhance network routing.

NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature introduces expanded NetworkBuilder support for AIN 0.2 Transaction Capa- bilities Application Part (TCAP) parameters (Primary Billing Indicator and OverflowBilling Indicator) as well as the FURNISH_AMA_Information component.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This new feature adds new billing information to DMS-500 system billing records.

Miscellaneous Parameter Population LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides miscellaneous parameter changes; in table CAINPARM, to parameter UserID, parameters of NetworkBusy EDP Request and control mechanism, and the CallingPartyID parameter in the Info_Collected message. This feature is functional on Direct Access Line (DAL) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunk types only.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature supports different encoding of the UserID parameter and parameters of NetworkBusy operation changes, as well as the Nature of Address (NOA) population of Calling PartyID parameter in Info_Collected message.

NetworkBuilder Tools Modification LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature tracks all CAIN tool enhancements required by the incorporation of CAIN messaging protocol changes made by the Protocol Billing Modifications and Miscellaneous Parameter Population features (see previous two feature descriptions).


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enables the CAIN tools, CAINTEST and SCP Simulator, to correctly process message parameter and parameter field changes made to the CAIN protocol suite.


152

Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables craft personnel to more closely control the screening of CAIN calls to determine whether or not offboard processing is required. If offboard processing is not required, this software provides a convenient escape trigger function.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

To help cut on-going operating costs, this feature helps reduce the number of unnecessary TCAP queries to the SCP.

Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature adds ten new operational measurement (OM) registers to the following groups: !" CAINOM – six registers !" CAINMSGR – one register !" CAINMSGR2 – one register !" TFREE533 – two registers


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

New CAIN OMs provide additional information that can be used to track feature or equipment usage, simplifying the provisioning of hardware or software resources.

TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables: !" Spare control cause code values to be received in an IN/1 Automatic Code Gapping

(ACG) message. !" The mapping of control cause code values to a specific treatment.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This software increases the granularity of ACG control cause information by giving the service provider the option to specify different treatments to be applied to each CGI value.


153

TCAP Enhancements LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

With a number of bundled capabilities, this feature: !" Creates a new Assignment Authority (AA) associated with the TCAP InfoCollected

message sent to the SCP. This AA includes a new accessType extension parameter !" Creates a new CAIN office parameter to control sending the AA !" Enhances the Termination Notification functionality through the creation of a new

parameter, called TERM_NOTIF_BUSY_CSE_IND, in table CAINPARM


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Because a network provider can create services and features specific to its network and customer base, the extended parameter set created by TCAP Enhancements supports optional feature-specific information that would otherwise be difficult to transmit within the standard AIN parameter set.

Default Routing 2 LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides default routing for calls originating from Feature Group D (FGD) trunks. Default routing is subject to a new CAINPARM tuple, EANT_DEFAULT_ROUTE. If the value provisioned for this parameter is “Y”, the call is default-routed, based on this feature. If the value provisioned is “N”, the call is handled per existing functionality.

The Service Activation Parameter (SAP) is a new parameter in the Initial Address Message (IAM) developed by Rel•15 feature 60009591, ISUP Enhancements (see page 150). This parameter is an octet string containing one or more feature codes. When the DMS-500 switch decides to default-route a call, it encodes SAP with the value of PRIMARY MODE (11001001) and populates SAP in the IAM.

This feature also provides operational measurement (OM) support for calls originating from FGD trunks, using a 5-minute count report.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Default routing uses standard switch-based data to route and record a call. This process is in contrast to CAIN controlled routing, which uses triggers and SCP queries. The Default Routing 2 feature enhances the routing of calls encountering routine hardware or software errors.

Also see the Default Routing 1 feature (in Rel•15) on page 148 in this chapter.


154

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: CAIN0512 – CAIN OFFHKDEL Trigger CAIN0900 – Automatic Code Gapping

OM Support LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature adds support to the existing CAINOM operational measurement (OM) group to provide 5-minute combined counts for both Info_Collected and Info_Analyzed SCP queries. This new capability enhances two registers of the CAINOM group: !" AINT1TO provides a 5-minute count of the total T1 timeouts for Info_Analyzed and

Info_Collected queries. This measurement does not include queries to the ITFDB or LNP database.

!" AINT1ATO provides a 5-minute count of the total T1 abandonment timeouts for Info_Analyzed and Info_Collected queries. This measurement does not include queries to the ITFDB or LNP database.

This feature also adds a new register, IANOLNP, in the CAINMSGS OM group, to support a 5-minute count of Info_Analyzed queries. This measurement does not include Info_Analyzed queries to the ITFDB or LNP database.

This feature uses existing measurements for Info_Collected queries and measurements developed in Rel•14 for Info_Analyzed queries. Therefore, these measurements contain the combined count for both types of SCP queries.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enhances measurements of performance and call activity on the DMS-500 system.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: At least one of the following order codes must be licensed to trigger the query: CAIN0500 – CAIN CUSTDP Trigger CAIN0501 – CAIN SPECDIG Trigger CAIN0511 – CAIN SPECFEAT Trigger CAIN0512 – CAIN OFFHKDEL Trigger

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 CENTREX IP

155

Centrex IP

Available today, Centrex IP enables a network provider to begin the journey into IP services within the familiar environment of the DMS system.

Best of both worlds

Nortel Networks Centrex environment Thousands of enterprises — from small businesses to corporate headquarters — already rely on Nortel Networks Centrex for robust, flexible, customized voice and data communications.

Internet Protocol (IP) environment The growth of IP networking promises a richer multimedia world, delivering next-generation business services over cost-effective, service-rich, high-bandwidth converged networks.

Come together in Centrex IP Centrex IP, from Nortel Networks, brings together the proven features of traditional Centrex business services with new solutions for managed IP networks. Now service providers can cost-effectively gain valuable packet-service deployment experience, benefit from early-entrant momentum, and be better prepared for provisioning and managing full-scale multimedia packet-based offerings, such as Nortel Networks Succession packet telephony solutions.

This next-generation solution brings the industry’s richest Centrex feature set to the packet environment — while it protects your investment in DMS SuperNode architecture. Because it is an evolutionary $ not revolutionary $ approach, Centrex IP is the ideal vehicle for migrating from today’s circuit-switched narrowband network into the future of next-generation services without disrupting day-to-day operations, or sacrificing the productivity features that businesses of all types have come to rely on.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Unique advantages 156

Building blocks 158

Software ordering 161

Future services 162

CENTREX IP NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

156

Unique advantages

The many strengths of the Centrex IP offering enables a graceful evolution from traditional Centrex to packetized business services: !" Cost efficiencies. Centrex IP is cost-effective because this solution protects your investment

in existing equipment and protects local practices. As examples, network providers provision Centrex IP subscribers from the DMS service order (SERVORD) system in the same manner they provision ISDN BRI subscribers. Centrex customer groups are established through SERVORD in the same way central office professionals have created them in the past. Because it is integrated into the DMS system, Centrex IP can also provide secure access to billing and accounting features, system management, and many other administrative services.

Gatewaycard

Line andTrunk

Controllerfor ISDN(LTCI)

The card that serves as a gateway between the DMS system and a packet

environment resides in an LTCI

!" Revenue potential. Centrex IP is designed for today’s global, highly collaborative

approach to business. By connecting to a corporate-managed IP network from anywhere — home, the branch office, an airport, or hotel — road warriors and telecommuters can have the same extension, voice mail, corporate dialing plan, and productivity services they have in the office. Centrex IP builds on the strong foundation of business services that users feel comfortable with and rely on in managing their business. Centrex IP supports a wide range of features, divided into the following service classes: #"Convenience features. Includes Speed Calling, Automatic Dialing, and Four-Digit

Corporate Dial Plan. #"Call-handling features. Includes Call Transfer, Call Hold, Call Park/Call Pickup, Call

Waiting/Additional Call Offering, and Three-Way/Six-Way/Thirty-Way Conference Calling.

#"Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) features. Includes Calling Number Display, Calling Name Display, Automatic Call Back, and Last Number Redial.

#"Call-coverage features. Includes Call Forwarding (Universal, IntraGroup, Busy, and Don’t Answer), Hunt Group, and Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers (MADN).

#"Voice mail systems. Centrex IP enables reliable voice messaging services and flexible use of recorded announcements. It also includes the Message Waiting Indication service.

#"System-level services. Include Centrex Group, Automatic Route Selection, Network Class of Service, 800/Credit Card calls, Local Number Portability, Billing, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) records, and Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI).


157

All of these services can be delivered to a business’ existing or new IP network. This solution serves new Centrex customers and customers who want to replace or supplement their traditional time division multiplex (TDM) Centrex service package. For customers with traditional Centrex, new Centrex IP users can co-exist in the same Centrex group with TDM users.

One customer group for both TDM Centrex and Centrex IP

Centrex IP enables service providers to begin deployment of next-generation services such as unified messaging, instant messaging, Internet-based “push” applications, and hot-desking. !" Scalable strategy. Providing a foundation for future growth, this flexible solution can ex-

pand to serve as many as 50,000 users. Network providers can integrate Centrex IP lines into Centrex customer groups as the business dictates — on a line-by-line basis or by entire group.

!" Carrier-class operation. Centrex IP provides consistently high voice quality when running on a managed IP network. A managed IP network provides quality of service (QoS) through engineered application of network parameters, including: #" Service availability #"Latency (the delay in transmitting and receiving packets) #" Jitter (the delay variation between packets) #"Throughput (the rate of packet transmission) #"Packet loss rate (the maximum rate at which packets can be discarded under congested

conditions)

QoS in a managed IP network goes far beyond the best-effort traffic flow of today’s Internet and unmanaged private IP networks. With voice becoming a key packet-based service and multimedia and other bandwidth-hungry services looming on the horizon, a managed IP network provides the QoS to make Centrex IP and other packet-networking solutions possible.


158

!" Industry-standard design. To streamline the migration to data-optimized networking, Centrex IP builds on industry standards set by global standards bodies. For example, incorporated International Telecommunications Union (ITU) specifications for Internet telephony include: #"H.323 IP telephony parameters #"H.225 call setup and signaling specifications #"H.245 Fast Connect parameters

!" To enhance throughput over narrowband facilities, Centrex IP incorporates several industry-standard codec (coder/decoder) protocols, including: #"G.711 — 64 Kbps standard #"G.723.1 — 6.3 Kbps standard #"G.729A — 8 Kbps standard

Building blocks

Centrex IP follows the H.323 network model, with gateways, gatekeepers, and client devices populating the network.

The Centrex IP architecture follows the H.323 network model

Centrex IP Gateway Fully integrated into the DMS SuperNode architecture, the gateway circuit pack resides in any trunk slot in a Line and Trunk Controller for ISDN (LTCI) that has the NT6X0240 backplane. This protocol converter bridges the TDM-based public network with a managed IP network, translating IP traffic into traditional TDM traffic for access to the public network as well as passing the signaling to access the rich features of the DMS system.


159

A gateway card packetizes calls with high-performance digital signal processing (DSP) codecs. Each LTCI can host up to ten gateway cards (two are recommended as hot spares). Each gateway module can support between 1 and 512 subscribers. The actual number depends on the provider’s traffic engineering preferences. Standard Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseT interfaces multiplex the packetized calls for transport to a managed IP network.

Servers

Various software servers, running under the Microsoft Windows NT operating system, provide essential network-level capabilities. Nortel Networks bundles the Compaq Proliant CL1850 dual-processor platform to host the following applications:

Centrex IP Gatekeeper The Centrex IP Gatekeeper provides critical network-level services, such as addressing (converting telephone numbers to IP addresses and visa versa), security, and user authentication. In addition, this application coordinates voice services with the DMS SuperNode system and standards-based multimedia signaling with the IP network.

Terminal Proxy Server Nortel Networks i2004 Internet Telephones serve as Centrex IP clients (see Client device: Nortel Networks i2004 Internet Telephone, next page). These new business sets communicate with the DMS SuperNode gateway and the Centrex IP gatekeeper through a Terminal Proxy Server (TPS) application running on the gatekeeper platform. The TPS accesses feature content through the gateway and communicates with the i2004 Internet Telephone, and other Centrex IP edge devices, providing cost-effective, next-generation voice services.

This proxy server application supplies much of the intelligence for these end-user IP devices, using the publicly available Unified Network Stimulus (UNISTIM) protocol from Nortel Net- works to manage communications and deliver cost-effective, next-generation voice services.

Packet Telephony Manager The Packet Telephony Manager (PTM) application enables remote management of the gatekeeper, gateway, and terminal proxy server through a Web browser. This packet network management system complements existing DMS system network management tools to provide an end-to-end view of customer voice service. The network provider can monitor Centrex IP gateways from the DMS system Maintenance and Administration Position (MAP) for a TDM view and the PTM for a packet view. This Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)-compliant management solution provides access to fault, configuration, accounting, performance, and security (FCAPS) domains.

Other servers !" Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server supports IP address administration !" Load server provides a single database for storing the latest releases of the CIPL0001

components


160

Client device: Nortel Networks i2004 Internet Telephone

The i2004 Internet Telephone — just plug it in to start using Centrex services

This new IP-based business set provides many next-generation handset capabilities, including: !" Carrier-grade voice quality !" Multiple voice codecs for narrowband transmission !" Headset and hands-free speakerphone capability !" Large, multi-field LCD display screen, with calling name and number support !" Context-sensitive soft keys for feature flexibility !" Six special-purpose keys for access to new services !" Support for six lines, multiple appearance directory numbers (MADN), and message

waiting/additional call offering

Although traditional Centrex terminals do not connect directly to the Centrex IP system, these existing investments can continue to operate off the DMS system and interwork

with i2004 Internet Telephones (including inclusion in the same Centrex group).

An optional Internet Telephone Switch Module accessory docks in the stand of the i2004 Inter- net Telephone. This fully functional, unmanaged, 10BaseT/100BaseTX Layer 2 data switch splits the LAN drop into separate feeds for the phone and a desktop PC. The module features a hardware-based, fixed-priority scheme that prevents PC traffic from denying voice access. The flexible Internet Telephone Switch Module can be powered either by: !" A supplied 48-volt DC power supply that plugs into a standard utility AC outlet !" LAN power, if a Nortel Networks Inline Power Panel presents power to the LAN


161

Software ordering

Server software The software needed for off-board server applications ships on a CD-ROM with order code CIPL0001, Centrex IP server software. To speed installation, Nortel Networks ships the bundled Compaq Proliant CL1850 Windows NT platform with the following pre-installed: !" Gatekeeper !" Terminal Proxy Server !" Packet Telephony Manager !" DHCP server !" Load server

A right-to-use client license order code, TPS00001, groups IP edge devices to streamline the addition of new future standards. In most cases, an upgrade can be made to the TPS without having to reconfigure or reboot end-user clients.

DMS System PCLs

Order code CIP00001, Centrex Voice over IP, became a part of LEC, LET, and LTT PCL software loads beginning with Rel•12. This optional software can be licensed and activated in the same manner as other DMS system order code options.

Other order codes that need to be licensed in the DMS system for full Centrex IP functionality are: !" ISP700001 ISUP Base !" NI000007 ISDN Base !" NI000008 NI-1 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) !" NI000050 National ISDN-2/3 BRI Services Phase I !" NI000051 National ISDN-2/3 BRI Services Phase II !" NI000052 National ISDN-2 BRI Functionality !" MDC00001 MDC Minimum !" MDC00003 MDC Standard !" MDC00007 Meridian Business Set (MBS) Minimum !" MDC00008 MBS Standard !" MDC00009 MDC Pro


162

Future services

Centrex IP enables service providers to begin the journey into IP services today, within the familiar environment of the DMS system. Service providers can gain vital practical experience and be better prepared for provisioning and management of new multimedia service offerings in a full-scale packet offering, such as with Nortel Networks Succession packet telephony solutions.

Within the Succession portfolio, Centrex IP services will be available, with enhanced capabilities. Using line gateways, such as Nortel Networks Universal Edge 9000 Media Gateways, Centrex IP can offer service providers more robustness, more reliability, and more line features. Some of the enhanced Centrex IP services currently being planned include automatic call distribution (ACD) services for call centers, provisionable codec selection by customer group, scalability to more than 100,000 subscribers per Communications Server, and a host of new subscriber station features.

Additionally, new applications are currently under consideration, including: !" Unified messaging to access voice messages, email, and fax messages through one graphical

user interface !" Streaming customized information, such as stock prices, weather, and traffic !" Instant messaging within a customer group to transmit text from desktop to Centrex IP client

simultaneous with (yet independent of) voice transmission !" Broadcast “push” announcements to selected Centrex IP clients from the service provider,

content provider, or from within the enterprise itself

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 NORTEL NETWORKS CENTREX

163

Nortel Networks Centrex

The original “outsourced” service, Nortel Networks Centrex delivers fully featured telephony to customer sites. The essence of Centrex is flexible, cost-efficient communications and productivity for the workplace. Centrex voice and data services are very cost-effective, because service provider facilities house services, local access, and long-distance trunking. This means that an enterprise doesn’t need to invest in other networking equipment.

The Nortel Networks DMS system serves close to 70% of the 18 million Centrex lines installed in North America today. Field-proven DMS switches are at the core of the North American public switched telephone network. Nortel Networks Centrex is the benchmark, offering a comprehensive portfolio of business services solutions.

And with plans to port Centrex to Succession packet telephony solutions, Nortel Networks Centrex will continue to be an integral part of our industry-leading solutions that are building the high-performance Internet.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Design a system. Solve a problem. 164

The Nortel Networks Centrex portfolio 165

Why offer Centrex services? 165

The power of Centrex 166

New Nortel Networks Centrex features 167

NORTEL NETWORKS CENTREX NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

164

Design a system. Solve a problem.

Service providers face unique challenges. Fierce competition over last- and second-mile access to customers has driven margins down and churn up. Everyday telecommunications services, such as Internet access and long distance, are fast becoming commodities. Nortel Networks Centrex provides new ways for service providers to differentiate their portfolios and increase margins. Equipped with value-added Centrex opportunities, the network provider can: !" Design the optimum arrangement to handle incoming calls. For example, with Calling

Name/Number Display, the end user can see who is calling to greet special or frequent callers accordingly.

!" Establish an abbreviated dialing plan to link remote users and locations for convenient intra-company communications.

!" Support heavy call volumes, as may be encountered for sales and service, by installing a Centrex call distribution system, such as automatic call distribution (ACD), uniform call distribution (UCD), or hunt groups.

!" Equip users with telephones that fit individual needs. Nortel Networks offers a portfolio of phones with different levels of feature sophistication, including the M series of analog terminals and the new, IP-enabled i2004 Internet Telephone (see page 160). Because our analog and IP sets interwork within the same customer group, network providers can provide the right mix of services for all types of businesses.

!" Provide security, fraud prevention, and toll control by controlling access to outbound call paths and auditing reports of call usage and expenses.

!" Eliminate system downtime caused by equipment trouble or power outages.

Nortel Networks Centrex grants organizations maximum service flexibility. Hundreds of features and services enable tailored, scalable communications that fit diverse end-user needs. Today, Nortel Networks Centrex services deliver a wide range of solutions — convenience features, call handling features, Custom Local Area Signaling Services, system-level capabilities (billing, call detail records, Advanced Intelligent Networking), call-coverage features, and voicemail systems — to providers around the globe. !" Powerful communications. Centrex workgroup features can help bring businesses and their

customers closer together. Call centers become powerful tools that build stronger, more profitable relationships and dramatically strengthen customer loyalty — the hallmarks of long-term success.

!" Customized applications. Choose the services you want, when you want them. Flexible and scalable — from a few lines to hundreds — Centrex is the ideal business solution for small offices or large, multi-location enterprises.

!" Maximum service flexibility. Network remote offices, set up call centers, establish security and cost-control measures, integrate voice and data communications, design optimized call-handling arrangements for different work groups, and much more.


165

!" Reliable operations. Nortel Networks Centrex is based on the rugged and field-proven DMS switching platform — which delivers 99.999% reliability performance.

!" Future-proof platform. Centrex can be continually evolved at the central office to keep pace with new technology solutions.

The Nortel Networks Centrex portfolio

Centrex is at the core of the Nortel Networks portfolio of switched telephony services, with products, services, and applications that exploit network resources in almost limitless ways. !" Call Centers are a high-value addition to Centrex services. Interactive voice response, agent

queuing, management reports, and computer-telephony integration improve relationships with call-center customers. (See the Centrex Internet-enabled Call Center solutions chapter, starting on page 180.)

!" Wireless Centrex adds mobility and convenience for effective communications any time, anywhere. (See page 228)

!" Centrex IP enables enterprise customers to save money by consolidating data and voice facilities. Centrex IP enables remote workers and satellite offices to be served from one DMS central office while working seamlessly with existing (TDM-based) Centrex. (See the Centrex IP chapter, starting on page 155.)

!" IP and analog Centrex terminals offer the right mix of services at the desktop with the M series of analog terminals and the new IP-enabled i2004 Internet Telephone (see page 160).

Why offer Centrex services?

!" Create new, sustainable revenue sources. Nortel Networks Centrex enables providers to offer the services subscribers are demanding, such as voice mail, unified messaging, call centers, and Centrex IP. Also helping the service provider achieve long-term success are new service applications (like Internet telephony), creative pricing, and bundling of service packages. Nortel Networks Centrex sets the benchmark, offering a comprehensive portfolio of telephony and business services solutions, with marketing and operational support services that help ensure easy market entry and business success.

!" Build customer relationships. Nortel Networks Centrex can help service providers build customer loyalty through on-going customer relationships (versus one-time CPE equipment sales). With Centrex, the service provider is the first place customers go to for new capabilities, enabling better return on critical business relationships.

!" Transition, smoothly, to next-generation solutions. Through our Succession packet telephony solutions and Centrex IP, our Centrex portfolio offers service providers a smooth migration to IP and multimedia network services delivery by leveraging their current DMS Centrex investments. Nortel Networks provides real-world solutions not available elsewhere.


166

The power of Centrex

Beginning in the opening months of 2001, rolling electrical blackouts spread darkness at noon across some of the most complex high-tech factories and businesses in California. As state governments and utility companies work on a long-term solution to the energy crisis, millions of North American business people have asked, “Can it happen to us?” Nortel Network’s Centrex can help enterprises of all types meet this challenge.

You can’t unplug Centrex During a blackout, Centrex customers continue to have service. Unlike PBXs, Key Systems, and other on-site business-communication solutions, end-user terminals powered by central offices continue to operate in the absence of utility power, thanks to extensive backup systems, including battery backup and generators.

Most multi-line feature telephones need local power to work. Fortunately for Centrex customers, Meridian Business Sets continue to operate during a blackout. These high-performance terminals use line power for ring and dial tone to help keep the business in business — even without local power.

To match this level of reliability, a PBX or Key System owner must install a battery backup product. The cost of providing a 12-hour battery backup for a 200-station PBX can be as much as $5000, plus on-going maintenance costs. Centrex keeps enterprises out of the power business. Instead, they can concentrate on their core business, knowing that Nortel Networks Centrex is engineered for the same five-nines reliability levels associated with emergency (911) services.


167

New Nortel Networks Centrex features

The following Nortel Networks Centrex-related features are planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

DUAL-LINE CALL MANAGEMENT RES00087 Enables two lines to interwork, offering increased flexibility for two-line premises.

Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature extends the Dual Line Call Management (DLCM) functionality to the Nortel Networks Centrex environment. Previously available only on Residential Enhanced Services (RES) lines, DLCM enables two lines to interact for more flexible call management. DLCM supports simultaneous ring, answer, call hold, and pickup capabilities from either the subscriber line or an “associate” line. When a call comes in to a DLCM-enabled line, both lines ring; the associate line receives distinctive ringing. An associate line can pick up a call on a subscribed line by going off-hook (a call can be held and retrieved from either DLCM line). Technical reference: 59022058

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement extends DLCM to Integrated Business Network (IBN), V5.2 IBN, and analog Centrex (Meridian Business Set / P-Phone) lines, and makes the feature available to the international market. DLCM is especially useful in the work-at-home environment where end users have a business line that’s separate from their residential line. With DLCM, they get the benefit of two interworking lines without special wiring or an expensive two-line phone. With this feature available across a wider set of line classes, its usefulness as a business feature increases — particularly important as telecommuting and home offices become more popular.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: RES00002 Advanced Custom Calling

SIMULTANEOUS RING/3-WAY COMPATIBILITY MDC00071 Enables a transferred or 3-way call to ring all members of a Simultaneous Ring group.

Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables a transferred or three-way call to the pilot directory number (DN) to ring all the members of a Simultaneous Ring (SimRing) group. SimRing enables a call to a single pilot DN to ring up to five DNs in multiple locations at the same time; the first phone to go off-hook answers the call. Without this feature, three-way calls or calls transferred to the SimRing’s pilot DN will only ring that DN and not the other members of the SimRing group.


168


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enables the SimRing feature to work more effectively in a Centrex environment, where three-way calls and transferred calls are common. By enabling these types of calls to interwork with SimRing, this feature expands calling options and helps increase subscriber satisfaction.

MDC PRO MDC00009 Provides a large number of sophisticated features to complete a Centrex portfolio.

Series Completing Hunt Groups LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement to MDC00009 provides an OM (operational measurement) group for Series Completing Hunt Groups. With these new OMs, an overflow is counted whenever: !" The DMS system exhausts its Series Completion (SCMP) list, either through circular or

linear hunting. !" The DMS system forwards a call from an SCMP line as an overflow.

Series Completion (SCMP) is a datafilled line option that automatically redirects a call from a busy directory number (DN) to another specified DN served by the same DMS system. SCMP is very similar in function to Call Forward Busy (CFB) and hunt group options, but offers the following advantages over those options: !"SCMP enables almost any hunting algorithm to be implemented — hunt groups

allow just sequential and circular hunting. !"SCMP enables a call to redirect up to 100 times, while CFB only allows a call to be

forwarded five times. !"SCMP does not attempt to redirect a call more than once to the same line. There-

fore, a circular SCMP list will not result in an infinite loop. !"Both SCMP and Call Forward can be assigned to a line; SCMP takes precedence.

Call Forward will act as an overflow if all SCMP lines have been searched.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

These new operational measurements enhance the Series Completion function, enabling more precise measurement of call-handling resources.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: MDC00003 MDC Standard

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 RESIDENTIAL ENHANCED SERVICES (RES)

169

Residential Enhanced Services (RES)

The definition of “residential phone service” is changing. More people than ever are telecommuting, bringing work home, taking work on the road, and staying in constant touch with their families and colleagues $ while screening out unwanted interruptions. The demand for more sophisticated phone services to manage hectic lives is greater than ever.

This demand is providing many opportunities for carriers in today’s residential market. Market revenues are climbing, especially for the most popular services: Caller ID has more than 39% market penetration in the U.S., Call Waiting is at 47%, and voice mail is at 17%. More than 28% of U.S. households have two or more telephone lines; 30% of those households use that second line to access online services.

To help carriers take advantage of these opportunities, we’re offering a variety of marketing programs that help generate revenue for carriers while introducing the marketplace to new and useful solutions for busy people. These marketing plans include bundled services, pay-per-use services like Automatic Call Back or Three-Way Calling, and try-before-you-buy promotions.

Nortel Networks provides the services that subscribers need today and the ones they will want in the future. From caller ID and voice mail to IP-based multimedia services that will be available through Succession-enabled solutions (see the Succession packet telephony solutions chapter, starting on page 39), we have the industry’s most extensive and innovative service portfolio. As competition intensifies, our Residential Enhanced Services (RES) solutions offer the power and flexibility to respond quickly and cost-effectively to changing market opportunities.

In this chapter

Section Starting page New feature opportunities 170

New RES features at a glance 172

New Residential Enhanced Services features 173

RESIDENTIAL ENHANCED SERVICES (RES) NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

170

New feature opportunities

Our RES portfolio has a variety of calling options that carriers can package and market to increase revenues and subscriber satisfaction.

Pay-per-use services

By offering popular services on a non-subscription basis, carriers can introduce new features to the marketplace and help drive service penetration and acceptance. !" Universal Access to CLASS (RES00011) enables residential lines to access non-display

CLASS services — including Automatic Callback, Automatic Recall, Calling Number Delivery Blocking, Calling Name Delivery Blocking, Customer Originated Trace, Screen List Editing, and Anonymous Call Rejection — without a subscription.

!" Usage-sensitive access to the popular Three-Way Calling (RES00012) and Call Forward (RES00060) features can drive subscriber use of these revenue services.

!" Enhanced Busy Call Return (EBCR; RES00076) prompts callers to activate the Automatic Call Back (ACB; RES00005) feature. Market trials show that ECBR can increase by as much as four times the pay-per-use of ACB.

!" Access to Messaging (RES00077) prompts a caller to leave a message when a line is busy or when the called party does not answer. The voice mail system then attempts to deliver the message to the called party at pre-defined intervals.

Voice mail services We’ve enhanced the appeal of voice mail by adding features that make voice mail “feel” more like the traditional answering machine model that end users know and trust. !" Subscriber Programmable Ringing (RES00037) enables the subscriber to program the

number of rings before an incoming call is forwarded to voice mail or another directory number.

!" Call Screen, Monitor and Intercept (CMSI; RES00047/RES00053), available as a subscription feature or pay-per-use, lets a voice mail system provide an answering-machine service. End users can screen a call being left on voice mail just as they can screen a call to an answering machine, and answer the call if they choose.

!" Remote Message Indication (RES00070) enables a subscriber to check for voice mail remotely by listening to the number of rings $ for example, the line rings two times if there are new messages and three times if there are no messages $ thereby avoiding toll charges when calling in to a voice mail system from the road.

!" Voice Mail Easy Access (RES00090) enables residential users to access their voice mail with a simple access code.


171

Calling Line ID services These features not only tell users who’s calling, but with an Analog Services Display Interface (ADSI) compliant phone, end users can choose how they’ll handle the call. !" Calling Name Display (RES00023) delivers a name along with the calling number. Market

studies show that Calling Name delivery increases the acceptance and appeal of Caller ID. !" Spontaneous Call Waiting ID (SCWID; RES00025) presents the subscriber with a visual

name, number display, or both, of a call-waiting call (on compatible terminals) to give the end user more information on exactly who is calling.

!" Deluxe Spontaneous Call Waiting ID (DSCWID; RES00040) gives the end user six options to deal with an incoming call-waiting call: #"Answer the call #"Put the caller on hold #"Forward the call to voice mail #"Provide a “busy” message #"Conference the call in with the current call #"Drop the call

Switch-based enhanced CLASS services These services provide truly sophisticated call management for small offices, home offices, and busy families. !" Dual Line Call Management (RES00087) enables two residential lines to interact for more

flexible call management $ especially useful in the work-at-home environment where end users have a business line that is separate from their residential line. Distinctive ringing differentiates primary line calls from associated line calls. Answer any call from any phone, place it on hold, and retrieve it from any other phone. With Rel•15, this capability expands to Nortel Networks Centrex lines: see page 167 in the Nortel Networks Centrex chapter for details.

!" Simultaneous Ringing (SimRing; RES00081) offers an anytime, anyplace “find me” service for subscribers who are on the move. With SimRing, a call to a single DN can ring up to five DNs in multiple locations at the same time; the first phone to go off-hook answers the call. The subscriber can activate or deactivate the service, hear a list of SimRing members, and add or delete numbers from the SimRing list.

!" Call Waiting Conference (RES00092) joins two of the most popular features in North America: Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling. With this feature, a Call Waiting subscriber can conference a waiting call into an existing conversation.

!" Call Redirect (RES00099), available as a subscription or pay-per-use service, helps end users handle unwanted calls. With this feature, when a subscriber receives a telemarketing call, the subscriber has the option to dial an access code that routes the call to a pre-recorded message, asking the telemarketer to add the subscriber to the “do not call” list.


172

Off-board enhanced CLASS services These node-based services with advanced custom calling features are designed for delivery from a single switching office. !" Talking Call Waiting (TCW; RES00091) enhances traditional Call Waiting services by

announcing the name of the new calling party after the Call Waiting tone. After hearing the name (or generic announcement if the caller’s name is not available), the subscriber can answer the new call or continue speaking with the currently called party. This subscription-based feature offers an attractive overlay service to Call Waiting. Providing the identity of the calling party enables the TCW subscriber to decide whether or not to answer new calls, offering new convenience and time savings.

!" Automatic Recall with Name (RES00089), available as pay-per-use or subscription, helps enhance the Automatic Recall feature by announcing a name in addition to the number, date, and time of the last call. After pressing the feature code (usually *69), the user hears the party’s name, number, and date/time of the call. The user can then either hang up or press “1” to call that party.

!" Who’s Calling (WC) enables subscribers to block anonymous callers and screen telemarketers. This feature transfers unidentified Caller ID calls to an announcement platform where the caller is asked to record an identifying name. After listening to an announcement that contains the recorded name, the subscriber has the option to accept the call, send the call to voice mail, or request a “reject” message be played to unwanted calls.

New RES features at a glance

New DMS system RES solutions include: !" Dual-Line Call Management (RES00087) is now available for Centrex IBN lines, increasing

the flexibility of this useful feature. Refer to page 167 in the Nortel Networks Centrex chapter for discussion of this enhancement.

!" Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number (RES00085) enables a SimRing pilot DN to be a Virtual DN (VDN) that is not associated with a physical line card.

!" Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhancement (RES00097) allows Talking Call Waiting to work with Spontaneous Call Waiting Identification (SCWID) and Deluxe Spon- taneous Call Waiting Identification (DSCWID) terminals.

!" Call Redirect (RES00099), a Rel•13 feature, now delivers Residential Call Transfer in addition to the Sales Blocker function that was delivered in the first implementation of the feature. Residential Call Transfer lets residential subscribers transfer answered calls to voice mail. In place of taking a message that can be misplaced or written incorrectly, the user can transfer the caller to the intended party’s mailbox, helping to ensure that the right message gets to the right person. All the subscriber needs to do is flash the switchhook, then press a feature access code.


173

New Residential Enhanced Services features


Dual-Line Call Management (DLCM) now available for Centrex Introduced in Rel•10 for RES lines, the DLCM feature enables two separate lines

to function together, with simultaneous ringing, answer, call hold, and pickup capabilities from either line. With Rel•15, this capability expands to include

Centrex (IBN) lines with order code RES00087. Refer to page 167 in the Nortel Networks Centrex chapter for more information.

SIMULTANEOUS RING VIRTUAL DIRECTORY NUMBER RES00085 Enables a virtual DN to be the pilot DN of a Simultaneous Ring group.

Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

The Simultaneous Ring (SimRing) feature enables a call to a single directory number (DN) to ring up to five other DNs in multiple locations at the same time; the first phone to go off-hook answers the call. SimRing requires that one of these phones be designated as a pilot DN (PDN).

The new SimRing virtual directory number (VDN) feature enables a DN that has no physical appearance on the DMS system and is not associated with a physical line card to serve as the SimRing PDN.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

SimRing offers an anytime, anyplace “find me” service for today’s busy subscribers. Now that RES00085 enables SimRing to be assigned to a virtual DN, this order code eliminates the expense of provisioning and maintaining a physical line circuit solely for the purpose of providing SimRing service.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: RES00002 Advanced Custom Calling RES00081 Simultaneous Ring


174

TALKING CALL WAITING SCWID/DSCWID ENHANCEMENT RES00097 Enables audible name delivery to SCWID/DSCWID customer premise equipment.

Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhancement LEC00017, LET00017, LLT00017

KEY CAPABILITIES

Talking Call Waiting (TCW) leverages the proven success of Call Waiting and enhances it by providing the name of the call-waiting party. When a waiting call comes in to a TCW subscriber’s line, an offboard service node platform translates the name of the caller to an audible announcement via text-to-speech technology.

Order code RES00097 enables Talking Call Waiting to work with Spontaneous Call Waiting Identification (SCWID) and Deluxe Spontaneous Call Waiting Identification (DSCWID) terminals.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Call Waiting is one of the most popular services in North America, and Talking Call Waiting provides an attractive overlay service that conveniently lets a subscriber know who’s on the other end of the call-waiting tone. The Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhance- ment makes this service available to SCWID/DSCWID customer premise equipment, increasing its usefulness and appeal.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: RES00091 Talking Call Waiting

Hardware: The Talking Call Waiting software works in conjunction with an offboard service node platform, using text-to-speech technology to translate the name of the calling party from the Name database into an audible name announcement played back to the TCW subscriber

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 EMERGENCY NUMBER SERVICES (E911)

175

Emergency Number Services (E911)

With the Nortel Networks DMS Tandem-based E911 Emergency Number Service (ENS), a caller needing urgent help can quickly reach the emergency service best able to respond. E911 selectively routes and transfers an emergency call to the appropriate Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) agency serving the location of the calling party — regardless of geographic location or telephone-service provider boundaries.

The benefits that make Enhanced 911 (E911) different from Basic 911 service include: !" The ability to selectively route an E911 call so that it automatically reaches the emergency

service located closest to the caller. !" Delivery of caller-related data, such as address and other geographic information.

Emergency calls can be processed quickly because all required information is available as soon as a calltaker answers. With E911 service, emergency assistance is available immediately — even if the connection is broken, help can still be sent.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Benefits of DMS E911 176

Unique in the marketplace 176

New optional E911 features 177

EMERGENCY NUMBER SERVICES (E911) NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

176

Benefits of DMS E911

There are a number of benefits the service provider can offer the serving area. !" The caller automatically routes to the answering point best able to respond !" Emergency response time is significantly reduced by correct first-time routing !" Answering agent receives accurate caller/location information !" Built-in multiple routing options help ensure emergency calls are answered

The benefits a service provider can offer with a central office-based Integrated Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) include: !" Only limited capital investment needed — traditional PSAP customer premises-based

switching equipment is not required !" Central-office based system delivers a high level of reliability !" No hidden costs, such as maintenance, power, and battery back-up !" Optional Management Information System (MIS) capability enables trends and performance

to be analyzed !" An integrated DMS Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) solution is available !" Evolution path to Centrex IP-based PSAPs available

Unique in the marketplace

By meeting American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards and Telcordia generic requirements, Nortel Networks E911 tandems can provide: !" E911 Inter-tandem routing in a multivendor environment. Capabilities include initial routing

of calls, selective transfer of calls, and fixed transfer of calls. !" A Selective Routing Database that resides within the switch — not as an adjunct processor —

and requires less space for the same amount of data. The advantages include lower cost, higher reliability, and faster operation. Note: if a network provider opts to use an external industry-standard Service Control Point (SCP) database, this capability is available with the ENS00011 E911 Routing via AIN order code.

!" Centrex Line and ACD PSAP provide the same functionality as customer premises equipment solutions but with lower costs and higher reliability. This solution benefits from interworking with the DMS Centrex Automatic Call Distribution system.

!" Proper routing of Wireless 911 calls to meet FCC Phase I requirements and the ability to provide Phase II services (with all other necessary network components in place).


177

New optional E911 features

The following Emergency Number Services (ENS) features are planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

ENHANCED 911 BASE ENS00005 Provides the base E911 service features for an E911 Tandem office.

Geodetic Location Parameter LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional feature enables the geodetic location of a wireless E911 call over the SS7 network to be received at the PSAP’s host DMS system. The wireless carrier routes the E911 call over an ISUP Intertoll E911 trunk to the DMS E911 Tandem, sending the 10-digit Automatic Number Identification (ANI) of the mobile directory number (MDN). The caller’s geodetic latitude and longitude (X/Y coordinates) can be sent out-of-band or in the ISUP IAM Calling Geodetic Location Parameter (CGLP).

This feature enables the DMS system to receive the CGLP and display the information in the Remote Call Event Record (RCER) and E911212 log.


A DMS E911 Tandem can now receive data about a wireless caller’s location — the first step towards better E911 service for wireless callers

EMERGENCY NUMBER SERVICES (E911) NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

178

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature is a step towards enabling E911 operators to determine the exact position of a wireless E911 caller, thereby providing faster and more accurate emergency service. Routing and delivering this information to a PSAP will be addressed in a later release.

This feature is the first step in compliance with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Order for Wireless E911, Phase 2.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ENS00012 E911 Wireless, Phase I

Hardware: • NT1X89BB Multi-Protocol Controller (MPC) card • Input/Output Controller (IOC) or equivalent connection on Input/Output Module (IOM) shelf, if Remote Call Event Record (RCER) is needed

OFF-BOARD SELECTIVE ROUTING ENS00017 Supports proprietary links to an external ALI/Selective Routing database server as an alternative to deploying the internal DMS Selective Routing Database (SRDB).

Off-Board Selective Routing Interface LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This order code supports proprietary links to an ALISA-type database for network providers that choose to deploy this external Automatic Location Information (ALI)/SRDB platform as an alternative to the DMS SRDB offering.


Selective routing can occur in an off-board processor to simplify networks


179

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Previous to ENS00017, the off-board server could operate as a combined ALI/SRDB platform only on E911 Tandem switches manufactured by the same vendor as the server. Now, this order code supports dedicated links from the DMS E911 Tandem to the external server so the network provider can: !" Enhance investments by having the same off-board platform serve more tandems. !" Terminate wireline and wireless emergency calls uniformly. !" Simplify the multivendor network by having PSAP-directed features offered by the

proprietary server also extend to calls reaching the DMS E911 Tandem.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ENS00005 Enhanced 911 Base

CENTREX INTERNET-ENABLED CALL CENTER SOLUTIONS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

180

Centrex Internet-enabled Call Center solutions

E-business is changing the world — and, as a result, the traditional call center is changing as well. As North America and the rest of the world rapidly shift to the digital storefront, it is the customer’s new service expectations that will have the greatest consequences on the call center. No longer confined to processing traditional telephone calls, call centers are evolving into customer contact centers, with new emphasis on access and connectivity. The successful enterprise will be the one that understands the call center’s impact on establishing and building long-term relationships with customers, develops the best understanding of the underlying changes, and acts on them.

The Nortel Networks Centrex Internet-Enabled Call Center portfolio can equip any kind of business with the tools for next-generation customer contact centers. These solutions can help improve customer service value — while helping to reduce costs in attracting, securing, and retaining customers.

In this chapter

Section Starting page The portfolio at a glance 181

Currently in development 181

More about Centrex Call Centers 182

More about Intelligent Call Management (ICM) 186

More about Centrex Computer-Telephone Integration (CTI)

188

More about Symposium solutions 190

New optional ICM features 192

New optional Centrex ACD features 196

FPG 2000 CENTREX INTERNET-ENABLED CALL CENTER SOLUTIONS

181

The portfolio at a glance

Nortel Networks Centrex Internet-Enabled Call Center Portfolio offers a comprehensive range of products and features so businesses can benefit from state-of-the-art call center operations in a rapidly changing and increasingly competitive business environment.

Call Control

#"Centrex ACD

#"Skills-based routing

#"SkillSet routing

#"Symposium Call Center Server

#"Time-in-queue; position-in-queue

#"Centrex Network ACD

Enablers

#"Centrex ACD

#"ICM Link

#"TAPI Driver

#"Centrex IP

Administration, Management, Configuration,

& Reporting

#"CCMIS for Centrex ACD and Network ACD

#"Mini MIS

#"Symposium Centrex Call Center Server

Applications

#"Agent screen pops

#"Visual Web integration

#"Web server

#"Skills-based routing

#"Integrated Voice Response

Agent Desktop

#"MBS phones

#"Liberation headsets

#"Wallboards

#"Application screen pops

#"IVR-controlled screen pops

#"Remote agent

#"TAPI Desktop

#"Web agent

Symposium Centrex

Professional Services

#"Business consulting

#"Implementa- tion

#"Support

#"Optimization

#"Education

#"Design and development

Symposium Centrex Partners Program

#"Co-marketing contracts

#"Nortel Networks order process

#"Nortel Networks tested

#"Nortel Networks triaged

#"Target market

Currently in development

Symposium portfolio trials are underway using ICM links. We’re working on a number of enhancements to provide greater value and user productivity, including: !" Meridian Business Set calling directory number display under all CDN (Controlled Directory

Number) call scenarios !" Automatic not ready (NR) on secondary directory number (SDN) !" Optional queue size overflow route !" Called-about name display !" Call hold enhancements


182

More about Centrex Call Centers

Nortel Networks Centrex Call Center solutions provide a comprehensive portfolio of products and features ranging from basic to advanced applications — a solid portfolio aligned with the business needs of call centers of today and tomorrow. !" Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) handles large volumes of incoming calls by

distributing them equitably among a designated group of answering positions. Multiple directory numbers (DNs) are assigned to a group of answering positions rather than to a single line. Centrex ACD presents incoming calls to the agent who has been idle the longest based on the priority of the call and in the order that they were received.

!" Centrex Network ACD (NACD) enables multi-site call centers to be treated as if they were one center. This offering also gives a business added call center advantages with a complete set of features, including system configuration. NACD allows up to 48 groups to be networked into one large group with a maximum of 10,000 agents per switch and 12,000 agents per network. This solution supports work-at-home scenarios throughout the network and makes intelligent decisions about which NACD group will receive a call, helping to manage trunk costs and improving service levels.

!" SkillSet routing uses SuperGroup functionality to help ensure that customers reach the agent with the skills best suited to meet individual needs, whether it is fluency in a foreign language or expertise in a certain product or other specific area. This feature reduces the need to transfer a caller multiple times and provides more personalized service.

!" Load management/configuration control lets a business quickly and easily view and adjust call center parameters, giving them the power to be more proactive in areas such as traffic control, call queue modification, and staff reassignment. The ability to optimize resources and serve customers faster and more effectively supports the bottom line.

!" Skills-based routing defines and controls functions such as the logic for call processing, call treatment, call handling, call presentation, making full use of a scalable, client-server architecture to deliver high performance, cost-effective solutions for organizations of any size. Skills-based routing automates highly detailed and complex call routing schemes, further adding to the ability of the subscribing business to create sustainable, one-to-one relationships with customers.

!" Centrex Computer-Telephony Integration (CTI) transforms the desktop into a highly flexible multimedia communications center. By merging today’s PCs, LANs, and telephone systems, Centrex CTI enables businesses to provide improved customer satisfaction through the delivery of faster, more accurate service from the desktop. Equally important, Centrex CTI applications can help reduce the cost of operating call centers of any size.

!" Interactive Voice Response (IVR) automates routine inquiries and other transactions by enabling the caller to communicate with a host computer through touch-tone key presses or voice recognition. This process gives customers direct, confidential access to information and services 24 hours a day. It can also reduce agent call volume significantly — often resulting in substantial offloading of calls. Also available are time-in-queue and position-in-queue announcements.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 CENTREX INTERNET-ENABLED CALL CENTER SOLUTIONS

183

Key Internet Call Center Enablers !"Intelligent Call Management (ICM): The first Ethernet TCP/IP protocol CTI link into the

DMS family of switches provides an intelligent interface between the customer premise-based call center or knowledge worker environment and the telephony service provider’s switch. Now customer premise-based applications can interwork with the DMS system to provide call routing, screen pops to the agent desktop, and agent desktop CTI.

!"Symposium TAPI Driver: The TAPI (Telephony Application Programming Interface) Driver, a ‘translator’ to TCP/IP, enables third-party developers to write applications for the DMS Call Center environment using the TAPI interface. The Microsoft TAPI interface is a non-proprietary standard incorporated in Microsoft’s operating systems.

!" Intelligent Call Management (ICM) Interface provides Ethernet TCP/IP (Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) connectivity between the DMS system and the host computer at the customer premises. Easy to install and maintain, the cost-effective ICM link offers the bandwidth required to support many sophisticated Centrex CTI applications.

A Centrex Internet-Enabled Call Center built on the ICM and Symposium TAPI driver enablers


184

!" Outdialing automatically places outbound calls during agent lulls. When the dialer finds a live prospect, it links the agent immediately. Skills-based routing helps ensure that the most qualified agent receives the call. The feature makes the best use of an agent’s time and eliminates unnecessary downtime.

!" Predictive dialing helps outbound telemarketers by verifying the availability of agents and the probability of reaching a customer in person to determine the rate to automatically place outbound phone calls. Dialing is automatic, providing increases in efficiency ranging from 70 to 300%.

!" Agent telephones and headsets feature ergonomically designed single-line or multi-line phones for fast, convenient access to the Centrex Call Center capabilities. The latest in display technology is built in, including a tiltable 2-line, 24-character liquid crystal display. Many phones offer headset capability — with headsets designed to be as comfortable as they are efficient.

!" Remote agent capabilities enable agents to work from off-site locations with the same productivity and customer service as those in the main call center. Agents receive calls and information on their screens just as if they were actually sitting in the call center. Remote agents appear on supervisor screens along with other call center agents, providing integrated monitoring and management.

!" Call Center MIS (CCMIS) grows with a business, supporting operations from a small, single location to a 30,000 active agents, in a multi-location network. Businesses can manage their call centers proactively with such features as flexible-interval reporting of historical data and real-time agent and group performance monitoring — on individually customizable screens. With CCMIS, supervisors can see displays for agent status and queue statistics in real time. This solution also provides historical archiving, profile maintenance, and ad hoc and scheduled reporting. Incorporating a comprehensive reporting and management package gives more power to optimize a call center’s performance. Reporting services can enhance the ability to monitor and control a call center environment by providing the choice of a multitude of options, tailoring the system to meet specific needs. All you need to know to deliver the fastest and best customer service is at your fingertips.

CCMIS Release 4.0 offers many new capabilities, including the following. #" Standard features:

– Statistics and reporting for two secondary agent lines – Walkaway code reporting by agent – Locate agent function – Multi-line/multi-color wallboard support – Full Microsoft Windows support in all modes – Time synchronization between CCMIS and the DMS system


185

#"Optional features: – Networking capability (up to 20 CCMIS systems/12 DMS switches per CCMIS) – Partitioning across the network (multiple tenants) – DMS MIS Link redundancy – Variable interval schedule enhancements for reports (0, 5, 10, 15, 30, and 60 minutes)

!" Wallboards keep agents informed by enabling supervisors to communicate visually with agents. This often includes letting agents know, at a glance, how many calls are waiting, how long they’ve been waiting, overall call center productivity, and other customer-critical information. Supervisors are also able to use wallboards to track the status of the call center — even when they are not at their desks. CCMIS now supports a line of 11 wallboards, ranging from single-color/single-line to multi-color/multi-line display. These can be attached directly to a supervisor’s PC or to the CCMIS and daisy-chained for added coverage. In addition, thresholds can be set for various agent and queue statistics to allow an audible alarm, along with the data, to be displayed on the wallboard. CCMIS also has a generic wallboard interface that allows connections to other wallboard systems.

!" Symposium Centrex Professional Services tailor communications solutions to fit a company’s unique priorities with highly specialized expertise. The experienced professionals in the Nortel Networks Professional Services staff know multimedia communications technologies that can address unique business goals. Working with our worldwide network of distributors, our multi-disciplinary team offers one-stop shopping to enterprises of any size, scope, or complexity. Nortel Networks Professional Services include: #"Business consulting #"Application development and systems integration #" Implementation services #" Support services #"Call center optimization #"Customized workshops

!" Symposium Centrex Partners Program enables Nortel Networks to offer a wide variety of new and complementary call center applications by co-marketing third-party solutions from some of the world’s premier multimedia application developers. The Partners Program offers a single point of contact for comprehensive solutions through existing Nortel Networks distributors. This enhances the value of call center investments by providing a broad portfolio of products and services that can help improve the way an organization communicates.


186

More about Intelligent Call Management (ICM)

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) helps end users manage their growing computer-telephony integration (CTI) needs with improved speed and productivity.

ICM enhances the link between the DMS system and the subscriber’s computing equipment using an industry-standard Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) transport. ICM provides cost-effective, flexible configurations using industry-standard Ethernet technology.

Offers a less expensive, open transport

Reduces facilities costs ICM offers the immediate benefit of a less costly link. Now, the data portion of an incoming call can travel over an industry-standard TCP/IP transport. This flexible link may even involve the Internet or a corporate Intranet for all or part of the connection.

Supports third-party solutions Use of an open TCP/IP transport introduces the Internet’s standard transport-level protocol to Centrex Computer-Telephony Integration. Since many applications depend on TCP/IP for reliable, full-duplex operation for connectionless, best packet delivery service, the ICM link enables the use of a wide range of applications immediately available on the market.

Customer PremisesCentral Office

DMSSystem

Link PeripheralProcessor

TCP/IP

Network

Customerfirewall

and router

Host Computer

CustomerLAN

Carrierfirewall

and router

ICM expands Centrex CTI

Expands capabilities at sites that receive DMS system Centrex ACD Off-loads Computing Module/XA-Core The ICM link provides local control of call processing. Instead of the DMS system being responsible for all the call processing (including routing and treatments), ICM permits an on-premises host computer to share in the call handling decisions and capabilities. This provides the dual benefits of enhancing subscriber satisfaction with greatly expanded control of their own operations — while at the same time reducing the real-time load on DMS system processors (in the Computing Module or XA-Core).


187

Offers new functionality ICM enhances existing functionality and offers a number of features, including: !" Enables a subscriber’s processor to selectively manage call queues, including adding or

removing calls from any place in the queue. !" Permits the processor to share in the control of routing announcements and treatments. !" Displays the use of the Emergency Key feature and records statistics on its use. !" Enables the subscriber’s computing equipment to decide where to terminate an incoming call

in a networked ACD configuration. The host computer makes the decision based on application data it receives in a CALLID parameter or from the end user’s responses to an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system. This efficiency enables a number of new routing features, such as re-directing calls based on specific skill sets.

!" Allows each call to be uniquely identified to support interswitch transfers and applications that track call history.

Supports sites that use CTI applications for local call processing The ICM link and ICM TAPI Driver enable any business with a local area network (LAN) to enjoy the productivity gains and cost savings of computer-telephony integration — without the expense of custom development or a private phone system.

Because TAPI-S is an industry standard, call centers have a large pool of TAPI applications and TAPI-application software vendors to select from.


188

More about Centrex Computer-Telephony Integration (CTI)

Centrex CTI integrates the capabilities of PCs, local area networks (LANs), and telephone systems into a powerful and flexible multimedia desktop communications system. Using a variety of network information, including caller identification data and Interactive Voice Response (IVR) input, Centrex CTI applications enable users and agents to access database information about callers and to automate many outbound calling functions.

Centrex Call Center and Centrex knowledge workers can deploy a variety of “off-the-shelf,” industry-standard client-server CTI applications based on Microsoft’s Telephony Applications Programming Interface (TAPI).

Today, many new CTI applications are written by a variety of application developers for TAPI environments. TAPI has become a de facto industry standard for developing CTI applications.

The Nortel Networks Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) service was the first Centrex product to support TAPI CTI applications. The ICM TAPI Driver enables developers to write Centrex CTI applications to Microsoft’s TAPI Release 2.1 for Nortel Networks Centrex users with Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 platforms.

Advantages for Centrex users Using the ICM link, Centrex customers enjoy the productivity and cost-saving advantages of Centrex CTI without having to invest in custom development or an on-premises telephone system. TAPI CTI applications for Centrex customers include personal call logging, point-and-click directory dialing, and automatic call routing based on user-defined criteria, such as time-of-day or automatic number identification (ANI). Using the ICM TAPI Driver, Centrex customers can automate other capabilities such as “fax-back” and unified messaging (voice, fax, email messages all deposited in a single mail box) — with ICM as the switch interface link.

The intelligence of the public network, coupled with customer resources, enhances customer service with lower operating costs


189

Advantages for call centers A growing number of organizations see the benefits of outsourcing their telephony service requirements and moving to the feature-rich environment of Centrex services offered by their local service provider. Many organizations realize the power of Centrex CTI services, using ICM and the ICM TAPI Driver. The ICM TCP/IP link is the CTI messaging connection to the end customer’s computing system.

With Centrex CTI, businesses using call centers, telemarketing organizations, customer service departments, and answering positions can increase productivity and improve customer service through the following capabilities: !" Screen displays of caller information initiated by incoming Caller ID or ANI can save as

much as 45 seconds per call.

“Screen pop” data display

!" Point-and-click dialing enables call-placement from a directory on a PC or host computer,

call answering from a PC screen, and call transfers with a single mouse click. !" Intelligent call routing enhances call center efficiency and customer satisfaction through

faster call handling. !" Predictive dialing increases outbound call center productivity by automatically dialing and

directly connecting the agent only to the person called — not to answering machines, voice mail, or busy signals.

!" Internet callback and Internet agents can provide immediate service to customers ordering from your Web site.

Centrex CTI support widely available Known and established worldwide, our global high-value network services can be readily harnessed to support new revenue-generating and productivity-enhancing CTI applications. Centrex CTI, ICM, and Centrex ACD are commercially available services from public network service providers.


190

More about Symposium solutions

Nortel Networks Symposium product portfolio affirms the Nortel Networks commitment to provide a feature-rich, solid product and service solution-set for the Centrex Call Center and CTI markets. New applications and services include: !" CTI and desktop integration !" Web Server (Symposium Web Response Server) !" Screen pops (Symposium Agent) !" Skills-Based Routing (Symposium Call Center Server) !" Symposium Professional Services

The ICM link introduces new and expanded Call Center and non-Call Center functionality. The following offer new capabilities for screen-based telephony, call handling, messaging, and more are available today through the ICM and Symposium TAPI Driver: !" Symposium WebResponse Server — provides routing, real-time management, and report-

ing of customer-generated messages on the Web. Customers browsing a Web page can use customized pull-down lists and free-form text boxes to send an inquiry. The WebResponse Server stores this message and routes it to the most qualified agent who can process the electronic inquiry quickly and efficiently using the same process as a normal ACD call.

Example of a transaction window


191

!" Symposium Agent — This desktop automation solution brings complete control and the tools the call center needs to deliver superb customer service. Symposium Agent automates data access from multiple databases and places it on custom-designed screen pops that fit an agent’s preferences. In an instant, agents can respond to customer needs and help resolve issues, introduce new products, and build relationships — instead of spending time collecting customer information. The results can be better customer service, improved employee satisfaction, lower call center costs, and increased revenues.

!" Symposium Call Center Server — This client/server-based multimedia application offers advanced and powerful customer-relationship management features for call centers. Running on industry-standard hardware, the Symposium Call Center Server brings new power to customer relationship management by offering advanced skillset routing, call tracking, customizable reports, networking capabilities, multimedia integration, computer telephony integration, and Internet capabilities to handle different types of customer requests. Through the system’s customizable, Windows-based screens, managers can monitor and rapidly respond to changing call center conditions. Call center information can be viewed in real time and merged with other data from corporate databases to generate meaningful reports. Its CTI capabilities intelligently interface with host databases, bringing more relevant information to the agent’s desktop computer and faster handling of calls. Symposium Call Center also incorporates Internet-enabled applications that seamlessly blend Internet contacts with advanced skills-based routing to send calls to the most qualified available agents.


192

New optional ICM features

The following Intelligent Call Management (ICM) features are all planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

INTELLIGENT CALL MANAGEMENT INTERFACE ICM00001 Provides Ethernet TCP/IP connectivity between the DMS system and a subscriber’s host computer.

Increase ICM Sessions LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional feature significantly expands the maximum supported number of simultaneous ICM sessions beyond the current limit of 16. The new ceiling, 96, actually varies depending on how many other services are also using Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) resources at the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP), such as Telnet and File Transport Protocol (FTP) sessions.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The significant increase in simultaneous ICM sessions enables the network provider to offer ICM functionality to a greater number of different customer sites without new platform hardware investments.

Logon Enhancements LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

If the session between a host and the DMS system is interrupted by a DMS system restart, users at the host can receive an erroneous “already logged on” message after new logon attempts. Hard Reset, a new logon option, enables a host to log on to the system after receiving this incorrect message.

Now, if a session drops, the host receives a RESTART/SWACT indication with the first logon after the event. This message indicates that the DMS system has performed a restart, so all directory numbers from the previous session need to be re-associated.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This capability allows the improved recovery of a communication link by eliminating the need to perform a SWACT after a DMS system restart. Other benefits include: !" Enables successful logons quickly after an unplanned shutdown. !" Increases the information available about DMS system status and proper logon proce-

dure.


193

!" Minimize the occurrence of race conditions and corruption by providing a single-process transmission of messages. Today, LOGON, LOGOFF, and ABORT messages use multi-process messaging, allowing messages to be processed out of sequence. With a single process method, a message will not be processed until the message sent prior to it has been fully processed and all relevant data structures have been updated.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ICM00001 Intelligent Call Management Interface

ICM SUPPORT FOR BRI ICM00075 Permits CTI applications to report on ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) line activities.

ICM Support for BRI LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

ICM00075 expands ICM messaging to include ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines. This enables CTI applications to receive phone status information and to perform third-party call control functions on ISDN BRI in the same manner now available for other types of business and residential lines.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This capability expands revenue opportunities by enabling ISDN BRI lines to interwork with off-switch applications, such as Nortel Networks Symposium products or similar CTI products, in the same way as other types of DMS business lines. This feature also provides the foundation to interface with H.323-based terminals in the future.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ICM00050 Enhanced ICM Functionality


194

CALL CENTER SERVER ICM00010 Provides the basic framework to support enhanced Call Control and Routing capabilities through a subscriber’s host computer.

CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables calls routed directly to an agent from a CDN (Controlled Directory Number) queue to display called information on the agent set, as provided in Table ACDDISP for the agent ACD group.

This feature also provides an optional threshold overflow route for a CDN queue. This gives the customer the option of specifying threshold route or default ACD group to route the incoming call when the incoming call queues are full.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to order code ICM00010: !" Provides more relevant information for the agent answering a call. !" Offers greater flexibility for routing calls when thresholds are exceeded. !" Provides uniform operation between CDN and default ACD call center states. !" Delivers additional call display information to CDN agents. Display information can be

provided on a per-call basis.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



195

ENHANCED ICM FUNCTIONALITY ICM00050 Provides a number of automated call center features for the Intelligent Call Management portfolio.

ICM Call Held Event Reporting LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature increases the level of reporting on call hold activations to include all combinations of hold and unhold user event sequences with RES, Centrex, and ACD lines. With this feature, calls placed on hold and taken off hold are more accurately reported to the hosting CTI system. This capability also expands the support of calls manually placed on hold.

The following compares current ICM hold/unhold behavior with this new feature:

Current behavior New behavior

Hold Unhold Dv_call_held_u Dv_call_unheld_u Dv_call_held_u Dv_call_unheld_u

ICM ICM Not Reported Not Reported

ICM DN KEY Not Reported Reported

CHD ICM Not Reported Not Reported

HLD ICM Not Reported Not Reported

HOLD KEY

ICM Not Reported Not Reported

HLD HLD Not Reported Not Reported

HOLD KEY

DN KEY Not Reported Not Reported

Reported Reported


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to order code ICM00050: !" Tracks all hold/unhold activations for more complete agent behavior/call flow analysis in

the call center. !" Enables users to hold and retrieve calls using any DMS method while maintaining ICM

event notification. !" Expands compliance with the latest Telephony Applications Programming Interface

(TAPI) specifications.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



196

New optional Centrex ACD features

The following Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) features are optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately.

INCREASE SECONDARY DNS ACD00081 Enhances call flexibility by expanding the maximum number of SDNs in a group.

Supplementary ACD DN Expansion LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

Each ACD Group has a single Primary Directory Number (DN) and a list of Secondary DNs (SDN) associated with it. This software feature expands the maximum number of SDNs for any group from a current maximum of 16 to as many as 63, with ACD00001’s current four-tier priority options.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This expansion in Secondary DNs associated with each ACD Group enables the service provider to publish more numbers for any group for greater call center flexibility and expanded marketing options.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ACD00001 Automatic Call Distribution Base

NOT READY ON SDN ENHANCEMENT ACD00082 Simplifies agent operations by automatically activating a Not Ready status on calls terminating on Secondary Directory Numbers.

Not Ready on Secondary Directory Number Enhancement LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

The current Not Ready on Secondary Directory Number (SDN) feature, delivered with order code ACD00001, automatically activates the Not Ready agent status on calls that originate on SDNs. ACD00082 expands this feature to also activate the Not Ready agent status on calls that terminate on SDNs.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" By activating ACD Not Ready, this feature prevents new ACD calls from terminating at a set while the agent is still engaged in a SDN call.


197

!" This optional order code offers the convenience of making an SDN set unavailable to incoming ACD calls without requiring the agent to manually activate the Not Ready status.

!" The Management Information System (MIS) event message receives information con- cerning the status of the position based on this new functionality.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: ACD00001 Automatic Call Distribution Base

OAM&P APPLICATIONS AND THE SUPERNODE DATA MANAGER NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

198

OAM&P applications and the SuperNode Data Manager

To simplify the management of complex services, unbundling, and the demands of real-time communication, service providers have migrated their internal operations data networks to provide TCP/IP connectivity for provisioning, translations, surveillance, network management, maintenance, billing, and software delivery over high-capacity networks. Coupled with this drive, the costs of networking facilities and workstation equipment have fallen, making the use of shared graphical applications over industry-standard interfaces expected requirements of a modern operations network.

Nortel Networks offers leading-edge operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) applications that exploit the benefits of this new environment to provide time- and labor-saving capabilities. The new OAM&P applications help give network providers the edge in delivering new services by enabling switch technicians to provision and activate services more quickly than before. These software tools can also lower the life-cycle cost of DMS SuperNode system ownership by significantly reducing the time and effort required to complete provisioning, commissioning, performance testing, fault isolation, and recovery procedures.

This chapter helps facilitate planning for the DMS SuperNode Data Manager (SDM), the OAM&P server for DMS SuperNode-based systems. The following pages describe the SDM; highlight its benefits; summarize the applications currently available, under development, or being planned; provides an overview of SDM deployment with expanded security options in network provider Local and Wide Area Networks; and describe its future role in a Succession packet telephony solution.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Key benefits of advanced OAM&P applications 199 SDM: the OAM&P applications platform 200 A brief look at the SDM frame 202 Current SDM applications 204 SDM portfolio enhancements 209

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 OAM&P APPLICATIONS AND THE SUPERNODE DATA MANAGER

199

Key benefits of advanced OAM&P applications

By simplifying OAM&P, the new applications offer high-value information and intuitive software tools — over standard interfaces — to improve the OAM&P fit with a network provider’s operations environment. Some of the advantages of this new software include: !" Streamlines procedures to help reduce operating expenses, significantly simplify data input,

and trim training requirements. The software provides a high degree of automation for data collection, fault isolation, and command execution.

!" Accelerates service activation. These applications give network providers the edge in delivering new services by enabling switch technicians to provision and activate complex features in less time than previously required. The software’s advanced design reduces repetitive operations and performs data fill cross checking and range verification to capture data entry errors.

!" Simplifies operations support system (OSS) synchronization. A stable, service-level view of the DMS SuperNode system simplifies custom programming at the OSS to support new services — streamlining the work of managing a multi-vendor network.

These OAM&P applications filter DMS SuperNode-specific details to provide a streamlined functional view of the DMS SuperNode switch to the OSS. This insulates the operations

support system from switch-specific changes, lessens OSS processing demands, and reduces the need to update the OSS after DMS SuperNode software upgrades.

!" Introduces revenue-generating opportunities with high-demand capabilities such as high-volume, near real-time billing to business accounts.

!" Lowers DMS skill set requirements. Service-based point-and-click graphical user interface (GUI) applications, with intuitive screen layouts, replace existing syntax-intensive commands. A consistent human-to-machine interface (HMI) keeps keystrokes to a minimum, displaying messages in everyday language. Also contributing to reduce training, and helping to standardize local practices, is the SDM’s common deployment across all SuperNode-based systems, including:

DMS-100/200 DMS-200 DMS-250 DMS-300 DMS-500 DMS-100 Wireless DMS-MTX DMS-GSM MSL-100 DMS-GSP DMS-ACD DMS-STP

!" Enhances employee satisfaction by making information more readily available and presenting it more intuitively. The software’s client/server design with Web-enabled access dramatically reduces response times.

!" Delivers enhanced, centralized security. In addition to standard Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) software, SDM15 provides a new enhanced security architecture allowing Kerberos and Secure ID security mechanisms. These mechanisms offer expanded security capabilities, based on individual user profiles.


200

SDM: the OAM&P applications platform

The dedicated server for OAM&P processing is the DMS SuperNode Data Manager (SDM). This fault-tolerant, carrier-grade OAM&P platform offers the computing power and robustness to support the full array of OAM&P applications with superior performance and reliability. Operating in the Element Management layer of the Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) model, this high-availability management solution delivers the power and capacity to process complex OAM&P applications to speed provisioning, fault isolation and troubleshooting, configuration management, and billing operations.

The SDM platform offers network providers a number of long-term benefits: !" Separates OAM&P from Call Processing. Moving OAM&P processing to a dedicated

data server enhances the call processing capacity of the Computing Module (CM) or XA-Core and helps expand total network element processing capacity (call processing and OAM&P processing combined), resulting in: #"Enhanced capacity to better handle the volume of data required for larger switches, more

complex services, and real time data flows. #"Reduced real time required for OAM&P functions, such as formatting logs. Logs are

formatted once, regardless of the number of output destinations, unlike the Input/Output Controller (IOC) where the system formats logs for each destination.

#"Optimal use of DMS investments. Developing new data-intensive applications for the IOC and CM/XA-Core would progressively reduce the capacity available for call processing, forcing more frequent CM processor upgrades or XA-Core processor additions.

!" Provides fault-tolerant operation. The robust SDM frame makes full use of dual pro- cesssor/hard drive domains and fault-tolerant software to provide high availability that can survive a point of failure with no loss of service. The carrier-grade hardware provides redundant buses, mirrored disk storage, hot-swappable circuit packs, and redundant interfaces.

!" Helps lower DMS SuperNode system cost of ownership. Besides timesaving human-to-machine interfaces, the SDM also supports open machine-to-machine interfaces to help curb secondary costs, such as reducing the need to reprogram operations support systems (OSSs). Distributed processing also reduces the computing demands on the OSS and simplifies monitoring and fault-correction tasks across multiple DMS SuperNode systems. The SDM: #"Enables OSSs to more easily and more rapidly support new DMS service additions. #"Reduces churn on OSS development by using industry-standard interfaces.

!" Integrates with the DMS system. Unlike an adjunct processor, the high-performance SDM integrates with the DMS architecture, offering a high level of alignment with standard DMS logs, alarms, power, and maintenance. This reduces impact on local practices, builds on existing office systems, and reduces training requirements. Integration also drives billing capacity to as much as four times the level possible by adjunct processors.


201

!" Helps reduce resource and work force requirements. Supporting remote operation helps maximize available resources and paves the way for unmanned offices. By making the switch part of a TCP/IP WAN, a single workstation can securely access all switches equipped with the SDM, thus reducing the number of dedicated terminals required for specific functions.

!" Optimizes communications costs. In place of low-speed, dedicated, point-to-point communications, the SDM relies on high-speed Ethernet connectivity into a data packet network to reduce total network facilities required. This helps to reduce the number of dedicated or dial-up low-speed ports (terminal controllers, MPC, BX.25 DPP port, and modems for communications interface) and associated maintenance and engineering. A typical switch could have 10 to 30 such ports; many have more than 64. This efficiency: #"Makes efficient use of facilities. A single, high-speed, multi-purpose pipe replaces multiple

low-speed circuits. This design removes the leasing or operating costs of facilities and modems, the administration of multiple ports, and low-speed single-purpose networks.

#"Handles higher volumes of data to meet the demands of new services. #"Virtually eliminates lost logs. #"Opens the door to new efficiencies (and revenue opportunities) with near real-time data

transfer (billing, logs, operational measurements, table data, and more).

!" Incorporates commercially available components so network providers can benefit from the latest technologies when they become available, such as the SDM’s use of new 400 MHz PowerPC 750 microprocessors.

!" Accommodates new technologies and standard interfaces as they become available. Standard platforms, protocols, and interfaces promote interworking among multivendor elements across the network. This complete hardware and software platform conforms to industry standards (including NEBS, EMI, and more).


202

A brief look at the SDM frame

Housed in a C28 Model B streamlined DMS SuperNode cabinet, this frame consists of a main chassis, an expansion chassis, Modular Supervisory Panel (MSP), cooling fan units, interconnect modules, and associated cabling.

The main chassis, near the bottom of the cabinet (above the fan unit), consists of a mid-mount backplane, 16 front slots, and 16 “personality module” slots in the back to accept external cabling connections. The expansion chassis, installed above the main chassis, provides additional slots for next generation requirements, as with Succession packet telephony solutions.

The SDM communicates with the Computing Module or XA-Core over duplicated high-bandwidth DS-512c fiber links directly to the DMS-Bus. Redundant 10BaseT/ 100BaseT Ethernet links via a hub or LAN concentrator connect the SDM to the network provider’s operations data network (see next).

SDM in the operations data network

The SDM’s high-speed connectivity lets network providers use their existing LAN or WAN operations data network resources and expertise to securely transfer OAM&P data among DMS systems, workstations, billing systems, and OSSs.

Besides the Nortel Networks-provided frame, the SDM also relies on the following customer-provided elements: !" The operations data network. For open, secure, cost-effective connectivity with work-

stations, servers, OSSs, and other geographically dispersed elements, the SDM communicates over the same packet network used for operations today.

!" One or more workstations, so craftspersons can have Web-browser enabled or command-line access to OAM&P applications. An optional VT-100 terminal can provide an interface for local craftsperson access.

!" One or more Client Application Servers, to respond to user software requests and make Web browser-enabled operations on workstations possible.

!" A Security Server, to provide authentication and access control for multiple DMS SuperNode systems across an entire network.

Details on these components can be found in DMS OAM&P Evolution bulletin. Call 1-800-4 NORTEL to order this document (request the latest issue of document number 50165.16).


203

Customer-supplied equipment in the operations data network

An integral element of Succession packet telephony solutions

The network provider’s investments in the SDM and associated elements in the operations data network help prepare for a transition to the Nortel Networks Succession-enabled packet telephony network. If a DMS system transitions to a Communication Server 2000 (CS 2000), the existing SDM can be transformed to serve as the CS 2000/XA-Core’s element manager, as a key building block of the network-level Succession management solution.

The expanding Succession packet telephony portfolio can help smooth the way for a network provider to transition to next-generation packet services by installing a new packet network or by transitioning today’s circuit-switched investments to a multi-vendor packet-based distributed network. For more information, refer the Succession packet telephony

solutions chapter in this document.

To operate in the Succession packet telephony environment, an existing SDM may only need new software and a minimal hardware upgrade. If the size of the CS 2000 is large, or expands in the future, a transitioned SDM frame easily scales to accommodate the increased demand, with such options as: !" New 400-MHz Central Processing Unit (CPU) !" New 9-gigabyte and 36-gigabyte Hard Disk Modules


204

Current SDM applications

Capabilities at a glance The following lists of all the current OAM&P applications available on the SuperNode Data Manager through release SDM00014.

Applications available as of SDM14

Application Order code See page

Base capabilities

Standard base platform software, including: • Fault-Tolerant Platform Base • High-Speed Log Interface • Software Inventory Management (SWIM)

PLAT0005 205

Enhanced Terminal Access for DCE ENTA0001 205 – 206

ASCII Terminal Access for DCE ATA00001 205 – 206

Secure File Transfer for ETA, ATA SFT00001 206

Accounting management – SuperNode Billing Applications

SuperNode Billing Applications Base SBM00001 206

AMADNS File Format SBM00003 206

SMDR Records SBM00006 207

CDR File Format CNCD0002 207

CDR Real Time Billing in DIRP CNCD0004 207

Billing Stream Filtering Application CNCD0006 207

Performance management Operational Measurements Delivery CNOM0002 208

EADAS over TCP/IP NMDC0001 208

Configuration management DMS Data Management System (DDMS)2 DDMS0001 208

Fault management DMS Surveillance & Exception Reporting 3 SURV0003 208

2 DDMS will not be offered beyond SDM15. Preside Infrastructure Provisioning (previously called Telepath) will be offered as a replacement for translations management 3 DMS Surveillance & Exception reporting will not be offered after SDM15


205

Application portfolio The following pages summarize available OAM&P applications on the SDM through release SDM14.

SuperNode Data Manager Base Platform (PLAT0005, provided with SDM Base) The base platform software is supplied as part of the fault-tolerant SDM platform. Dual processors, split into two separate domains with dedicated input/output and memory, execute the same instructions and are constantly monitored for mismatches. If there is a problem, the working processor is identified and given control immediately, with no loss of service. The Fault Tolerant SDM supports disk mirroring. This capability stores identical copies of SDM application data on two separate disk drives. If the SDM suspects a fault on the primary disk, SDM data is safely available on the secondary drive. To promote the fast transfer of information, the SDM connects to the DMS system through optical fiber interfaces direct to the DMS Message Switch.

One key capability with the SDM base software is the High-Speed Log Interface, which: !" Delivers DMS logs via high-speed TCP/IP interface !" Allows flexible routing of various log subsets to printers, SDM files, or IP addresses of

operation support systems !" Offloads log traffic from the Input/Output Controller (IOC) !" Reduces Computing Module/XA-Core real-time for log formatting and delivery !" Eliminates lost logs and buffer overflow due to low-speed ports

Enhanced Terminal Access (order code ENTA0001) ASCII Terminal Access (order code ATA00001) These two order codes offer alternative ways of providing terminal access. Working together, they provide users a graphical interface (with Enhanced Terminal Access) and a command line interface (with ASCII Terminal Access) for users at OSS workstations. These applications offer network providers secure, user-friendly access to all the DMS system commands from a single workstation, using an industry-standard Distributed Computer Environment (DCE) to provide secure password authentication.

With either Enhanced Terminal Access or ASCII Terminal Access, an authorized user can: !" Log-in to a remote SDM for administration !" Securely log-in to a remote SDM for Maintenance and Administration Position (MAP)

sessions at a much higher speed than the current DMS MAP !" User access to a WAN and a workstation to conduct multiple MAP sessions and have

multiple MAP windows open at the same time


206

With Enhanced Terminal Access (ETA), users can access multiple DMS systems simultaneously from the same remote client GUI-based program. Users, with ETA client software on a Sun Microsystems or Hewlett-Packard workstation and WAN access can conduct multiple MAP sessions and have multiple MAP windows open at the same time.

ASCII Terminal Access (ATA) additionally offers machine-to-machine access for users currently logged on to an OSS computer or users on a PC to launch MAP sessions. !" OSS log-in requires “rlogin” or “telnet” capability to the ATA server !" The OSS does not require Nortel Networks client software

Secure File Transfer for ETA, ATA (order code SFT00001) This file transfer application reliably transports a wide variety of files between remote servers (such as the operations support system) and the switch’s System Load Module (SLM), XA-Core, or input/output devices (such as disk drives) over a high-speed TCP/IP interface.

The Secure File Transfer application makes it possible for an entire PCL release, peripheral software loads, and patches to be centrally stored in a network provider’s software repository (a server or workstation) — where they can be secure distributed to pertinent DMS SuperNode systems in the network that have this OAM&P application.

This application helps network providers manage and distribute additions and changes in less time, with full security. It also helps eliminate costs associated with the transportation of tapes to and from switching and operations centers. Many types of files can be transferred, including: !" Customized recorded announcements to Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement

Machines (EDRAMs) !" Office images to off-switch storage !" Hardware inventory information for comparison and analysis !" Software patches and Software Optionality Controls (SOCs) !" DMS Product Computing-Module Loads (PCLs) !" DMS Peripheral Module (PM) Loads and Non-Computing-Module Loads (NCLs)

SuperNode Billing Application – Base (order code SBM00001) The SuperNode Billing Application (SBA) provides the basic software capabilities for billing applications, including the potential to enable the DMS system to generate and store billing data in excess of 1.5 million billing busy hour call attempts (BBHCAs) in the SDM.

SuperNode Billing Application – AMADNS (order code SBM00003) This order code provides the Data Server functionality of Telcordia’s Automated Message Accounting Data Networking System (AMADNS) specification. This software supports local-access DMS systems and enables Bellcore Automatic Message Accounting Format (BAF) billing records to be delivered by the SDM in AMADNS file format. Requires SBM00001.


207

SuperNode Billing Application – SMDR (order code SBM00006) In addition to delivering Bellcore AMA Format records, the SuperNode Billing Application can deliver Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) records within the framework of the AMADNS architecture (as specified in Telcordia GR-1343-CORE). With this feature, the SDM delivers multiple record streams from the DMS system through a common device. One SuperNode Billing Application platform can handle up to ten SMDR customer groups, with near real-time delivery of SMDR records using standard File Transport Protocol (FTP) over Ethernet.

Now that the SDM delivers multiple billing record streams, there is no longer a need for separate collection devices and communications infrastructures for SMDR records. This efficiency helps reduce the costs of providing SMDR through extremely flexible routing of SMDR for processing and the use of a low-cost data communication solution.

This application requires either SBM00001 and SBM00003 or CNCD0002.

SuperNode Billing Application – CDR (order code CNCD0002) This SBA application offers enhanced carrier billing services for a Long Distance DMS system, such as the DMS-250, DMS-500, DMS-300, and DMS-GSP systems. Requires SBM00001.

SuperNode Billing Application – Real Time Billing (order code CNCD0004) Real-Time Billing transfers billing records to a downstream processor from the SDM within 30 seconds of the termination of a call, immediately after they have been written to disk on the SDM. Although the SDM pushes the billing records to the downstream processor using an enhanced version of FTP, network providers do not require a special version of FTP on their downstream processors to receive the billing records.

To help the processing of billing records in near real time, Downstream Billing Mediation devices can poll the SDM for BAF billing records in Device Independent Recording Peripheral (DIRP) format as quickly as 30 seconds (on average) after call completion.

SuperNode Billing Application – Billing Record Filtering (order code CNCD0006) Billing Records Filtering enables the network provider to select various subsets of billing records on the SDM from the stream of records received from the DMS switch — and schedule them for transfer to different locations. This efficiency allows multiple streams to be created, each containing a set of records that have been filtered according to criteria defined by the network provider. The filtering criteria are identical to the criteria available in the DMS AMADUMP tool. This feature can be used in conjunction with Real Time delivery of billing records on the SDM and is applicable for both DIRP format records and AMADNS records.


208

Operational Measurements To CSV File (order code CNOM0002) For the ease of monitoring and analysis, switch engineers can group related Operational Measurements (OMs) together into as many as 64 different customer group profiles. OMs can be scheduled for delivery to specific customer group profiles at prescribed intervals (such as every 5, 10, and 30 minutes) and then transferred upstream at the user’s convenience. The output can be made available in Comma-Separated Values (CSV) format compatible with many popular spreadsheet programs. This offers switch engineers maximum flexibility in formulating OM data for reporting purposes.

Operational Measurements – EADAS via TCP/IP (order code NMDC0001) For near real-time routing of Network Management information to the Network Management OSS without the potential for a single point-of-failure (inherent with a dedicated facility). This application provides the data link protocols for the DMS system to communicate with the Engineering and Administrative Data Acquisition System (EADAS) over a cost-effective Transport Communications Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) interface.

Now Data Collection data (TR-740) and Network Management data (TR-746) can be sent for collection either to the same IP address or to separate IP addresses, as needed to suit a service provider’s network.

DMS Data Management System (order code DDMS0001) As an alternative to the Table Editor for DMS translations and service orders for DMS provisioning functions, the DMS Data Management System (DDMS) helps alleviate the complexity of provisioning ISDN, AIN, LNP, and other new services on the DMS system. Features include a Web browser-based table editor and OSSDI-based data rollback function.

SDM15 will be the last release that DDMS will be offered. Nortel Networks will replace this application with the Preside Infrastructure Provisioning system (see page 213). Previously known as TelePATH, this existing Nortel Networks application has been in use for a number of years as an engineering tool and translations OSS.

DMS Surveillance and Exception Reporting (order code SURV0003) SDM15 will be the last release that DMS Surveillance and Exception Reporting will be offered.


209

SDM portfolio enhancements

This section discusses SuperNode Data Manager portfolio enhancements and new features available with SDM15.

Hardware enhancements with SDM15 NCL SDM00015 supports many hardware enhancements that increase storage and bandwidth to help the SuperNode Data Manager meet the expanding requirements of large DMS systems and Succession packet telephony solutions. The increased storage will be critical as additional applications are added to the SDM and as offices begin deployment of XA-Core to process more calls and generate more operations data. By integrating leading-edge components with the DMS SuperNode system, the SDM can take advantage of the aggressive computer industry performance curve.

Some of the major hardware enhancements supported by SDM000015 software include: !" A larger root volume group of 36 gigabytes (NTRX50NM) and a larger data volume group of

72 gigabytes option (NTRX50NL). !" An expanded Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive capacity that increases from 4 gigabytes to

12 gigabytes. !" An Ethernet expansion from 10BaseT to 10BaseT/100BaseT. The NTR50NK Personality

Module is required to support 10BaseT/100BaseT operation with the 36-gigabyte root volume group (NTRX50NM) and the 72-gigabyte data volume group (NTRX50NL). These new drives require this new personality module and are not compatible with the older personality modules.

Hardware baseline: links to Message Switch In the SDM, the NTRX50GX DS-512 interface circuit pack now replaces the current NTRX50GA circuit pack for all DMS systems that: !" Replace the Computing Module with XA-Core !" Upgrade to the A750 processor (NTRX50NB) !" Are new SDM installations

Nortel Networks will replace an existing NTRX50GA pack with the NTRX50GX for in-service systems that currently have the XA-Core in operation.


210

Simplified software development stream For Local Access and Long Distance DMS systems, Nortel Networks developed SDM NCLs in two separate software streams (such as SDMN0013 for the DMS-100 system and SDMC0013 for the DMS-250 system). Now, beginning in product release SDM14, we combine these streams to simplify development, provisioning, and delivery. The combined stream has a zero as the fourth character, instead of a “C” or an “N”, as depicted below.

One SDM software load for Local Access and Long Distance DMS systems

To maintain full feature compatibility between SDM applications and the DMS system, the Computing Module (CM) or XA-Core needs the latest available PCL installed. Short of full feature support, the following table shows operational compatibility between SDM and DMS product releases. The SDM is backwards compatible up to three “CSP” releases with the CM or XA-Core.


211

New optional SDM features The following optional features are available by order code and available with SDM00015.

UNIVERSAL TERMINAL ACCESS UTA00001 Introduces a new, enhanced security architecture with additional security options to control and protect access.

Universal Terminal Access SDM00015

KEY CAPABILITIES

Universal Terminal Access (UTA) offers Single Sign-On, Secure Web, or Script Access to the SDM and CM/XA-Core through an enhanced security architecture that includes additional security options to control and protect access. UTA helps to enforce network-provider Corporate Security Standards by being compatible with DCE, Secure ID, and Kerberos security mechanisms — and includes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) security for installations where none of these third-party mechanisms are in use.

UTA helps increase efficiency by keeping the universal sign-on process transparent to the authorized user. UTA dynamically allocates user access from a pool of switch user IDs. When a user has completed a task on the switch, the user’s ID is immediately available for allocation to the next authorized user logging onto the same SDM switch.

With Strong Authentication methods, UTA’s logging capability — all done without shared passwords — provides a proper audit trail for improved security. Additionally, UTA offers: !" A continued centralized access point for OSS connectivity. !" New Web browser-driven Terminal Access that works with Sun Microsystems, Hewlett-

Packard, and Microsoft Windows platforms that helps reduce software distribution and maintenance costs.

!" The Basic User Administration GUI enables the service provider to set up user/group profiles for authentication and authorization. Access controls include time-of-day by users or by group. #"Reduces administration learning curve via easy-to-use rules for access and session

privileges #"Reduces time needed to add or remove users and network elements #"Uses “Escorted Access” to create a secure environment for authorized user access to

hosts within the network

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

UTA not only simplifies the log-on process but also protects switch userIDs (users only know their unique user name and password). The flexible UTA supports a variety of security mechanism options and scales to accommodate a virtually unlimited number of user profiles. With Basic User Administration, the time needed to manage users and switches is greatly reduced and the elimination of password management saves administrator and help desk time.


212

Additional benefits include: !" No changes to existing methods and procedures !" Full optimization and use of access ports !" Expanded flexibility for operation with Succession packet telephony solutions

SECURE FILE TRANSFER FOR UTA SFT00002

Used with Universal Terminal Access to provide Secure File Transfer service.

Secure File Transfer for UTA SDM00015* * available in a Maintenance NCL, tentatively scheduled for release in 3Q01

KEY CAPABILITIES

As in Secure File Transfer, SFT00001, this file transfer application reliably conveys a wide variety of files between remote servers (such as the operations support system) and the switch’s System Load Module (SLM) or input/output devices (such as disk drives) over a high-speed TCP/IP interface.

SFT0002 is designed to work with in the new security architecture of Universal Terminal Architecture and makes it possible for an entire PCL release, peripheral software loads, and patches to be transferred from a network provider’s software repository (a server or workstation), where they can be securely distributed to pertinent DMS SuperNode systems in the network that have this new OAM&P application.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Secure File Transfer application gives network providers the ability to manage and distribute additions and changes in less time, with full security and by reducing costs associated with the transportation of tapes to and from switching and operations centers.

Transfers can be made of many different types of files, including: !" Customized recorded announcements to Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement

Machines (EDRAMs) !" Office images to off-switch storage !" Hardware inventory information for comparison and analysis !" Software patches and Software Optionality Controls (SOCs) !" DMS Product Computing-Module Loads (PCLs) !" DMS Peripheral Module (PM) Loads and Non-Computing-Module Loads (NCLs)

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: UTA00001 Universal Terminal Access


213

Global Professional Services options The following services are available through Nortel Networks Global Professional Services. Please contact your Nortel Networks representative for more information.

Both applications run on standard Sun Microsystems servers. The hardware platform can be provided as part of a turnkey solution through Global Professional Services.

Preside Infrastructure Provisioning (TelePATH) KEY CAPABILITIES

Previously known as TelePATH, the Nortel Networks Preside Infrastructure Provisioning solution can be used to manage complex translation and configuration data. This powerful and highly scalable system maintains a continuously updated image of table data for all network elements, whether the network is small or extremely large and complex.

Included is a powerful Work Order Management module that allows users to create, modify, and view pending changes, and apply translation changes to the network elements across the network. It also provides the foundation to build flow-through provisioning and network knowledge applications.

The network-wide data editor features: !" Wild card searching !" Templating !" Manual or auto application of data changes !" Full or partial application of data changes !" Back out (roll back) of data changes !" Work order and table history audit trails

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Reduces the effort to create, apply, and manage translation changes !" Enhances quality of translations !" Enables network provider to prepare changes off-line for later execution, helping to ensure

customer services are activated when the customer requests it

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Refer to the TelePATH 5.0 Technical Bulletin, number 74001.39, for details on Preside Infrastructure Provisioning software, hardware, capabilities and support


214

Graphical Lines Provisioning Application KEY CAPABILITIES

Graphical Lines Provisioning (GLP) is a powerful graphical line provisioning application for DMS systems. With millions of lines already in service, GLP gives the network provider the power to respond in minutes to numerous daily requests of adds, moves, and changes, thereby improving customer service. !" Supports Centrex, ISDN, and POTS lines and features !" Supports all DMS switches and Multi-Button Telephone Sets !" Offers self-service provisioning to customers !" Supports queued and multiple bulk-changes processing !" Easily customizes reports, help messages, and user screens !" Supports 10-digit dialing as soon as it is activated in the switch

GLP’s Guaranteed Database Integrity (GDI) feature offers automatic, dynamic database updates that reflect recent changes in the switch database made at the switch console or any other method other than GLP.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" GLP helps improve customer service by responding to service activation requests in minutes

!" Its easy-to-use Web browser interface helps transition provisioning responsibilities from highly skilled technical resources to trained service personnel

!" Bulk-change capabilities enable the network provider to prepare changes off-line for later execution

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: This application runs on standard Sun Microsystems servers. The hardware can be provided as part of a turnkey solution through Global Professional Services.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 AGENT SERVICES

215

Agent Services

The Nortel Networks portfolio of agent/operator services builds on the robust and reliable Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) platform and leads the industry in voice service automation and the convergence of data and voice in the public network, with a full evolution plan to the world of packet-based telephony. Agent Services products are designed to bring immediate value to your networks today, and to function with minimal changes as your network evolves to the Succession packet-based network.

At the center of the TOPS network is the DMS TOPS tandem switch. The DMS TOPS switch connects operator positions with directory assistance systems, operator reference databases, voice service nodes, and other systems and databases.

This chapter discusses the new software features that reside in the Core (Computing Module or XA-Core) of the DMS TOPS switch to support a variety of services, operator positions, and databases.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Order code consolidation in Rel•15

Listed by current order codes Listed by new order codes

216 219

Extend return-on-investment with Succession-enabled solutions

221

New Agent Services features 222

AGENT SERVICES NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

216

Order code consolidation in Rel•15

Over the years, the demands of customers and the marketplace have continuously dictated new functionality to TOPS software. This has also led to a long list of orderable features and associated order codes. To simplify the TOPS ordering process, and to better align order codes with the way our customers currently order our features, we have consolidated many of our previous codes into feature groups. For example, many features which had been available at extra cost are now included under the OSB00101 Basic Operator Services order code.

The following tables cross-reference the older order codes (as of LET00014) with the new order codes that go into effect with LET00015 and LLT00015. If you have any questions, please contact your regional Nortel Networks representative.

Transition of TOPS functionality in LET00015/LLT00015 — listed by current order codes

Current order code and name New order code and name ABS00001 Alternate Billing Services ABS00002 Auto Alter Billing Services ABS00003 Op Hand-off to AABS ABS00004 Account Code Billing ABS00005 French/English AABS ABS00006 AABS Call Screening ABS00007 DN Call Screening ABS00008 Commercial Credit Card Support ABS00009 Auto Room / Auth Number ABS00010 ClgCard Den Reas Disp and Ann ABS00011 AABS Enhanced Services Acc ABS00012 Orig. Line Number Screening ABS00013 TOPS Auth Code Billing

ABS00101 Alternate Billing Service

ADVQ0001 Advanced Queuing ADVQ0002 TOPS Close Down ADVQ0003 Host Queue Mgmt System ADVQ0004 Remote Queue Mgmt System ADVQ0005 H/R Network by Queue Type ADVQ0006 QMS Customer Ast Srvcs Enh ADVQ0007 QMS Billing Indicator ADVQ0008 Music/Announce in Queue ADVQ0009 QMS Host/Remote Queuing

OSB00101 Basic Operator Services


217

Listed by current order codes, continued

Current order code and name New order code and name ENSV0001 Enhanced Services ENSV0101 Enhanced Services ENSV0002 Auto Coin Toll Services ENSV0102 Auto Coin Toll Services ENSV0003 TOPS Alternate Ann ENSV0004 Screened Service Route ENSV0005 Ext Aud Rsp Host and Remote ENSV0006 2 Digit ANI-TOPS Off ENSV0007 Pre Paid Coin ENSV0008 Enh TOPS Operator Centraliz.


ENSV0009 External RTRS Interface ENSV0103 External RTRS Interface ENSV0010 Auto Country Direct ENSV0011 Enhanced OC - Incr Remote Spt ENSV0013 MDS - Offer of Service Prompt ENSV0014 OSS AIN ENSV0017 Branding via SPID ENSV0018 Estimate of Call Charges ENSV0020 Enhanced OSSAIN


ENSV0021 OLNS Foreign Language ENSV0104 OLNS Foreign Language ENSV0022 OLNS Support No Automation ENSV0105 OLNS Support No Automation

ENSV0023 IN Fall Back ENSV0106 IN Fall Back ENSV0025 ACTS Seconds-Based Ann ENSV0103 External RTRS Interface ENSV0026 TOPS IP Oper Centralization ENSV0107 TOPS IP Oper Central EWSS0001 Enhanced W/S Software EWSS0002 Auto OIA Sess Start EWSS0003 TOPS DA Subten TMS EWSS0004 TOPS Open Position Prot EWSS0005 TOPS Incr Multiplex EWSS0006 TMS Networking EWSS0007 TMS Processor Upgrade


EWSS0008 OPP over IP OSB00102 Provisioning Enhncmnts OSAN0001 OSSAIN OSAN0002 OSSAIN Base Features OSAN0003 OSSAIN Enhancements 07 OSAN0004 OSSAIN Enhancements 09

OSAN0101 OSAN Base Features


218


Current order code and name New order code and name OSAN0005 OSSAIN Enhancements 10 OSAN0006 OSSAIN Enhancements 11 OSAN0007 OSSAIN Enhancements 12

OSAN0102 OSAN Enhanced Features

OSAN0100 OSSAIN Sessions OSAN0103 OSAN Sessions OSB00001 Basic Operator Services OSB00101 Basic Operator Services OSDA0001 Directory Assistance OSDA0101 Directory Assistance OSDA0002 Auto DACC with AltBill OSDA0003 Auto Int Call Comp

OSDA0102 Auto DACC w/AltBill

OSDA0004 Auto DA Services (ADAS) OSDA0101 Directory Assistance OSDA0005 Cell/IXC/LEC ADACC OSDA0102 Auto DACC w/AltBill OSDA0006 DA Automation Interface OSDA0008 LPP/APU Support

OSDA0101 Directory Assistance

OSDA0009 DA via IP OSDA0103 Directory Assist via IP OSEA0001 TOPS Equal Access OSEA0002 TOPS InterLATA Carrier OSEA0003 TOPS Exc Acc OS Signaling OSEA0004 TOPS Incom FGD Signaling

OSEA0101 TOPS Equal Access

OSEA0005 GR317/394 ISUP/TOPS OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP OSEA0006 Tops ILP via OLNS OSEA0101 TOPS Equal Access OSEA0007 TOPS Carrier RLT OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP OSEA0008 TOPS Local Number Portability OSEA0103 TOPS US LNP OSEA0009 TOPS Carrier RLT-2 OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP OSEA0010 TOPS Telcordia LNP OSEA0103 TOPS US LNP OSEA0011 TOPS Canadian Equal Access OSEA0012 TOPS Flex ANI


OSEA0013 Opr Services Network Capability OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP


219

The following rearranges the information from the previous table to organize the consolidation by new order codes.

Transition of TOPS functionality in LET00015/LLT00015 — listed by new order codes

New order code and name Current order code and name OSB00001 Basic Operator Services ADVQ0001 Advanced Queuing ADVQ0002 TOPS Close Down ADVQ0003 Host Queue Mgmt System ADVQ0004 Remote Queue Mgmt System ADVQ0005 H/R Network by Queue Type ADVQ0006 QMS Customer Ast Srvcs Enh ADVQ0007 QMS Billing Indicator ADVQ0008 Music/Announce in Queue ADVQ0009 QMS Host/Remote Queuing ENSV0003 TOPS Alternate Ann ENSV0004 Screened Service Route ENSV0005 Ext Aud Rsp Host and Remote ENSV0006 2 Digit ANI-TOPS Off ENSV0007 Pre Paid Coin ENSV0008 Enh TOPS Operator Centraliz. ENSV0010 Auto Country Direct ENSV0011 Enhanced OC - Incr Remote Spt ENSV0013 MDS - Offer of Service Prompt ENSV0014 OSS AIN ENSV0017 Branding via SPID ENSV0018 Estimate of Call Charges ENSV0020 Enhanced OSSAIN EWSS0001 Enhanced W/S Software EWSS0002 Auto OIA Session Start EWSS0003 TOPS DA Subtended TMS EWSS0004 TOPS Open Position Prot EWSS0005 TOPS Incr Multiplex EWSS0006 TMS Networking


EWSS0007 TMS Processor Upgrade OSB00102 Provisioning Enhncmnts EWSS0008 OPP over IP


220

Listed by new order codes, continued

New order code and name Current order code and name ABS00001 Alternate Billing Services ABS00002 Auto Alter Billing Services ABS00003 Op Hand-off to AABS ABS00004 Account Code Billing ABS00005 French/English AABS ABS00006 AABS Call Screening ABS00007 DN Call Screening ABS00008 Commercial Credit Card Support ABS00009 Auto Room / Auth Number ABS00010 ClgCard Den Reas Disp and Ann ABS00011 AABS Enhanced Services Acc ABS00012 Orig. Line Number Screening

ABS00101 Alternate Billing Service

ABS00013 TOPS Auth Code Billing ENSV0101 Enhanced Services ENSV0001 Enhanced Services ENSV0102 Auto Coin Toll Services ENSV0002 Auto Coin Toll Services

ENSV0009 External RTRS Interface ENSV0103 External RTRS Interface

ENSV0025 ACTS Seconds-Based Ann ENSV0104 OLNS Foreign Language ENSV0021 OLNS Foreign Language ENSV0105 OLNS Support No Automation ENSV0022 OLNS Support No Automation ENSV0106 IN Fall Back ENSV0023 IN Fall Back ENSV0107 TOPS IP Oper Central ENSV0026 TOPS IP Oper Centralization

OSAN0001 OSSAIN OSAN0002 OSSAIN Base Features OSAN0003 OSSAIN Enhancements 07


OSAN0004 OSSAIN Enhancements 09 OSAN0005 OSSAIN Enhancements 10 OSAN0006 OSSAIN Enhancements 11 OSAN0102 OSAN Enhanced

Features OSAN0007 OSSAIN Enhancements 12

OSAN0103 OSAN Sessions OSAN0100 OSSAIN Sessions OSDA0001 Directory Assistance OSDA0004 Auto DA Service (ADAS) OSDA0006 DA Automation Interface


OSDA0008 LPP/APU Support


221


New order code and name Current order code and name

OSDA0002 Auto DACC with AltBill OSDA0003 Auto Int Call Comp OSDA0102 Auto DACC w/AltBill OSDA0005 Cell/IXC/LEC ADACC

OSDA0103 Directory Assist via IP OSDA0009 DA via IP OSEA0001 TOPS Equal Access OSEA0002 TOPS InterLATA Carrier OSEA0003 TOPS Exc Acc OS Signaling OSEA0004 TOPS Incoming FGD Signaling OSEA0006 Tops ILP via OLNS OSEA0011 TOPS Canadian Equal Access


OSEA0012 TOPS Flex ANI OSEA0005 GR317/394 ISUP/TOPS OSEA0007 TOPS Carrier RLT OSEA0009 TOPS Carrier RLT-2

OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP

OSEA0013 Op Svs Network Capability OSEA0008 TOPS LNP

OSEA0103 TOPS US LNP OSEA0010 TOPS Telcordia LNP

Extend return-on-investment with Succession-enabled solutions

Rel•15 (LET00015 and LLT00015 PCLs) is the last scheduled product release that has new feature development for Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) services on the DMS platform. We will continue to provide regulatory and critical robustness features for DMS-based Agent Services in special software patches and will offer limited custom development. All systems in the field continue to receive full Nortel Networks customer service support, up to a future end-of-life announcement (based on the availability of TOPS with Succession packet telephony solutions).

Current DMS operator services investments can be transitioned in the future to the multiservice, packet-based Succession portfolio. With Succession packet telephony offerings, new feature development — involving traditional and commercially available platforms — will break free of today’s network constraints to offer fresh, innovative multimedia solutions. For more information, refer to the Succession packet telephony solutions chapter, starting on page 39.


222

New Agent Services features

The following features are planned to be optional. Although they are delivered with a PCL load, they must be licensed separately by order code.

OPERATOR SERVICES BASIC OSB00001

Provides the software foundation for a broad portfolio of operator services. REL•15 AND LATER: OSB00101

TOPS and Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking LET00014, LLT00014

This feature provides software support for the TOPS trunk group type hosted on a Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) as well as support for operator service calls on TOPS, IT, and ATC trunk group types that are hosted on an SPM. Service providers deploying the SPM can benefit from lower operating costs by the consolidation of trunking facilities along with the higher capacity for TOPS and other traffic offered by direct OC-3 optical trunking.

Service providers can expand the trunk consolidation benefits of the SPM platform by licensing the new OSNC Enhancements feature, also available in Rel•14 (see order code OSEA0001 on the next page).


End-of-Life Activities (TOPS14) LET00014, LLT00014

This feature removes outdated functionality from the base TOPS software code, including: !" Delayed outpulsing !" Inward validation !" Table SPLNDID !" AMR5 signaling

The removal of end-of-life features helps keep the TOPS software processing at peak operating levels and reduces memory and real time requirements.


TOPS and SuperNode Data Manager Interworking LET00015, LLT00015

Now TOPS customers can take advantage of the higher billing throughput and storage capabilities of the SuperNode Billing Application (SBA) on the DMS SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) platform. By supporting TOPS Bellcore Automatic Message Accounting Format (BAF) files on the SDM, this Rel•15 capability enables service providers to


223

consolidate billing equipment onto a single, leading-edge billing platform to simplify operations, lower on-going costs, and enhance customer service.

End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) LET00015, LLT00015

This feature removes outdated functionality from the base TOPS software code, including: !" Senior Operator !" Table TOPSTERM !" Tone Repeat !" Request CAMA

The removal of end-of-life features helps keep the TOPS software processing at peak operating levels and reduces memory and real time requirements.


TOPS EQUAL ACCESS OSEA0001 Supports operator services in the Equal Access environment. REL•15 AND LATER:

OSEA0101

OSNC Enhancements LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature supports industry-standard ISUP trunking, optimized for operator services. Calls that come to TOPS in the Operator Services Network Capability (OSNC) format are converted to standard Multi-frequency (MF) signaling.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This enhancement to OSEA0101 expands trunking capabilities to help broaden the return on ISUP trunking investments. With this feature, service providers can consolidate all traffic-bearing trunking to a DMS TOPS tandem switch for lower operating costs and simplified administration. This protocol conversion enables coin-call signaling across ISUP trunking and supports a number of features, such as Originating Line Number Screening and Charge Number for IntraLATA Calls, that streamline operations and offer revenue opportunities.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OSB00001, OSEA0005


224

Release Link Trunking Variant 2 LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This variant enhances Release Link Trunking (RLT) capabilities so a calling party whose call was set up by the TOPS system can request, at the end of the call, a return to the system to avoid having to redial access numbers to make multiple calls.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By enabling a caller to return to the TOPS system at the end of a call, the service provider can support offerings, such as sequence calling with a calling card, that enable the subscriber to complete multiple calls without going onhook (and redialing access numbers) between calls. This time-and effort-saving efficiency provides better service to subscribers and helps improve call set-up time.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OSEA0001

ENHANCED SERVICES ENSV0001

Offers a number of enhancements to basic operator service capabilities. REL•15 AND LATER: ENSV0101

ADACC Enhancement LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the network provider to enable, via datafill, a real-time rating query, sent to an external real-time rating system, to determine Automated Directory Assistance Call Completion (ADACC) surcharges.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Now network providers can automatically rate the call completion portion of a call using an external rating device, and play an audio announcement to let the caller know the charges in advance. This enables carriers to provide a wider variety of call completion with variable charges, rather than fixed charges as required today, expanding the potential to capture more revenue.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OSB00001, OSDA0001, OSDA0002, OSEA0001, OSEA0002


225

OPERATOR SERVICES DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE OSDA0001 Provides base switch software to support directory assistance. REL•15 AND LATER:

OSDA0101

DACC Enhancements LET00014, LLT00014

KEY CAPABILITIES

When a subscriber makes a directory assistance call that progresses to a toll call (for instance, a directory assistance call with call completion), network provider agreements dictate that the charge for that call reverts to the subscriber’s carrier. If, for any reason, that carrier is unable to service the request, this feature enables the network provider to override and complete the call.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature enables network providers to capture additional call completion revenue in situations that have previously not been possible.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: OSB00001, OSDA0001, OSDA0002, OSEA0001, OSEA0002

DMS-100 WIRELESS NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

226

DMS-100 Wireless

The DMS-100 Wireless system is a multi-functional switching solution that integrates local/toll wireline (DMS-100/200 system) and digital wireless (DMS MTX system) capabilities onto the same robust platform. Summaries of wireline features in LWW00007 appear as Rel•13 features throughout the previous Feature Planning Guide (50004.11/02-00 Issue 21). Summaries of the wireless features in LWW00007 appear in this chapter.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Wireline and wireless features on a single platform 227

Integrated Wireless Centrex 228

WIN services 229

DMS-100 Wireless system hardware requirements 230

About LWW00007 wireless features 231

Optional base features 232

e-mobility services 234

Nortel Networks Base Station subsystem 238

Service provider features 240

CDMA-specific features 241

TDMA-specific features 246

TDMA/AMPS-specific features 251

Fraud control features 257

Cell Sites – 1900 MHz 258

Networking features 260

Wireless data and short messaging 262

Subscriber services 263

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 DMS-100 WIRELESS

227

Wireline and wireless features on a single platform

The DMS-100 Wireless system offers a flexible and cost-effective way for a service provider to establish a single point of presence in both traditional wireline and wireless markets, as well as new data and Internet telephony markets. By delivering new integrated customer services — such as a single voice mail box, one-number capabilities, and feature transparency — service providers can pursue new revenue opportunities, increase customer satisfaction, and establish a market presence as a technology leader.

With software integration of the wireline and wireless platforms, this platform supports unique integrated services, such as Wireless Centrex (see discussion starting on the following page). Leveraging the system’s integrated software structure also enables popular wireline features to be quickly ported to wireless phones.

Having shared hardware support both wireline and wireless capabilities yields significant efficiencies, including sharing of signaling links (such as SS7 ISUP/TCAP and IS-41) and interswitching trunks across wireline and wireless subscribers.

Also, with support for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Advance Mobile Phone Systems (AMPS) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), the DMS-100 Wireless system enables service providers to select the technology that best addresses their particular market requirements and opportunities.

Integrated features

As an integrated wireless and wireline switching system, the DMS-100 Wireless platform delivers a fully featured set of services including: !" Full mobility wireless PCS/cellular capabilities, including Short Message Service (SMS),

IS-41 Networking, Wireless data, and Wireless Local Loop (WLL) applications. !" Revenue-generating and service-differentiating DMS-100 system wireline features, such as

xDSL, IP telephony, ISDN, Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN), and leading-edge Centrex and Residential services.

!" An extensive portfolio of radio access technologies, including CDMA, TDMA, and AMPS wireless equipment. This flexibility enables service providers to leverage system efficiencies regardless of which wireless access technology or combination of technologies is deployed.

!" Unique integrated features combined with Intelligent Networking (AIN/WIN) capabilities to support flexible, advanced services, such as single voice mailbox, Integrated Wireless Centrex, and a switch-based, one-number service solution.


228

Integrated Wireless Centrex

Wireless Centrex extends subscriber access to key business features beyond the confines of one’s office walls. The list of integrated features supported includes high-demand, revenue-generating services such as: !" Mobile access to corporate dialing plans (such as 4- or 5-digit abbreviated dialing plans) and

other high-value business features from the mobile phone. !" Single-number service that enables simultaneous ringing of a subscriber’s existing business set

and a standard “twinned” mobile phone. !" A single, unified voice mailbox that serves as a common repository for all messages targeted

to a Wireless Centrex subscriber.

Key Wireless Centrex features

!" Subscribers only need one mobile phone for communication access in both private and public mobility environments.

!" Wireless Centrex, using the DMS-100 Wireless system, provides three key business features integrated on both mobile and wireline sets: #"A private dial plan shared by both wireless and wireline subscribers. #" Integrated voice mail, including messaging waiting indication, for a logically paired mobile

and wireline phone. #" Simultaneous ringing of a subscriber’s mobile handset and wireline phones.

!" Cell site controllers and wireless networking interface equipment can be centralized at the central office. That means less equipment needed at customer premises, with greater opportunity for multiple subscribers to share resources.

!" A range of PCS and cellular air interface technologies (CDMA, TDMA, and AMPS) support the delivery of Wireless Centrex, and other services, to most analog and digital subscribers.

!" A portfolio of minicell, microcell, and picocell options offers flexible solutions for diverse coverage and capacity requirements.

Wireless Centrex benefits

!" By leveraging the strengths of the DMS-100 Wireless platform, Wireless Centrex extends the benefits of Nortel Networks Centrex well beyond the office. This integrated platform helps service providers benefit from network flexibility and significant cost savings.

!" Wireless Centrex helps integrate everyone into the Centrex system. Users who don’t have an office and wireline phone can use standard mobile phones (cellular or PCS) to enjoy the same corporate dialing plan and voice mail system as wireline users.


229

!" Users with desktop and mobile phones benefit from convenient “twinning” of both wireless and wireline phones: incoming calls ring both phones — with similar Centrex features.

!" Mobile users move freely and seamlessly between the private wireless environment and public cellular/PCS environment without interruption.

WIN services

Wireless service providers need to introduce new services to differentiate them from competitors and to stimulate additional airtime usage. Nortel Networks is committed to Wireless Intelligent Networking and the creation of new service choices for wireless subscribers. These choices can help increase revenue, airtime usage, customer satisfaction, and customer retention.

Standards-based design With WIN, service providers can offer new services to their markets quickly, with increased flexibility independent of switching platforms.

ANSI-41D WIN builds on advanced intelligent networking (AIN) concepts and architecture to provide seamless terminal services, personal mobility services, and advanced network services in the mobile environment. AIN capabilities execute service logic programs that reside outside of switching equipment, but work in collaboration with the switching equipment based upon a common definition of call models and protocols.

New WIN IS-771 standards facilitate wireless, next-generation networks — while providing easy and quick service introduction, greater control on service creation, and expanded fraud prevention.

WIN triggers Standards-based WIN triggers, based on events within the basic-state call model, provide intelligent communication between the DMS-100 Wireless system and offboard network elements such as Nortel Networks Wireless Service Node, e-mobility Home Location Register (HLR), and multivendor Service Creation Point (SCP) databases. These triggers support such advanced services as Smart Mobile Access and Wireless Prepaid on the network-based Wireless Service Node. The new triggers introduced by LWW00007 include: !" Originating triggers

#"Pound-only ORREQ trigger builds on WIN standards to support services such as Voice-Activated Dialing (VAD) and a “# +SEND” dialing sequence for user-friendly mobile services.

#"O_Answer trigger provides additional flexible options when developing a WIN-based service. This pre-standards trigger is used in our Pre-paid Service.

#"ORIG-specific dialed digit string trigger is a pre-standards trigger that can be used to verify that a mobile user has the authority to originate a call.


230

!" Terminating triggers #" Standard Terminating_Resource_Available (TRA) trigger notifies the service-logic

element when the terminating resource required for a service has been selected and is available.

#" Standard T_Busy trigger helps expand mobile call completion and enhances customer satisfaction.

#" Standard T_No_Answer trigger expands call coverage for a mobile user and provides additional value to various service applications.

#"Pre-standard T_Disconnect trigger informs the network when either the calling or called party terminates a call.

#"Pre-standard T_Answer trigger alerts network elements that a call has been answered so additional service logic, if required, can begin.

DMS-100 Wireless system hardware requirements

To operate a DMS-100 Wireless system, the minimum system components requirements are: !" Processor (baseline) is the Series 60 processor. The Series 70 Extended Memory (EM)

processor is used for initials and is required for larger wireless systems. !" Digital Trunk Controllers (DTCs) provide voice trunks between the DMS-100 Wireless

switch and the radio subsystem — and interswitch trunking to other nodes and networks. !" Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) provide the air interface to the mobile phones. Many

BTSs are required to cover a given geographical area. They are collocated with the antenna towers commonly referred to as “cell sites.”

!" For CDMA (only): #"Base Station Controller (BSC), collocated with the DMS-100 Wireless system, provides

CDMA voice coding, intrasystem soft handoff and advanced power control required by the CDMA technology.

#"Fiberized Link Interface Shelf (FLIS) or Link Peripheral Processor (LPP). When deploying Nortel Networks BSCs, this cabinet is equipped with CDMA Interface Units (CIUs), CDMA Application Units (CAUs), and Resource Manager Units (RMUs) to interface to the radio subsystem components for mobile phone call setup, registration, and intersystem handoff control messaging. For Open-A Interface, the LPP is configured with A-Interface Control Elements (ACEs) and Base Station Application Part (BSAP) Link Interface Units (LIUs).

!" For AMPS and TDMA (only): Intelligent Cellular Peripheral (ICP) Module, a peripheral module of the DMS-100 Wireless system, provides the interconnection to the AMPS and TDMA cell sites, and works with the DMS-Core to provide mobility and subscriber management, handoff control, and cell site OAM connectivity.


231

!" For TDMA (only): Enhanced Digital Signal Processing Module (EDSPM), a peripheral module of the DMS-100 Wireless system, provides performs the digital voice coding required by the TDMA technology.

About LWW00007 wireless features

The LWW00007 software load combines the key features of the LEC00013 (wireline) release, detailed in the previous Feature Planning Guide (50004.11/02-00 Issue 21), along with the key features of the MTX09 (wireless) release, discussed on the following pages.

Important licensing note For consistency, the system’s wireless features share the same Common

Product Code (CPC) numbers used to license DMS-MTX features. Thus, all the feature descriptions in this chapter show licensing

information by CPC number instead of by order code. All wireline features are licensed with the order code numbering scheme.

LWW00007 is the last scheduled PCL presently planned for the DMS-100 Wireless system. While there are no current plans for new feature development, we will continue to provide regulatory and critical robustness features for the DMS-100 Wireless system in special software patches. And all systems in the field continue to receive full Nortel Networks customer service support, up to a future end-of-life announcement. Recommended migration paths include an upgrade to DMS-MTX system, DMS-100/200 system, or Succession packet telephony solution.


232

Optional base features

Nortel Networks AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA systems offer a wide variety of features and services for network and subscriber applications. The optional software features on this and the next page provide basic, foundational capabilities for the system.

FLEXIBLE ISUP — PHASE II A07716541 Provides ISUP enhancements to the DMS-100 Wireless platform.

Flexible ISUP — Phase II LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables service providers to tailor ISDN User Part (ISUP) on the DMS-100 Wireless system according to their specific market needs, providing a more flexible platform for call processing messages and parameters.

Selected examples of the added functionality provided in Phase II include flexibility for: !" Nature of Address (NOA) of the Called Party Number parameter in the International

Telecommunication Union (ITU) Initial Address Message (IAM) !" Presentation restriction Indicator field of the Original Called Number (OCN) parameter in

the ANSI (American National Standards Institute) and ITU IAM.

The second phase builds on top of the first phase of the Flexible ISUP software, delivered in LWW00006. Customers who have already purchased Flexible ISUP Phase I will receive Phase II at no additional charge.

Phase I provides functionality mainly for the OUTGOING IAM ISUP message. For example, it allows the service provider to append certain optional parameters to the ISUP IAM or to block them from transmission.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Provides connectivity to voice mail systems and prepaid systems via ISUP !" Enables rapid deployment of a country’s ISUP variant in a new market !" Allows wireless service providers to connect to, and comply with, their public switched

telephone network (PSTN) or various offboard platforms using ISUP

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: Base ISUP (ITU or ANSI) software is required


233

SPECTRUM PERIPHERAL MODULE A0806992 Offers a new, multi-application high-speed platform technology that provides a flexible, cost-effective, and highly reliable architecture for future application development.

Spectrum Peripheral Module LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature expands the capabilities of the multi-faceted Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) on the system. Previously, the SPM was limited to routing wireline calls or routing wireless calls that are first routed over ISL trunks. Now, LWW00007 enables the SPM to route wireless calls directly over ANSI ISUP trunks, bypassing the ISL trunk requirement.

The SPM peripheral supports a direct, 1+1 redundant, optical carrier level 3 (OC-3) trunking interface for the DMS-100 Wireless system. Serving as a high-capacity feeder into the existing DMS-100 Wireless system, the SPM supports — over high-capacity OC-3 trunks — more than four times as many T1 trunks as a single Digital Trunk Controller (terminating up to 2016 DS-0 channels). This helps reduce on-going operating costs through: !" Reduced footprint (up to 6.5 times less space to support the same trunking). !" Enhanced cable management (more than 14 times cable termination reduction). !" Less power and air conditioning (around 5 times less). !" Eliminates the need for associated multiplexers, digital cross-connects, and external echo

cancellers.

More information about the many benefits of the Spectrum Peripheral Module can be found in the Trunk access solutions chapter, beginning on page 94.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Now that the DMS-100 Wireless system can route wireless calls directly over ANSI ISUP trunks, this software expands the many benefits of SPM, especially the reduction of on-going operating costs. By directly connecting fiber interfaces to the system, the SPM helps create a true end-to-end optical network with redundant links and lower bit error rate, as well as providing an evolvable platform to support future voice-over-packet interfaces.


234

e-mobility services

e-mobility provides the ultimate migration to the network of the future, and Nortel Networks provides the building blocks, built on Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) solutions, that integrate voice and data networks for 3G and beyond.

WIN STANDARDS PHASE I A0716560 Enables service providers to quickly deliver new services to markets with increased flexibility that is independent of switch platforms.

ORREQ Message Enhancements LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enhances the HLR so it can detect “Continue” situations associated with WIN services where the digits in an ANSI-41 Origination Request (ORREQ) are the same as those returned in the ORREQ response. In ANSI-41D, the LocationAreaID (LOCID) parameter must be encoded in a carrier-definable format. This feature supports the encoding format of the LOCID parameter sent in an IS-41P ORREQ to the Signal Soft format. The DMS-100 Wireless Mobile Switching Center (MSC) will set a billing flag in the Call Detail Record to indicate that the call launched an ORREQ and successfully received a response.

Note: service providers that only require this feature, and not the full functionality of A0716560, can license ORREQ Message Enhancements alone with CPC A0716559.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

In the WIN architecture, various network elements — such as Service Control Points, Service Nodes, Stand-Alone HLR, and Intelligent Peripherals — provide services on platforms other than the switching system. This feature enhances communications between the DMS-100 Wireless system and these dispersed nodes to help make network-based service delivery flexible and faster.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: WIN Network Architecture Elements, ANSI-41, and SS7 networking hardware

Intelligent Peripheral CONNECT/DISCONNECT Reset Timer LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

Based on Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) IS-771 standards, this feature enhances the existing WIN Standards Phase 1 software product by enabling service providers to connect a subscriber to an Intelligent Peripheral (IP) when an Intelligent Network-based service requires a voice or data exchange between the end user and the IP. This feature also provides a standardized implementation for Release Link Trunk and continues DMS system compliance with WIN industry standards.


235

In developing a network-based service where it is important to handle each call appropriately to ensure satisfaction, this functionality provides enhanced value to service applications. Call handling instructions from the service control point (SCP) could require identification digits or an interactive voice response for additional information before the call continues routing. The service application at the SCP makes the decision based on the service attributes.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Addresses specific service and market needs with flexibility in call handling. !" Creates competitive differentiation via the ability to provide call handling solutions.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: DCCH Base (A0716525 or A0716524)

Hardware: Transmit Receive Unit II (TRU II), TRU III, TRU 1900, or TRU III 1900

Pound-Only ORREQ Trigger

LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides additional functionality to the existing Originating WIN Standards, Phase 1 software by creating a switch-based “Pound Only” Origination Return Request (ORREQ) trigger to launch an ORREQ message to a Service Control Point (SCP) network element.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This user-friendly feature simplifies how a wireless subscriber uses a network service, such as Voice-Activated Dialing (VAD), by using a “#”+SEND dialing sequence. This minimizes the number of keys a subscriber must press to activate, use, or deactivate network services.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: WIN Network Architecture Elements, ANSI-41 and SS7 networking hardware

ORREQ MESSAGE ENHANCEMENTS A0716559

LWW00007

Delivers this one feature from A0716560 (see previous page) for service providers that do not require the full functionality of WIN Standards Phase I.

WIN STANDARDS PHASE I – UPGRADE A0716559 A0716561

LWW00007

Upgrades service providers who already have A0716559 licensed to the full functionality of A0716560.


236

WIN T_ANSWER DETECTION POINT A0802640 Enhances the DMS-100 Wireless system’s ability to detect, arm, and process triggers for service applications in a WIN environment.

WIN T_Answer Detection Point LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

When a terminating mobile user registers to a Mobile Switching Center – Switch (MSC-S), the T_Answer Detection Point and its pre-standards trigger, the T_ANSWER message, are received in the Visitor Location Register (VLR). When the call is answered, the system detects the T_Answer trigger and sends a TANSWER message to the Service Control Function (SCF) in the network, providing the opportunity for additional feature processing by the SCF.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Service providers can use this feature for added flexibility in developing a WIN-based service application, such as Wireless Prepaid services.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: A0716560 WIN Standards Phase I

WIN T_DISCONNECT DETECTION POINT A0802641

Enhances the DMS-100 Wireless system’s ability to detect, arm, and process triggers for service applications in a WIN environment.

WIN T_Disconnect Detection Point LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

The T_Disconnect Detection Point and its associated TDISCONNECT message enable the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to notify the network Service Control Function that a call has ended, regardless of whether the call was terminated by the calling party (Originating Mobile User) or the called party (Termination Mobile User).

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Service providers can use this feature for added flexibility in developing a WIN-based service application, such as Wireless Prepaid services.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: A0716560 WIN Standards Phase I


237

FLEXIBLE GTT TYPE FOR ORREQ ROUTING A0716542 Enhances the existing software product by enabling carriers to define the appropriate GTT translation type when routing ANSI-41D ORREQ messages.

Flexible GTT Type for ORREQ Routing LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This functionality allows the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to define the translation set that the Signal Transfer Point (STP) will use to route Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) ORREQ messages.

With this functionality, the service provider route special services (such as 611 ORREQs) to one Service Control Point (SCP) for service application and then route another (such as 911 ORREQs) to a different SCP for appropriate handling.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Uses Global Title Translations (GTT) to route ANSI-41 ORREQ network messages with service provider-defined translation types on a per-dialed number trigger.

!" Enables the service provider to define the appropriate GTT Translation Type (range 0 to 255) for each MSC-based dialed number trigger.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: WIN00010 WIN Network Architecture Elements

Hardware: Elements to support WIN00010, ANSI-41, and SS7 networking


238

Nortel Networks Base Station subsystem

Nortel Networks CDMA networks use much more distributed intelligence than is found in analog networks. The software that runs these intelligent devices is called the Nortel Networks Base Station Subsystem (NBSS). Nortel Networks issues the software in NBSSx.x releases that match the MTXxx release cycle (for example, the NBSS counterpart to the MTX09 software in LWW00007 is NBSS9.0). Nortel Networks delivers the NBSS software on CD-ROM that service providers install through the CDMA BSS Manager. The NBSS CD-ROM includes all operating software for the CDMA BSS Manager, BSC, and base stations — and can be downloaded across the BSS network. NBSS9.x releases can be loaded into the off-line BSC, which is then switched into service, keeping downtime to a minimum during the software upgrade process.

Many NBSS features work with counterparts in the MTX software releases to make the functionality of those switch-related features fully functional across the entire CDMA network.

The following table identifies the MTX and NBSS software loads that a service provider must have to use specific features. As with all Nortel Networks software loads since MTX03, features available in an earlier release continue to be available in later releases.

NBSS name Description MTX release NBSS release

NBSS6.1 Short Message Service Subscriber Access Control OAM Enhancements

MTX05 NBSS6.1

NBSS6.2 Inter-System Soft Handoff Analog CCH for CDMA Coverage OAM Enhancements

MTX06 NBSS6.2

NBSS6.3 Support for i960 Processor OAM Enhancements MTX06 NBSS6.3

NBSS7.0 Authentication Circuit Switched Data and Fax Dual BSCs per DMS-100 Wireless Domain Enhanced Hard Handoff Triggers Fast Connect Inter BSC Soft Handoff International Configuration Support Multi Pilot Hard Handoff Over The Air Service Provisioning (OTASP) Prioritization & Overload Control Smart MCTA Software Versioning Phase II Service Negotiation Enhancements OAM Enhancements

MTX07 NBSS7.0


239

NBSS name Description MTX release NBSS release

NBSS 7.1 Multicarrier Support Metro Cell Minicell CDMA BSS Manager

MTX07 NBSS7.1

NBSS 8.0 IS-41C Hard Handoff Multi-Mode Hard Handoff CDMA Payphone Support Tiered Billing CIU/CAU Processor Upgrade Enhanced Selector Card with EVRC Global Support for Circuit Switched Data Mobile Originated SMS OAM Enhancements

NBSS 8.1 ATM BSC Expansion Metro Cell Software Enhancements Carrier Growth Solutions Maintainability/Supportability Enhancements MTX Cell Expansion

NBSS 8.2 Rural Cell SmartRate

MTX08 NBSS8.0

NBSS9.0 Intelligent Paging Intelligent Voice Service Negotiation Access Robustness Package BSS Manager Operational Enhancements CDSU Link Utilization NBSS Settable Parameters Account Code Billing Enhancements CDMA LTX Program Over Decadic Digit Support CDMA Cell Number Increase

MTX09 NBSS9.0

New for LWW00007 The CDMA Fiber Optic MicroCell Base Station increases site design options by separating fiber optic cable up to one kilometer from either the Metro Cell or Minicell Digital Enclosure. By mounting this radio enclosure near the serving antenna, cable loss can be virtually eliminated and CDMA coverage can be enhanced in challenging locations.

This new offering features a compact, modular design that houses the radio transmitters and receivers, and provides a high-capacity, multicarrier base station to support 800 MHz and 1900 MHz networks.


240

Service provider features

This section discusses a new standard feature (no licensing required) that helps the service provider guard against revenue loss due to fraud.

DMS-100 WIRELESS BASE STANDARD Provides the software infrastructure for other order codes.

DIMA Blocking LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables a number of bundled features: !" Selectively blocks Direct Inward Mobile Access (DIMA) terminations to a range of Mobile

Identification Numbers (MIN) or just-to-home subscribers. !" Introduces a new treatment, DIMA Denied Termination Response (DDTR), when DIMA

calls are blocked. !" Enables service providers to prevent prepaid subscribers from bypassing the prepaid

platform (and thus being charged for a call) by having callers place calls through the roamer access port (DIMA).

!" Creates a DDTR instead of a page timeout treatment when a user roams out of a DIMA Mobile Service Region (MSR) and someone calls this user’s mobile.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This software helps service providers end a source of revenue loss by preventing prepaid subscribers from bypassing the Direct Inward Mobile Access platform.


241

CDMA-specific features

The following pages discuss new standard features (no licensing required) and optional features (licensed by CPC number) specific to the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) radio environment.

DMS-100 WIRELESS BASE STANDARD

Provides the software infrastructure for other order codes.

CDMA BSS Manager Operational Enhancements for NBSS 9.0 LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhanced tool helps simplify upgrades, minimize human error, and reduce the time and effort required to successfully implement CDMA networks.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Decreases deployment time of Nortel Networks Base Station Subsystem (NBSS) expansions

!" Improves a service provider’s ability to manage data !" Supports Inter-System Soft Handoff (ISSHO) and upcoming features for domestic and

international markets

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0

CDMA MTX Cell Expansion LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables a service provider to increase the number of cell sites in a network from 300 to 512, more effectively using the infrastructure equipment. This enables service providers to address market requirements for increased capacity through CDMA DMS-100 Wireless system cell expansion.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Permits the number of cell sites on a network to be increased !" Supports ATM BSC port expansion !" Adds service provider value through increased infrastructure use

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0


242

CDMA MTX Cell Number Increase LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This standard feature enables service providers to implement a cell numbering scheme that ranges from zero to 2047. With this feature, the service provider’s present infrastructure can better accommodate subscriber base expansion. Also, the benefits of CDMA architecture evolution programs — such as Metro Cell, Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Phases, and 3G — are maximized.

This feature is designed for Nortel Networks CDMA radio configurations and does not apply to Open A Interface configurations.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Extends the coverage area / number of cell sites supported by each DMS-100 Wireless system

!" Removes cell datafill restrictions associated with overlay networks !" Eliminates datafill as a limiting factor in network growth !" Expands service provider value through increased infrastructure use

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0

Intelligent Voice Service Negotiation LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This standard feature provides voice service re-direction prior to traffic channel setup for all CDMA calls. This functionality enables service providers to: !" Offer an alternative voice service option that is preferred by the system, but differs from

the one requested by the mobile. !" Assign an alternative voice service option when there are no resources available for the

service requested by the mobile.

This software helps maximize the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) usage — while maintaining voice quality to mobile subscribers. CDMA service providers can use the EVRC as the preferred service option and provision the Base Station Controller/Mobile Switching Center (BSC/MSC) to: !" Assign EVRC to EVRC-capable mobiles if there are EVRC resources available. !" Offer 13K voice service to mobiles that support 13K but do not support EVRC. !" Provide 8K voice service, if required, to mobiles that support 8K only.


243

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Maximizes traffic channel capacity through EVRC usage !" Provides exceptional voice quality !" Supports 8K/EVRC to 13K service re-direction

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0

INTELLIGENT PAGING A0791358 Reduces the paging traffic within a CDMA network by restricting subscriber paging to a particular group of cells and carriers, based upon the subscriber’s last registration location.

Intelligent Paging LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This paging mechanism helps reduce paging traffic overhead associated with system-wide paging and to minimize the impact on the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) Controller’s processing capability and the IS-95 Paging Channel. This reduction, in turn, enables these resources to handle more in-cell traffic and system-wide features.

Implementing this feature enables the Intelligent Paging mechanism to page a particular group of cell sites and carriers based upon the subscriber’s last registration within the system.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This optional order code: !" Enhances capacity on the BTS Controller and paging channel. !" Increases the paging success rate at the Inter-System Soft Hand-off (ISSHO)

border. !" Reduces registrations at the ISSHO border.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0


244

ACCESS ROBUSTNESS PACKAGE A0791359 Delivers three IS-95B features that enhance the current access process and help reduce a service provider’s system access failure rates.

Access Robustness Package LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

Combining the following capabilities into the Soft Handoff feature can help reduce an IS-95B network access failure rate by approximately 25 percent. !" Channel Assignment provides additional channel assignments by transmitting an

Extended Channel Assignment Message to the mobile to set up an immediate soft handoff situation when it enters the traffic state.

!" Access Handoff enables a mobile to search for the Extended Channel Assignment Message on an alternate sector if the mobile detects a loss of the reference sector’s Paging Channel.

!" Access Entry Handoff enables the mobile to change serving base stations prior to entering the System Access state.

A mobile triggers a handoff if it experiences signal degradation when it receives a Page message on the original Paging channel. By reducing the number of access failures, a service provider can drastically reduce lost revenues and increase end-user customer satisfaction.

Implementation of these capabilities enables the mobile to change the serving base stations prior to entering the System Access State and can result in an approximately overall three percent improvement to the network Page response reliability in an IS-95B network.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Reduces call access failures to 1.5 – 3 percent !" Decreases potential access failure rate by approximately 25 percent !" Offers enhanced reliability and performance !" Increases service provider revenue by capturing lost calls !" Minimizes churn due to poor coverage !" Promotes customer satisfaction

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0


245

CDMA LTX PROGRAM A0791853 Serves as the base platform for wireless-to-wireline convergence, with V5.2 as the first access protocol supported on this platform

CDMA LTX Program LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

Limited spectrum availability and the deregulated regulatory/competitive environment are driving market expansion to the point that the need for telephone access often exceeds an incumbent network provider’s ability to meet those demands or to cost-effectively implement a wireline infrastructure.

CDMA LTX offers a series of solutions for wireless-to-wireline converge. Applications include: !" V5.2 network interface on the Base Station Controller (BSC) — The V5.2 access

protocol is an air-independent interface that will support both 800 MHz and 1900 MHz Base Station Subsystem (BSS) equipment currently part of Nortel Networks CDMA portfolio. The CDMA LTX platform enhances the Fixed Wireless offering by providing direct access to services and features from existing Local Exchanges and the PSTN without requiring a DMS-100 Wireless or DMS-MTX switch. This capability enables a service provider use the CDMA RF architecture to support fixed wireless access via V5.2 using an existing Class 5 switch.

!" V5.2 payphone metering pulses support — This feature provides IS-95B compliance to 12KHz and 16 KHz Metering Pulses for CDMA payphone support, giving service providers more control over tariffs applied to payphone applications and helping to reduce fraud.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Supports both 800 MHz and 1900 MHz BSS equipment !" Leverages an existing switch investment !" Gives service providers more control over payphone tariffs !" Helps reduce fraud

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: NBSS 9.0


246

TDMA-specific features

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Personal Communications Services (PCS) networks provide service providers access to the digital information frontier without compromising voice quality or inconveniencing subscribers. Moreover, these PCS solutions from Nortel Networks leverage an integrated architecture that can provide voice, data, and Internet services.

Along with industry-leading reliability, high call-handling capacity, versatile software-defined DualMode Radio Units, and comprehensive revenue-generating services, Nortel Networks TDMA PCS Networks offer industry-leading RF capacity and audio quality; advanced operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) capabilities for flexible network management; and a Telcordia Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) compliant Q3 interface.

Designed for networks operating at 800 MHz and 1900 MHz, TDMA PCS Networks provide subscribers with new service choices made possible by the DMS-100 Wireless Mobile Switching Center and Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) products. Nortel Networks solutions help service providers fulfill the communications needs of subscribers wherever they are: at home, in the office, outdoors, in public places, or on the road. Moreover, these network solutions enable service providers to offer what their roaming subscribers want: seamless, integrated voice and data services that put them at the heart of the Internet revolution.

Our TDMA PCS Networks provide: !" The market-proven platform for PCS at both 800 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency

bands. !" Increased capacity, efficient coverage and an ideal solution for new technologies and

wireless Internet applications. !" An evolution path to 3G technologies and the unified packet-centric networks of the

future.


247

DUALMODE – TRU II DIGITAL RADIO NTAX98AA Offers significant service flexibility and cost-effective use of spectrum.

DualMode – TRU II Digital Radio LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

As the industry’s first digital signal processing-based transceiver and the core of Nortel Networks DualMode family of cell site solutions, the DualMode Transmit Receive Unit II (TRU II) digital radio enables dynamic allocation of AMPS and TDMA on a per-call basis. The DualMode TRU II Radio can also dynamically change between CDPD and AMPS personalities and can be designated as a Mobile Data Base Station for CDPD applications.

The TRU II radio supports the 800 MHz cellular market in the following configurations, all available today.

Configuration Description 0T +1C A digital control channel (DCCH) is present on one timeslot; the

other two timeslots do not carry digital traffic channels 3T Supports three digital voice traffic channels DLR Supports one digital locate receiver ATCH Supports one analog voice traffic channel ACCH Supports one analog control channel ALR Supports one analog locate receiver Dual-Mode Can be configured to a digital traffic channel or to an analog traffic

channel as required CDPD Supports Cellular Digital Packet Data

The TRU II operates with the following platforms:

Platform Power amplifier Notes NT800DR MPA, SCLPA, FMPA+ * High-power; rural applications MicroCell None • Low power

• Very small cold spots • In-building coverage

MetroCell DPA Medium power MiniCell Urban

MCPA (50W)

DualMode 800 Enclosure MCPA (110W)

Outdoor cell site

*FMPA+ does not support Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD).


248

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" May be used with a variety of amplifier and cell site configurations. !" Operates as a voice channel or control channel or locate receiver in analog, digital or dual

mode to offer service providers simplified network planning. !" Eliminates over-provisioning of cell sites by automatically adapting to a changing mix of

analog and digital subscribers. !" Simplifies upgrades and maintenance by using software downloads from the DMS-100

Wireless system.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: Integrated Cellular Remote Module (ICRM) or ICRM+

DUALMODE – TRU III DIGITAL RADIO NTAW99AA Offers a high-performance AMPS and TDMA digital radio that uses advanced digital signal processing (DSP) and microcontroller technology.

DualMode – TRU III Digital Radio LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

The Transmit Receive Unit III (TRU III) digital radio offers higher digital control channel (DCCH) throughput and supports IS-136 standards evolution and enhanced features to meet the needs of future growth in capacity and performance. This solution helps reduce the number of radios required by supporting multiple DCCHs on a single radio.

The TRU III radio supports the 800 MHz cellular market in the following configurations, all available today.

Configuration Description 0T +1C A digital control channel (DCCH) is present on one timeslot; the

other two timeslots do not carry digital traffic channels 2T +1C A DCCH is present on one timeslot and the other two timeslots are

configured as digital traffic channels 1T + 2C Two DCCHs are present on two timeslots and the third timeslot is

configured as a digital traffic channel 3T Supports three digital voice traffic channels DLR Supports one digital locate receiver ATCH Supports one analog voice traffic channel ACCH Supports one analog control channel ALR Supports one analog locate receiver Dual-Mode Can be configured to a digital traffic channel or to an analog traffic

channel as required


249

The TRU III operates with the following platforms:

Platform Power amplifier Notes NT800DR SCLPA High-power; rural applications

MicroCell None • Low power • Very small cold spots • In-building coverage

MetroCell DPA Medium power

MiniCell

Urban MCPA (50W)

DualMode 800 Enclosure MCPA (110W)

Outdoor cell site

New functionality on the TRU III in LWW00007 includes: !" Full AMPS functionality. !" Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) functionality (including backing up a TRU II DLR). !" Increased DCCH capability (2C + 1T) by supporting up to 2 Digital Control Channels on

two timeslots, and still provide Digital Traffic Channel service on the third timeslot. !" Ability to configure and debug the TRU III via the Remote Radio Interface (RRIF).

This enables service providers to adjust the operating parameters of the radios to achieve network optimization by minimizing the potential for dropped calls and co-channel interference and enhancing audio quality and service for wireless subscribers.

!" Ability to perform a self-generated bit error-rate (BER) test on both sides of the radio: #"On the switch side with the Digital Signal Processor Module (DSPM) or the Enhanced

DSPM #"On the peripheral side with the RF mobile or test equipment This feature helps simplify and speed equipment commissioning and troubleshooting.

!" Reduction of the time to provision TRU III radios from 20-40 minutes to less than 10 minutes, by using the B-Channel to load the radios. This feature increases the throughput from 8Kbps to 64Kbps during loading procedures.

!" A DLR Pooling feature on TRU III yields performance improvements over the implementation on TRU II, by saving time on two frames when choosing the DVCC Validation mode.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

As of LWW00007, the enhanced TRU III: !" Substantially increases versatility !" Can now be employed as back up for AMPS functionality !" Can be employed as back up for Digital Locate Receiver functionality


250

!" Offers new revenue potential with value-added services and more digital subscribers !" Helps reduce OAM costs by enabling remote debugging from a centralized location !" Increases call capacity and revenue streams through increased message handling capability

(up to two DCCH with LWW00007) !" Introduces DualMode to support TDMA and AMPS on a dynamic basis !" Leverages a service provider’s investment in the Nortel Networks infrastructure. TRU III

operates within the existing DMS-100 Wireless hardware topology with no additional hardware required

!" Increases test coverage during commissioning or during debugging !" Reduces the time for equipment commissioning or troubleshooting !" Reduces cell site provisioning time to less than 10 minutes by using the B-Channel to load

software on single or multiple TRU III radios at a single cell site

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: ICRM or ICRM+


251

TDMA/AMPS-specific features

This section discusses new standard features (no licensing required) and optional features (licensed by CPC number) specific to both Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) and Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) deployment.

KNOWLEDGE-BASED HANDOFF A0787650 Helps significantly reduce Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) loading and maximizes the effectiveness of the DLR Pooling feature.

Knowledge-Based Handoff LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This software can significantly reduce DLR loading and maximizes the effectiveness of the DLR Pooling feature.

Without this feature, Mobile Assisted HandOff (MAHO) triggered handoffs are performed by estimating the reverse Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) of the server and the target using parameters such as voice channel time in time out values and effective radio power deltas and are backed up by the DLR confirmations on the reverse link. This increases the DLR load and can cause handoff triggers based on MAHO readings to be rejected by the DLR readings, causing handoff retries and possible cell dragging.

With this feature, handoff candidates are screened by the TRU only, using MAHO RSSI readings based on forward-to-forward comparisons for the serving and candidate RSSI. The DLR is not used to validate a RSSI threshold. Because the DLR load is reduced, service providers can reduce the number of DLRs needed per cell. In addition, handoff speeds are improved and cell dragging is reduced, resulting in improved call quality.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Improves handoff speed and reduces cell dragging !" Reduces DLR loading up to 50 percent and can lower the number of DLRs needed per

sector !" Enhances the DLR Pooling feature by reducing the number of DLR radios required per

cell, thus maximizing the benefit of pooling DLRs from across three sectors

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: None. However, can be used in conjunction with the DLR Pooling feature (see next) to further reduce the number of DLRs required per cell site

Hardware: TRU II, TRU III, TRU 1900, or TRU III 1900


252

DIGITAL LOCATE RECEIVER (DLR) POOLING A0787427 Helps cut capital requirements by reducing the number of radios needed per cell to perform DLR functions.

Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) Pooling LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature reduces the number of DLR radios required per cell by pooling DLRs across different sectors. Without this feature, each sector in a cell must have a minimum of one DLR. This means a tri-sectored cell requires radios dedicated to performing DLR functions — regardless of the total DLR load requirements and often resulting in each DLR operating at less than capacity. With this feature, the DLR load determines the number of required DLRs, lowering the total number of DLRs needed per sector by eliminating the one DLR per sector requirement.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Eliminates the one DLR per sector requirement and reduces the number of DLR radios required per cell by pooling DLRs from across three sectors.

!" Lowers network cost of ownership by enabling redeployment of DLRs to serve as traffic radios.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: None. But note the Knowledge Based Handoff feature (see previous) can be used in conjunction with DLR Pooling to further reduce DLR requirements

TIME AND DATE SUPPORT A0799293 Downloads the current time and date to subscriber handsets.

Time and Date Support LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables a subscriber’s handset to download the current time and date from the DMS-100 Wireless system.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

TDMA service providers can encourage the use of handsets as pager replacements and can now compete more effectively with CDMA and GSM service providers who can already offer this functionality.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: DCCH Base (A0716525 or A0716524)



253

EX93AB (EX93AA EVOLUTION) A0782699 Carries the existing TDMA platform into the next generation of DMS-100 Wireless services.

EX93AB (EX93AA Evolution) LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature provides software support for an enhanced Digital Speech and Data Coder. NTEX93AB provides sufficient MIPS (millions of instructions per second) and memory to carry the existing TDMA platform into the next generation of DMS-100 Wireless services.

Nortel Networks will use the EX93AB in: !" Enhanced Digital Signal Processing Module (EDSPM) !" An upgraded Digital Signal Processing Module (DSPM) !" Meridian Enhanced Digital Processor (MEDP)

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

By doubling the MIPS capacity, the new NTEX93AB Digital Speech and Data Coder helps lower the cost of network ownership for the same subscriber base. Additionally, EX93AB helps maintain Nortel Networks voice quality leadership by providing the MIPS and memory needed for future feature developments beyond the current capacity of the EX93AA.

MULTIPLE DIGITAL CHANNEL CONTROL A0802652 Allows the service provider to support a growing digital subscriber base and to continue adding to the portfolio of value-added TDMA services.

Multiple Digital Channel Control LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature boosts the number of digital control channels (DCCH) per partition to provide the capacity that dense TDMA networks require for deploying complex features. The service provider can deploy additional DCCH on the same frequency as the initial DCCH in a 2 Control/1 Traffic channel (2C+T) configuration.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Supports an expanding digital subscriber base. !" Increases revenue potential with value-added services and more digital subscribers.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: Base DCCH software Hardware: TRU III (800 or 1900 MHz) radios


254

INTER/INTRA SYSTEM HANDOFF PARITY A0787648 Increases handoff speeds and reduces cell dragging.

Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature increases the speed of handoff execution by as much as 15 percent, reducing cell dragging and enhancing call quality. Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity makes the handoff process for intersystem and intrasystem handoffs the same. This results in a reduction in process delays for intersystem handoffs and simplifies handoff parameter datafill by providing uniform target cell selection and handoff execution parameters for inter- and intra-system handoffs.

This software also shortens the handoff timer for intersystem handoff to two seconds and intrasystem handoff to one second.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Speeds handoff execution. !" Reduces cell dragging and dropped calls. !" Enhances call quality.

MULTIPLE LAPD TO CELLSITE A0798854 Enables the addition of extra control links between the ICP and the ICRM.

Multiple LAPD to Cellsite LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional feature addresses messaging throughput needs in high-volume networks by allowing the addition of extra control links between the Intelligent Cellular Peripheral (ICP) and the Integrated Cellular Remote Module (ICRM) in scenarios where cell sites need additional messaging bandwidth.

Providing a secondary messaging channel (DS-0) enables service providers with high-volume networks to take full advantage of ICRM processing power by increasing the throughput on the LAPD (Link Access Procedures on the D Channel) links between the ICP and ICRM in a cell site. Assigning an additional DS-0 as an active data link helps prevent messaging bottlenecks from developing between the ICP and ICRM at cell sites with very high Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) or paging messages, such as Short Messaging Service (SMS) and Message Waiting Indication (MWI).

Note: Multiple LAPD is not compatible with the Drop and Insert (DNI) feature at the same cell site.


255

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This optional feature can be deployed at cell sites that require additional bandwidth. Its leading-edge design: !" Helps service providers meet increasing capacity needs due to message-intensive features

without actually investing in new cell sites. Depending on traffic patterns, service providers may be able to use the secondary messaging channel to increase capacity as much as 14 percent.

!" Provides the critical ability to accommodate bursts or spikes in capacity

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: Messaging ISDN Signaling Pre-processor (MISP)

QUALITY-DRIVEN CHANNEL SELECTION A0787653 Enables service providers to increase call quality while spending less time collecting data and less time optimizing network performance.

Quality-Driven Channel Selection LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This software offering bundles three features: !" Quality-Driven Channel Selection (QCS) improves the quality of the channel selection

part of the current RF performance optimization process by adapting channel selections in response to changing RF conditions. This improves the interference performance by using proprietary Nortel Networks algorithms that use forward and reverse channel quality indicators to rank voice channels based on active and idle call noise.

!" Bit error rate (BER) System Performance Metrics provides the ability to evaluate BER performance parameters at the sector level.

!" Per Radio Call Drop Reporting provides an additional evaluation tool to further fine-tune RF parameters and improves call quality by tracking the occurrence of dropped calls on each radio.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Enhances call quality by adapting channel selection to changing RF conditions !" Decreases the time needed to optimize the network by collecting and reporting perfor-

mance data

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: TRU II, TRU III, or TRU 1900


256

VOICE CHANNEL TIME IN TIME OUT (VCHTITO) A0787654 Enables service providers to increase call quality while spending less time collecting data and troubleshooting dropped calls.

Voice Channel Time In Time Out (VCHTITO) LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the service provider to calculate VCHTITO values for each call in a selected sector, providing average and standard deviation values. This VCHTITO information can be presented in logs to help calibrate the path balance in a given call.

This feature also enables the service provider to view network performance by evaluating BER performance parameters at the sector level. In addition, this feature provides a user-enabled tool that collects VCHTITO statistics for every radio on a given sector. This radio information can be used to gauge the performance of the radio and enable the optimization engineer to determine the source of dropped calls and improve future call quality.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Improves call quality by more accurately defining handoff boundaries. !" Decreases the time needed to optimize the network by providing collecting and reporting

performance data.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES



257

Fraud control features

Nortel Networks continues to work closely with our customers to define and develop a strong portfolio of management tools for both fraud prevention and detection. These tools are available through features and services on the DMS-100 Wireless system, such as Authentication and Roamer Verification and Reinstatement — or through corresponding third-party service platforms that use information from the DMS-100 Wireless platform to detect fraudulent activities.

PER SUBSCRIBER ROAMING BY MSCID A0716567

Enables the service provider to grant roaming privileges on a per-subscriber basis to allow service within high-fraud markets.

Per Subscriber Roaming by MSCID LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This optional feature enhances the Roamer Verification and Reinstatement (RVR) software by enabling the service provider to grant roaming privileges on a per-subscriber and per Mobile Switching Center Identification (MSCID) basis to allow or deny service within high-fraud markets.

A service provider can define multiple RVR group profiles and assign them to mobile subscribers to suit each subscriber’s roaming needs. Only those subscribers who are assigned a profile may roam in high-fraud areas without having to undergo reinstatement. If a subscriber roams into a high-fraud area that is not included in his profile, this feature can route the subscriber to the service provider’s home customer care center for reinstatement.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature offers new, flexible options to the service provider to combat unauthorized roamer access in high-fraud areas — while providing consistent service to legitimate mobile subscribers.


258

Cell sites – 1900 MHz

With high-power output, our modular, high-density 1900 MHz PCS cell sites feature low site noise with superior coverage.

TRU III 1900 RADIO TRANSCEIVER A0736181

Introduces a new radio offering in the Nortel Networks 1900 MHz portfolio.

TRU III 1900 Radio Transceiver LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

The Transmit Receive Unit III (TRU III) 1900 Radio Transceiver is a high-performance TDMA digital radio that uses an advanced digital signal processor (DSP) and microcontroller technology. It also offers higher DCCH throughput and supports IS-136 standards evolution and enhanced features to meet the needs of future growth in capacity and performance.

Serving as a direct radio, the TRU III 1900 minimizes EMI/EMC risks associated with co-location of 800 MHz and 1900 MHz equipment. With optimal two-branch diversity and maximal ratio combining performance, this radio covers the full 60MHz PCS band and enhances receiver performance.

The TRU III 1900 radio supports the 1900 MHz PCS market in the following configurations, all available today.

Configuration Description

0T +1C A digital control channel (DCCH) is present on one timeslot; the other two timeslots do not carry digital traffic channels

2T +1C A DCCH is present on one timeslot and the other two timeslots are configured as digital traffic channels

1T + 2C Two DCCHs are present on two timeslots and the third timeslot is configured as a digital traffic channel

3T Supports three digital voice traffic channels

DLR Supports one digital locate receiver

The TRU III operates with the following platforms:

Platform Power amplifier Notes

TDMA 1900 MacroCell Indoor

TDMA 1900 MacroCell Outdoor SCLPA High power; rural

Low power; urban


259

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Substantially increases versatility !" Can be employed as back up for Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) functionality !" Offers new revenue potential with value-added services and more digital subscribers !" Helps reduce OAM costs by enabling remote debugging from a centralized location !" Decreases radio downtime and increases customer service !" Increases call capacity and revenue streams through increased message handling capability

(up to two DCCH with LWW00007) !" Leverages a service provider’s investment in the Nortel Networks infrastructure. TRU III

operates within the existing DMS-100 Wireless hardware topology with no additional hardware required

!" Increases test coverage during commissioning or during debugging !" Reduces the time for equipment commissioning or troubleshooting !" Reduces cell site provisioning time from as much as 40 minutes to less than 10 minutes by

using the B-Channel to load software on single or multiple TRU III radios at a single cell site

!" Simplifies upgrades and maintenance by enabling the radio to be configured by software download from the DMS-100 Wireless switch

!" Reduces backhaul costs from the cell site by performing time compression multiplex (TCM) conversions at the switch

!" Delivers increased processing power and capacity for future TDMA network growth

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Hardware: Integrated Cellular Remote Module (ICRM)


260

Networking features

The DMS-100 Wireless system is fully compliant with IS-41 networking features and services (Revisions 0, A, and B). We have also defined an IS-41 Revision C link, enabling Revision C support for a range of services that includes Authentication and Call Delivery in Border Cells. This section discusses two standard features (no licensing required) and an optional feature (licensed by CPC number) supporting advanced networking capabilities.

DMS-100 WIRELESS BASE STANDARD Provides the software infrastructure for other order codes.

Alternate Routing of Emergency Calls LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

Today, all calls routed through emergency translations are routed independent of any subscriber information. Now, with this feature, service providers can set up specific translations for subscribers based on their Mobile Identification Number (MIN).

Using this feature, carriers can route entire MIN ranges to the appropriate customer service centers or Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP). For example, a carrier can route Fixed Wireless Access mobiles to a wireline PSAP to process the call with all the information stored for wireline subscribers and still route non-fixed mobiles to the local PSAP. A network provider can also use this feature to route local subscribers to a local customer service center and route roamers to their home customer service center.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

!" Offers greater flexibility in controlling call routing during emergency translations (when routing to customer service or 911 facilities).

!" Gives the PSAP access to the same type of information stored for wireline subscribers (such as name, address, and fire department) when routing Fixed Wireless Access subscribers to a wireline PSAP.

!" Enables carriers to divert customer service calls from roamers to their home service centers instead of the local customer service center.

MD Selector LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

With this standard feature, a service provider can manipulate the digits a subscriber dials by using switch-based translations in one or more of the following ways. !" Delete 0 to 18 of the digits dialed !" Prepend or append steering digits to the digits dialed


261

!" Prepend or append the subscriber’s Mobile Identification Number (MIN) to the digits dialed

!" Prepend or append the subscriber’s Directory Number (DN) to the digits dialed !" Prepend or append the subscriber’s Number Plan Area (NPA) to the digits dialed !" Route or retranslate after digits are modified

While the universal translation scheme already supports many of these operations, this feature enhances domestic translations to meet the needs of carriers where diverse dialing plans and services are built using Mobile Switching Center (MSC)-based call processing translations.

Features provided by service providers allow users to dial abbreviated digit sequences that can be routed to external network elements/destinations that require a particular digit setup before proceeding. The digits dialed by the subscriber may require variable information, such as the user’s MIN or NPA, the addition of a fixed sequence of digits to the digits dialed, or the replacement of the digits dialed. The manipulated digit sequence can then be routed to an external element for service logic.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature offers expanded call routing flexibility by simplifying a number of dialed-digit translations capabilities.

ANSI-41D INTERNATIONAL ROAMING A0799279 Permits seamless international roaming by enhancing the ANSI-41D protocol to leverage GTT across international boundaries by using an international node identifier.

ANSI-41D International Roaming LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

Traditionally, networks use North American ANSI (American National Standards Institute) point codes to route ANSI-41D networking messages between nodes. This method presents problems when a subscriber roams internationally in areas where carriers have networking elements with overlapping point codes (for example, from the United States to Mexico).

To address this issue, this optional feature brings DMS-100 Wireless messaging in compliance with standards document PN-4197.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

With the ability to support international connectivity, a service provider can pursue international roaming partners/agreements and offer their subscribers global mobility, to encourage usage and expand revenue potential.


262

Wireless data and short messaging

Wireless service providers can tap into the enormous competitive advantage of wireless data — today — with Nortel Networks Cellular Digital Packet Data, Short Message Service, Digital Circuit Data and Fast Connect service offerings. Nortel Networks has the solution whether a service provider wants to address packet-data applications, such as point-of-sale or field dispatch, or circuit-data applications, such as large file transfers.

FAST CONNECT – TDMA A0716538 Allows a mobile-originated call to bypass the public telephone network and connect directly to a packet data network.

Fast Connect – TDMA LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature allows a mobile-originated TDMA circuit-switched data call to bypass the PSTN connection, typically required for a circuit mode or modem call, and connect directly from the Interworking Function (IWF) to a packet data network.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Business professionals need access to customers, co-workers, and mission-critical data whether they are in the office, on the road, or at home. Professionals can send and receive correspondence and access critical or time-sensitive information from varied databases by using this feature and: !" A mobile phone, laptop computer, and standard or customized applications to transfer

large files, digital faxes and e-mail messages with attachments. !" A handset with a thin browser — such as one based on Wireless Application Protocol

(WAP) — to send and receive data.

In addition, this feature: !" Significantly reduces the connection time perceived by the end user, eliminating the need

for modem circuits. !" Protects mobile access to a corporate intranet by supporting “tunneling” protocols. !" Provides faster access to the Internet and enhances applications with microbrowsers. !" Leverages the existing network by enabling voice and data services to share the same

infrastructure, which reduces capital costs, simplifies support efforts, makes network operations more cost-effective, and provides a shared subscriber database to facilitate packaging of services.

!" Gives subscribers access to information anywhere, anytime and allows them to leverage their investment in a single handset to deliver both digital voice and data communications.

MAJOR DEPENDENCIES

Software: A0716578 TDMA Circuit Switched Data


263

Subscriber services

Subscribers demand more and more from their wireless service providers as wireless communications become an increasingly integral part of people’s lives for both business and personal use. Nortel Networks can help wireless service providers offer comprehensive portfolios with innovative voice, data, and messaging subscriber services to attract targeted markets. Moreover, the DMS-100 Wireless mobile switch offers an impressive portfolio of network-based subscriber services, ranging from basic services, such as Message Waiting Notification, to application-specific services, such as Group Ringing. This section discusses a new standard feature (no licensing required) and optional features (licensed by CPC number) that deliver innovative, high-demand services.

DMS-100 WIRELESS BASE STANDARD

Provides the software infrastructure for other order codes.

Single Flash 3-Way Calling LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This convenience feature lets subscribers use 3-Way Calling or in-call feature activation (such as Account Code Activatable) without first flashing (that is, pressing SEND or TALK) to place the first leg of the call on hold. Currently, 3-Way Calling and Call Transfer requires the mobile subscriber to first flash to place the first leg of the call on hold, dial the second DN, and then flash again to conference all parties together. An additional flash drops the second leg from the call.

This feature simplifies the existing implementation by eliminating the initial flash to place the first leg of the call on hold. The subscriber simply dials the second DN (heard on the voice path by both parties) and flashes to conference all the parties together. Then, once all parties are in conference, the user can toggle between the two legs and full conference via subsequent flashes. For example, the next flash causes the user to communicate with only the first leg. By flashing again, the user then connects with only the second leg. Flashing again conferences all parties back together. The user can then repeat this sequence with subsequent flashes. When the subscriber toggles between legs, the leg that that is not in conference is effectively put on hold.

This feature is transparent with wireline implementations in many international markets, such as Asia and South America, that do not comply with the IS-664 method of 3-Way Calling activation. In addition, this feature is compatible with the European CEPT (Committee European Post and Telecom) standard for 3-Way Calling and mid-feature activation.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This standard feature not only simplifies 3-Way Calling and other in-call feature activations for subscribers, but it also enables service providers to implement a consistent method of feature activation within a multi-vendor environment.


264

ACCOUNT CODE ACTIVATABLE Differentiates monthly billing charges by account code.

A0799278 OR A0806788

Account Code Activatable LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables subscribers who share a wireless phone or charge calls to individual projects to differentiate these charges on their monthly bill. Subscribers can track both outgoing and incoming calls by dialing *FC + Account Code. Codes may be assigned before, during, or after a call. Account codes can be assigned after a call — as long as it is before subscriber makes or receives another call.

With this feature, the DMS-100 Wireless system records the dialed account code in call detail record (CDR) files so the downstream billing processor can correlate and print call charges for the subscriber to use as desired.

Note: This feature replaces Account Code Billing.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature provides new revenue opportunities by targeting high-volume users and specific markets. !" Salespeople can track expenses associated with each account by recording the calls made to

each customer. !" Attorneys can increase billable hours by tracking the calls made to each client. !" Work-at-home subscribers can use this feature to help distinguish between business and

personal calls.

SELECTIVE ANNOUNCEMENT ON CALL TERMINATION A0799290 Enables subscribers to selectively divert an incoming call to a pre-selected announcement before continuing the call processing.

Selective Announcement on Call Termination LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables subscribers to selectively divert an incoming call to a pre-selected announcement before continuing the call processing. When activating the feature, the subscriber chooses one of three generic announcements available on the switch that callers will hear before the conversation begins.

When a subscriber receives a call, the phone rings as usual. If the subscriber does not want to miss a call, but for some reason cannot talk at the moment, the user can press SEND to answer the call. The system plays the pre-selected announcement to both the subscriber and


265

the caller. The subscriber can hit SEND at any time to interrupt the announcement and connect to the caller.

At the end of the announcement, the system places the subscriber on mute until the user hits SEND to connect to the caller. The call ends normally when one of the parties presses END.

Note: This feature is supported on IS-41P.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Since subscribers enjoy much greater control of their call management, this service appeals to a range of users. !" Business subscribers can use this feature during a meeting. By effectively placing a call on

hold, subscribers can wait until a point in the meeting when they can take the call. !" Subscribers can avoid missing calls without disrupting a dinner, movie, or religious service.

SHARED WIRELESS ACCESS A0806795

Allows multiple users to share a single mobile phone and identify individual usage in billing records for both making and receiving calls.

Shared Wireless Access LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables multiple users to share a single mobile phone and identify individual usage in billing records for both making and receiving calls. For example, a cruise ship operator could provide an unlimited number of passengers/crew members access to the ship’s mobile phone. By assigning users their own unique Personal Identification Numbers (PINs, for outgoing calls) and directory numbers (DNs, for incoming calls), the operator can track usage and charge calls directly to the individual users.

Note: Emergency calls can be made without a PIN code.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This feature provides additional revenue-generating opportunities by offering a cost-effective method of giving a large number of users communications access with just one phone — with separate billing for each user.


266

3-WAY CALL MANAGEMENT A0799273 Gives subscribers greater control over use of the 3-Way Calling feature.

3-Way Call Management LWW00007

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables subscribers to easily bridge an incoming Call Waiting (CWT) call into a 3-Way Call and gives subscribers more control during a 3-Way Call by allowing the subscriber to place a caller on hold, dismiss a party from the call, and conference all parties together.

A user can initiate a 3-Way Call without placing the first party on hold simply by dialing the number and pressing SEND. After initiating a 3-Way Call, the subscriber has several options for controlling the two legs of the call. For example, when in conference with the first and second leg, the subscriber can press 1 SEND to communicate with only the first leg. By pressing 2 SEND, the subscriber would connect with other leg only. Pressing 3 SEND would conference all parties together.

This feature also enables subscribers who are part of a CWT or a 3-Way Call (but not the controller) to receive CWT calls of their own. Thus, multiple parties of the original call can conference additional parties to the call.

This feature is transparent with wireline implementations in many international markets, such as Asia and South America, and follows the European CEPT standard for 3-Way Calling and mid-feature activation.

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This optional feature helps increase subscriber satisfaction by giving them greater control over their 3-Way Calling while offering service providers a way to implement a consistent method of feature activation within a multi-vendor environment.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 DMS-STP SYSTEM

267

DMS-STP System

Introduced in 1986, the DMS SuperNode-based DMS-STP system has served as a superior signaling transfer point (STP) for Signaling System No. 7 (SS7) networks. With one of the most robust architectures in the telecommunications industry, the DMS-STP system has provided fast and reliable message transfer among traditional signaling points — such as service switching points (SSPs), service control points (SCPs), and other STPs.

As the momentum in the global marketplace shifts toward packet-based signaling systems, Nortel Networks is placing into sustaining mode the mature DMS-STP platform. After Release STP005 (PCLs STBA0050 and STSE0050), only regulatory or key robustness features will be developed as software patches for the DMS-STP system. Nortel Networks wants to assure our customers that we will continue to provide full customer service support for all DMS-STP systems that remain in the field.

The move toward packet-based signaling engines is spurred by the rapid ascendancy of multiservice networks and other fundamental changes in the signaling and bearer environments. The Nortel Networks solution is the Signaling Server, a versatile, robust platform that supports the BroadBand STP and other key next-generation signaling applications. In migrating from the DMS-STP system, our customers have found the transition to the Signaling Server to be smooth and simple, with the Nortel Networks service and support team prepared to assist in all phases of the migration process. (See the Signaling Server platform chapter, starting on page 273.)

In this chapter

Section Starting page PCLs in STP005 268

New standard DMS-STP features 268

New optional DMS-STP features 270

DMS-STP SYSTEM NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

268

PCLs in STP005

Product release STP005, the final software release for the DMS-STP platform, provides a number of enhancements, including Low-Speed Link/High-Speed Link (HSL) mix support for the Enhanced LPP; increased HSL support from 24 to 36; multiple point code support; network indicator interworking; linkset expansion to 432; and routeset expansion to 4000 destinations. Currently available, STP005 offers the following PCLs: !" STPBASE050 (order code STBA0050). This STP005 PCL provides the same type of

functionality as the previous PCL, STPBASE042, with the addition of new features that are available with the STP005 product release.

!" STPSEAS050 (order code STSE0050). This STP005 PCL provides the same type of functionality as its previous PCL, STPSEAS042, with the addition of new SEAS features that are available with the STP005 product release.

New standard DMS-STP features

The following features are standard capabilities; they do not need to be ordered separately.

DMS SUPERNODE PLATFORM STANDARD Provides the platform infrastructure required for all other order codes.

ITU (14 Bit) OMAP MRVT STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

The International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Operations, Maintenance, and Administration Part (OMAP) Recommendations Q.750 and Q.755 describe the management of SS7 signaling point network elements based on Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) principles.

STP005 introduces Recommendations Q.753 and Q.754 that describe the Message Transfer Part Routing Verification Test (MRVT) for the 14-point code variant. These tests enable the verification and validation of Message Transfer Part (MTP) routing tables using OMAP messages exchanged between the signaling points. MRVT can be used to detect pathologies, such as circular routes and open routing chains, in provisioned MTP routing.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

ITU OMAP MRVT can help improve network management techniques by enabling the network provider to test routing data before a potential problem occurs in the network.


269

Linkset Expansion to 432 STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

In STP005, the total number of linksets supported per DMS-STP system expands to 432 to align with the number of links supported.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

A greater number of linksets provides the DMS-STP system with increased capacity to handle more connections.

Low-Speed Link/High-Speed Link Mix Support on ELPP STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

For more efficient use of resources, this enhancement supports a mixture of High-Speed Link (HSL) and Link Interface Unit for SS7 (LIU7) modules on an Enhanced Link Peripheral Processor (ELPP).


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Increasing the ELPP’s flexibility decreases the required central office floor space, offering the network provider potentially lower operating costs.


270

New optional DMS-STP features


PLATFORM CAPACITY ENHANCEMENTS STPE0006

Increases signaling link capacities to accommodate expanding internetwork connections.

Increase HSL support from 24 to 36 STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

This enhancement expands the maximum number of High Speed Links (HSL) supported on the DMS-STP system from 24 to 36.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Allowing the provisioning of a greater number of HSLs helps to increase the number of high-speed interconnect points the DMS-STP system can support.

HSL SS7 Transport over ATM STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

This feature enables the network provider to connect and route HSL links through a packet-switched Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) network.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

This provisioning enhancement increases flexibility and can help reduce the cost of deploying HSLs within the network by switching SS7 messages through the ATM network.


271

MULTIPLE POINT CODE SUPPORT TEL00012 Supports Multiple Point Codes for each Network Indicator to broaden the flexibility of SS7 network operation and to accommodate future expansion.

Multiple Point Code Support STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

The Multiple Point Code capability supports up to 16 specific STP point codes per network indicator (for example, “National”) for the STP products. The point code network types (ANSI, ITU, and NTC7) can be either shared or different.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

Multiple Point Code capability significantly increases the flexibility of how network providers define their SS7 network, addressing both current field issues and anticipated growth of the SS7 network.

Among other benefits, order code TEL00012 enables: !" International operators to support both ANSI and ITU networks. !" Domestic operators to use separate backbone networks for ISUP and IS-41 transport. !" Point codes transparency to be maintained during network consolidation.

NETWORK INDICATOR INTERWORKING TEL00015

Interworks between different network indicators in the same network type.

Network Indicator Interworking STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES

On a per-linkset basis, the user can change the Network Indicator (NI) of the incoming and outgoing message from one NI to another. This enables transparent interconnection of traffic to more than one NI.


PRINCIPAL BENEFITS

The Network Indicator Interworking feature enables users to interconnect an STP between two or more NIs within the same network type. This increased flexibility removes the need to add external conversion boxes to the SS7 links, decreasing the total number of nodes to maintain in the network.


272

ROUTESET EXPANSION STPE0004 Offers greater interconnect and routing capacity and flexibility.

Routeset Expansion to 4000 STBA0050, STSE0050

KEY CAPABILITIES This enhancement expands system routeset capacity to meet emerging network evolution requirements. The maximum capacity increases from 2047 to 4095 with full routeset management on all routes. Technical reference: 19007801

PRINCIPAL BENEFITS With the doubling of routeset support, the DMS-STP system can route to over 4000 destinations to accommodate a network provider’s increased market share, signaling point code growth, and other network-modernization factors.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 SIGNALING SERVER PLATFORM

273

Signaling Server platform

This chapter discusses the growing number of leading-edge signaling solutions built on the versatile Nortel Networks Signaling Server platform.

In this chapter

Section Starting page Innovative, versatile platform 273

Software releases across the platform 275

BroadBand STP 276

Universal Number Portability Master (UNPM) 280

Universal Signaling Point (USP) 281

Innovative, versatile platform

The Signaling Server is the innovative solution from Nortel Networks to meet the increasing demand for advanced telecommunications services. Featuring a flexible distributed architecture, the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) based Signaling Server platform supports an array of signaling applications and services in traditional Signaling System No. 7 (SS7) networks and in emerging Internet Protocol (IP) and ATM networks.

This versatility is a central Signaling Server advantage. The platform’s modular architecture and support for multiple applications enable the network to continue growing and its capabilities to expand without the need for major hardware re-investment. Providers can create fully functional applications from a small number of different circuit packs, and cards and shelves can be easily added as market requirements change.

Key applications supported by Signaling Server applications include: !" Signaling Transfer Point (STP) !" Number Portability (UNPM)

SIGNALING SERVER PLATFORM NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

274

!" SS7/packet signaling gateway (USP) !" High-speed transport/link consolidation

Next-generation signaling gateway

By integrating an ATM routing function with an ATM switching fabric, the Signaling Server is IP-ready, facilitating the transition from narrowband to broadband networks, while delivering services at the boundaries between the traditional voice network and the Internet Protocol environment. With its ATM/IP signaling versatility, the Signaling Server functions as a next-generation signaling gateway and as the platform for future access to Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) based service applications.

Signaling Server hosts BroadBand STP, Universal Signaling Point, and other applications

With one of the smallest footprints in the industry, the Signaling Server occupies just four square feet — significantly reducing installation floor space and environmental costs such as heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC).

Built-in fault-tolerant hardware and software systems help ensure that network provider reliability objectives can be met. For example, key subsystems — such as central control processors, A/B shelf power, Ethernet LAN, data storage units, and messaging paths — are fully redundant.

The integration of proven high-performance, commercially available technology — such as PowerPC processors, PCI bus electronics, and VME-sized modules — enables providers to ride the cost and performance curves of new technological advances. This unique platform makes full use of ATM switching as the internal transport system. With a fully duplicated ATM backplane, this platform gracefully handles high capacity levels and emerging new protocols and interfaces.

For element management, an OAM&P workstation features an easy-to-use graphical user interface (GUI) specifically designed to enable the network provider to retrieve answers quickly and reduce both training requirements and system downtime.


275

Software releases across the platform

Nortel Networks development has created a dual software release stream to handle all of the applications for the Signaling Server. SSR (Signaling Server Release) software supports SS7-oriented applications, such as the BroadBand STP and Number Portability. A separate USP stream is used to deliver the software for the Universal Signaling Point application — the signaling vehicle for IP-based Succession packet telephony environments.

The following tables identify the software loads for the products discussed in this chapter.

Software Release Stream, by release number

Release number Product Planned

availability SSR3.0 BroadBand STP 2Q01

SSR3.4 Universal Number Portability Master (UNPM)

3Q01

SSR4.0 BroadBand STP 2Q02

SSR5.0 Broadband STP 4Q02

USP3.0 Universal Signal Point Now

USP6.0 Universal Signal Point 3Q01

Software Release Stream, by product

Product Release number

Starting page

SSR3.0 276

SSR4.0 278 BroadBand STP

SSR5.0 279

Universal Number Portability Master SSR3.4 280

USP3.0 281 Universal Signaling Point USP6.0 282

Note: Because the Signaling Server platform supports multiple applications, some independently listed feature sets may be combined to form a single stream in a later release.


276

Base BroadBand STP: 1 CAM shelf with 40-link capacity

BroadBand STP

As a highly reliable, compact, and flexible SS7 entry point for service providers, the Nortel Networks BroadBand STP is an advanced, innovative solution to the increasing demands for efficient and scalable telecommunications services. The base BroadBand STP system configuration consists of one Communications Applications Module (CAM) shelf — supporting up to 40 signaling data links — and its associated operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) workstation. Designed with expansion in mind, additional links (up to 104) can be supported with an extension CAM shelf. (See the description below of the multi-shelf configuration, which provides further capacity expansion.) Available interfaces include conventional DS-0A and V.35 links as well as channelized E1, High Speed Link, and Internet Protocol Link options.

Because the BroadBand STP CAM shelf features standardized control hardware, the system is easy to configure for specific site considerations.

A fully distributed architecture enables different application processing elements to co-exist on the same BroadBand STP platform. System co-residency offers service providers a highly scalable and flexible option for the deployment of number portability and other network services.

SSR3.0: BroadBand STP multi-shelf configurations Software release SSR3.0 introduces the Signaling Server multi-shelf configuration that enables the platform to expand to three or four CAM shelves. The extra shelves permit a capacity increase to 240 links in SSR3.0, with further capacity expansions planned for subsequent releases. For the dual-shelf configuration, communication between the shelves is through redundant OC-3 connections. A multi-shelf configuration requires two Inter-CAM Communi- cation Medium (ICCM) units to handle intershelf communications. The ICCMs are ATM switching units that perform non-blocking cell switching, using point-to-point and point-to-multipoint virtual path switching.

Hardware SSR3.0 introduces support for the following hardware options. !" The BroadBand STP configuration can expand to up to four CAM shelves, supporting a

maximum of 240 low speed (V.35 or DS-0A) signaling links !" Two ATM-based Inter-CAM Communications Medium (ICCM) modules are added to

provide communications among the shelves (when more than two shelves are deployed)


277

Multi-shelf configuration supports up to 240 links in SSR3.0

!" Two high-speed connectivity options are available: an ATM-based T1 link for North American BroadBand STP applications and a four-channel E1 signaling data link (SDL) for international applications

!" SSR3.0 also supports SS7 links in the PSTN and IP environments for North American (ANSI) and international (ITU) standards

Standard software capabilities The following SSR3.0 features enhance the functionality of the BroadBand STP: !" Multiple Replicated Subsystems enable the BroadBand STP to route global title translation

(GTT) results to multiple destinations. This feature supports 16 replicated subsystems, exceeding ANSI and ITU standards and equaling the replicated subsystems supported by the DMS-STP system. With so many potential destinations, the destination points can be configured in conventional primary/ backup arrangements, or traffic can be load-shared, enabling cost savings through a reduction in the number of nodes required by the network.

!" Remote Subsystem Expansion. Since Remote Subsystems (RSSs) identify subsystems at remote point codes (RPCs) in GTT results, the BroadBand STP can use RSSs to transfer messages to the translated destination. The BroadBand STP supports up to 3000 RSSs and up to 1000 RPCs. Each RPC can be provisioned with up to 256 RSSs.

!" ITU Alias Point Code can be assigned to two or more BroadBand STPs, enabling them to be viewed as a single functional resource within the network. If one of the STPs sharing an alias goes out of service, messages intended for it can be picked up by the other STPs in the alias group.

!" Provisionable MTP Timers (Levels 2 and 3). Previously hard-coded Level 2 and 3 MTP timers can now be provisioned individually using a simple GUI screen. This flexibility allows greater latitude in the distribution of timed-out Message Transfer Part (MTP) messages.

!" Support for 4 Equal Priority Linksets. The number of linksets supported on a combined linkset in international applications (ITU) increases from 2 to 4.

!" Support for 16 Links in a Linkset. The number of links in a linkset supported in a North American (ANSI) application increases from 8 to 16; in an international (ITU) application, the number of supported links in a linkset expands from 4 to 8.

!" Emulated Point Code. The SS7 Router can now masquerade as an element of the BroadBand STP, significantly expanding the STP’s message-handling capacity and enhancing its service capabilities.

RASEthernet HUBEthernet HUB

ICCM

ICCM

E1 TSG


278

!" Fail-safe Login. When a connection to the active side of the BroadBand STP cannot be established through the OAM&P workstation responsible for STP administration, craftspersons can now log-in to the inactive side to view alarms, logs, and OMs.

!" SSCOP Idle Recovery. When Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol (SSCOP) connections become idle, periodic attempts to re-establish them are made when the node maintenance state becomes available. This capability is particularly important for multi-shelf configurations.

!" Preventive Cyclic Retransmission (PCR) provides error recovery for SS7 signaling connections with high propagation delays, such as satellite. PCR prevents long delays by continuously retransmitting a message until a positive acknowledgement is received from the destination point.

SSR4.0: BroadBand STP enhancements Hardware SSR4.0 introduces support for the following hardware options. !" 480 links on four CAM shelves !" Four CAM shelves !" 8-channel T1/E1 link capabilities

Standard software capabilities The following SSR4.0 features enhance the functionality of the BroadBand STP: !" SCCP Circular Route Prevention. The BroadBand STP can now use and interpret

extended unidata (XUDT) messages, a format that adds extra fields to the standard unidata (UDT) message. One of the new fields is a “hop counter” that automatically decrements with each GTT to prevent the circular routing of SCCP messages. SSR4.0 also enables messages in the XUDT and UDT formats to interwork with each other to help assure service continuity. [This enhancement is a recommendation from the Network Reliability Council (NRC). Other SSR4.0 NRC items are MTP Restart and signaling link selection (SLS) Code Expansion from five-bit to eight-bit SLS algorithms.]

!" Recovery after Dual RTC failure. If both Real-time Controllers (RTCs) on a BroadBand STP fail, the link cards on the mate STP assume the traffic load, significantly reducing the chances for service disruption. When one of the failed RTCs returns to service, the link cards on that STP automatically resume operation.

!" Routine Exercise (REX) test. Initiated by a craftsperson, the REX is a battery of tests on BroadBand STP processors and nodes. As in the DMS REX test, out-of-service and in-service testing is performed on the components, allowing minor faults to be identified and corrected before they can affect service.

!" New SCSI disk diagnostics for the BroadBand STP’s SCSI disks enable marginal disks to be identified and replaced before failure.


279

!" Time synchronization. The BroadBand STP’s internal clock now synchronizes with other network components, using the SNTP version 3 standard.

OAM&P enhancements SSR4.0 also includes the following operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) enhancements. !" Improved GUI response times. The time between a command and its execution is

reduced. !" Remote Subsystem Alarm. Remote subsystems that have been datafilled in the BroadBand

STP are now programmed to trigger an alarm if they go out of service. !" Datafill conversion tool simplifies the cutover from the DMS-STP system to a BroadBand

STP by converting all the DMS-STP system’s SS7 datafill to a bulk datafill file that can be loaded easily onto the BroadBand STP platform.

!" Manual manipulation of routesets. A routeset can now be taken out of service for manual modification of its parameters without affecting its associated linkset or other routesets.

!" Other OAM&P enhancements. GUI icons, logs, operational measurements, alarms, and provisioning screens have been upgraded to accommodate the BroadBand STP multi-shelf configuration. In addition, the number of characters representing MTP, SCCP, and GTT messages expands to conform to the numbering format of the DMS-STP system.

!" M3UA connectivity. The BroadBand STP system now supports interconnectivity using the M3UA standard published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

SSR5.0: Distributed architecture for BroadBand STP Planned enhancements to the BroadBand STP in SSR5.0 include: !" Introduction of a distributed architecture to boost capacity !" Support for 880 links on eight shelves in the distributed system !" GUI enhancements to streamline the administration of the expanded system !" Option to provision eight-channel T1/E1 high speed links on an eight-shelf system


280

Universal Number Portability Master (UNPM)

Software release SSR3.4 expands the capabilities of the Universal Number Portability Master (UNPM) application previously introduced on the BroadBand STP. In addition to enhancing North American number portability capabilities, this release also introduces new options for international (ETSI/ITU) wireline and wireless portability in carrier and GSM networks.

The UNPM can be deployed as a BroadBand STP application, or it can reside on a Signaling Server platform dedicated to number portability services. In either case, the North American and international UNPM applications cannot be deployed on the same platform.

Hardware for SSR3.4 With SSR3.4, the UNPM application has the following hardware requirements. !" A pair of Number Portability Controller (NPC) nodes is required !" Up to three expansion Number Portability Server (NPS) nodes can also be provisioned !" Each NPC and NPS node includes a SCSI disk for database backup !" NPC and NPS system nodes are dedicated processors to handle number portability queries

Standard and optional Number Portability software capabilities !" ITU or ANSI support for up to 10 million ported number records, where each record can

contain a range or block of telephony numbers !" Automatic database update capacity (from an upstream national or carrier center for ported

numbers) of up to 10 updates per second !" ITU support of:

#"Capacity throughput of up to 10,000 number portability queries per second #" Intelligent Network Application Protocol (INAP; CS-1) message queries and responses #"Hexadecimal routing number (RN) digits and concatenated addressing (RN+Directory

Number or Directory Number only) #" In-country dialing support, including overlap outpulsing

!" ANSI support of: #"Capacity throughput of up to 12,500 local number portability (LNP) queries per second #"NPA split handling and bulk data downloading #"Number pooling using EDR (1000 blocks) #"GTT support for the following services: CLASS, voice messaging (ISVM), calling name

(CNAM), line information database (LIDB), and wireless short message service (WSMS) !" GTT digit string support for 28 elements !" GSM Mobile Signaling Relay Function (SRF) as specified in the GSM 03.66 standard for the

handling of call-related messages and messages involving non-calling services !" Support for all nature of address (NoA) values, including NoA looping protection


281

Universal Signaling Point

The Universal Signaling Point (USP) application for the Signaling Server is a third-generation signaling gateway for seamless interworking between SS7 and packet-based networks. As part of the Nortel Networks Succession packet telephony portfolio, the USP delivers robust, carrier-grade interworking solutions for wireline and wireless carriers worldwide.

The USP serves as a fully transparent element on the edge of SS7 and packet-based networks. From the perspective of the IP network, the USP serves as a proxy for the SS7 network so circuit-switched elements can communicate with packet-based elements as if they were traditional circuit-switched nodes. As a versatile application vested with full STP capabilities in Release USP6.0, the USP can initially be deployed as an STP while the network is being readied for a full Succession packet telephony solution.

USP3.0: Universal Signaling Point dual-shelf configuration Hardware The dual-shelf configuration supports a maximum of 88 SS7 links and up to 16 paths per IP card (MGCs or MDs)

Standard software capabilities !" Local Subsystem Management enables the USP to be configured as a local SCCP sub-

system, enabling it to serve as an end SS7 node. Thus configured, the USP can hand SCCP messages off to a media gateway controller (MGC) and respond correctly on behalf of the MGC to SS7 subsystem messages, such as SSA (subsystem available), SSP (subsystem prohibited), and SST (subsystem test).

!" SS7 Congestion Handling. The USP can now shift traffic from congested routes to more open routes, helping to maintain service continuity by preventing the loss of SS7 messages.

!" Four Network Appearances. Each USP can support up to four network appearances in USP3.0 for both North American and international applications. Each appearance is defined by the USP point code (PC), a network identifier (NI), and the protocol variant (ANSI or ITU).

!" Application server capabilities residing on the USP can support multiple IP addresses and is engineered to recognize multiple incoming and outgoing IP addresses. In USP3.0, an application server can be connected to a single network appearance.

!" GTT capacity expansion to 60,000 entries. !" IPS7 protocol enhancements improve transport of the signaling payload over UDP/IP

(IPS7-RTSP) and over IP (SCTP, version 5). !" IPS7 function and distribution. In addition to destination point code (DPC) and

originating point code (OPC) routing of SS7 messages, the USP now supports SCCP and ISUP distribution of SS7 messages.


282

USP6.0: Significant USP expansions Hardware USP6.0 expands hardware options to support up to a maximum of: !" 4 CAM shelves and up to 216 SS7 links, based on the SSR3.0 hardware model on page 276 !" 16 IP Gateway link nodes !" 128 application servers !" 64 paths per IP signaling link

Standard software capabilities !" Multiple network appearances. USP6.0 enables each USP to support up to 16 network

appearances (up from four in USP3.0), and each application server to support up to 16 network appearances (up from one in USP3.0).

!" ANSI/ITU in same system. The same USP platform can now support North American (ANSI) and international applications.

!" Protocol enhancements. The USP now supports the following Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) protocols: #" SCTP version 5 directly over the IP stack (without UDP for transport). Stream Control

Transmission Protocol (SCTP) is required for transport of M3UA, M2PA, and other IETF adaptation layers.

#"M3UA version 2, which is required for transporting ISUP and SCCP SS7 protocol messages at the SCTP lower layer interface.

!" Succession IP connectivity with the XA-Core, the multiprocessor Core for the Succession Communication Server 2000. This enhancement enables SS7 messages to bypass the ATM fabric and go directly to the IP network.

!" ISUP distribution based OPC and CIC. The USP can now distribute ISUP call-control messages using the originating point code (OPC) of the sender and the circuit identifier code (CIC) associated with a particular media gateway. This enables a USP serving as an end SS7 node to distribute ISUP messages to multiple media gateway controllers.

!" Message capacity increase up to 4200 messages per second. !" Workstation reachthrough capabilities enable client workstations to reach through the IP

network to perform OAM&P functions using the GUI software on a BroadBand STP workstation. Reachthrough functionality supported for both Microsoft Windows 2000 and UNIX computers, but Windows 2000 is required for alternate boot capability.

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REFERENCE

283

Reference

Hardware baselines 284 Optional feature configurations 285 Hardware evolution 287

Software evolution 288 Non-CM software baseline 290 Changes in feature information 292

New features introduced in this document

293

GA features: Rel•14 299 GA features: Rel•15 302 GA features: Rel•17 305 GA features: LWW00007 307 GA features: DMS-STP system 310

Index by technical reference 311 Index by feature name 317 Index by order code 324 Index by acronyms and abbreviations 330

REFERENCE NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY

284

Hardware baselines

DMS SuperNode processor baseline [Rel•14] Across the DMS SuperNode family, the minimum processor supported as of Rel•14 is the Series 60 (96-megabyte memory) version. All previous versions (including the Series 50 with mixed memory) must upgrade to the Series 60, Series 70 EM, or XA-Core — depending on office demands — before loading a Rel•14 (or higher) PCL. A network provider can run the Flexible Advanced Capacity Engineering Tool (FACET) utility to determine specific office requirements.

Also in the Computing Module, the baseline for the System Load Module (SLM) has been at SLM III (NT9X44AD) since Rel•13.

For XA-Core requirements, see pages 63 through 65 (the Optional feature configurations table, next page, contains a summary of these requirements).

SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) baseline [Rel•14]

To support Rel•14, an existing SDM must meet the following hardware baseline (in quantities of 2 plus 1 spare): !" Processors with 128-megabyte memory are incompatible with Rel•14, so a choice of the

following needs to be installed: #"NTRX50CG (with 256-megabyte memory) #"NTRX50CH (with 512-megabyte memory) #"NTRX50NB (with 512-megabyte memory; recommended)

!" To meet storage requirements, one of the following [either (A) or (B)] needs to be done if an existing NTRX50GN is the only drive on the system: (A) Replace the NTRX50GN with either:

#"NTRX50ND [digital audio tape drive with 9-gigabyte disk drive unit] #" Beginning in Rel•15, NTRX50NM [digital audio tape drive with 36-gigabyte disk drive

unit] plus NTRX50NK Ethernet personality module

(B) Retain the NTRX50GN and add for the data volume group (datavg) either: #"NTRX50NC MFIO with dual 9-gigabyte disk drives #" Beginning in Rel•15, NTRX50NL [with dual 36-gigabyte disk drives] plus

NTRX50NK Ethernet personality module

!" The SDM’s DS-512 interface to the Message Switch must be at NTRX50GX, to accommodate higher messaging demands, if either of the following is true: #"The multiprocessor XA-Core is installed in an office at Rel•14 or higher #"The NTRX50NB processor is installed in the SDM


285

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) baseline [Rel•15] The SPM is available with DMS SuperNode systems having the Enhanced Network (ENET) switch matrix. To upgrade to SPM00115, an SPM must have either NTLX82AA or NTLX82BA processors installed (the NTLX63AA processor is incompatible with SP15).

Input/Output Module (IOM) baseline [Rel•17] Beginning with Rel•17, the use of either NT1X55FA [IOC disk drive unit] or NTFX32AA/BA [IOM disk] becomes baseline with the IOM on DMS SuperNode systems.

Optional feature configurations

The following table lists optional features and identifies the additional hardware required to support them. Over time, technical requirements may upgrade the following feature-specific hardware to become baseline. Please note that actual hardware availability may be later than the software availability shown in the first column.

Release Feature/order code Hardware required XA-Core — NXAC0300

DMS SuperNode must be running a Series 60, Series 70 EM Computing Module, or XA-Core Phase I. Associated SDM must be at NTRX50GX.

Cabinet needs High-Capacity Cooling Unit NTLX10AA. Needed in Message Switch: NT9X17AD, NT9X63AB, NT9X13DG.

LCM Messaging Overload Management — Standard base

Supported on XPMs with the NTSX05AA processor installed

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services — UEDG0001

Half-shelf packages containing the POTS-32 card: NTNB49DA or NTNB49KA

Double-Density ESMA — Standard base

NTMX90BA Shelf and frame

SS7 Channelized Access — SPMS0001

An SPM with OC-3 interface, LIU7, and NIU

LEC Echo Cancellation — SPMS0001

Voice Service Processor: NTLX66BA, NTLX85AA, or NTLX66AA

Rel•14

Reach Through Surveillance — SPMS0014

Client’s monitoring system must be capable of sending and receiving TL1 to and from the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) via TCP/IP


286

Optional feature configurations, continued

Release Feature/order code Hardware required

Rel•14 OC-3 Line Timing — SPMS0040

NT9X53AD Digital Phase Lock-Loop Clock Card

XA-Core — NXAC0200

DMS SuperNode must be running a Series 60, Series 70 EM Computing Module, or XA-Core Phase I. Associated SDM must have NTRX50GX. Cabinet needs High-Capacity Cooling Unit NTLX10AA. Needed in Message Switch: NT9X17AD, NT9X63AB, NT9X13DG.

Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office — EQA00031

Only with direct connect ISUP IT trunks between TOPS and EAEO office

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards — UEDG0001

• Four-port Service Adaptive ADSL/G.Lite plus Voice Multicircuit Line Cards

• DS-3 ATM Network Interface Cards

Extended Ringing to Send_to_Resource (SToR) — AIN00291

PRI trunking is used to connect the SSP to an Intelligent Peripheral

Geodetic Location Parameter — ENS00005

• NT1X89BB Multi-Protocol Controller (MPC) • For Remote Call Event Record (RCER):

Input/Output Controller (IOC) or equivalent connection on IOM shelf

10BaseT/100BaseT support on SuperNode Data Manager (SDM)

NTR50NK Personality Module

Rel•15

SPM ESI Timing for DMS — SPMS0050

NT9X53AD clock card on the Message Switch plus two SPMs equipped with NTLX44AA Sync Resource Module cards

Resource Module SWACT — SPMS0001

NTLX82AA/BA Common Equipment Module processors

Rel•17 Talking Call Wait SCWID/ DSCWID Enhancement — RES00097

Talking Call Waiting needs offboard service node for text-to-speech technology. End users need SCWID/DSCWID compatible terminals.


287

Hardware evolution

To keep ahead of rapid technology drives moving forward in all parts of the network, hardware is continuously enhanced. New hardware offers the latest features and supports current functionality with new efficiencies and cost-saving capabilities.

Existing equipment in the field scheduled to be manufacture discontinued still receive full Nortel Networks customer service support. Product replacement is not required unless feature or baseline driven (shown in the previous tables). The following lists major equipment only (this listing is not exhaustive). For more details, including lists of circuit packs involved, refer to the following Product/Service Information bulletins:

• 50201.16/01-01 (for 4Q00) • 50200.16/09-00 (for 3Q00) • 50198.16/11-99 (for 3Q99) • 50196.16/05-99 (for 1Q99) • 50194.16/02-99 (for 4Q98) • 50189.16/12-98 (for 3Q98) • 50185.16/07-98 (for 2Q98) • 50181.16/04-98 (for 4Q97) • 50178.16/12-97 (for 3Q97) • 50151.16/10-97 (for 2Q97) • 50168.16/06-97 (for 1Q97) • 50149.16/12-96 (for 3Q96) • 50138.16/06-96 (for 1Q96) • 50133.16/03-96 (for 4Q95) • 50127.16/11-95 (for 3Q95)

Replaced hardware MD date New hardware

1-gigabyte BMC Disk Drive Systems

SuperNode Billing Applica- tion (SBA) on the SuperNode Data Manager (SDM)

North American Tone Generators

Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement Machine (EDRAM)

NTEX17AA/17BA 1-Meg Modem Line Cards and NTEX54AA/AB/BA DBIC cards

NTEX17CA/17DA High Density 1-Meg Modem Line Cards and NTEX54BAAB/ BAAC/BAAD DBICs

Frame Mounted Lighting

3/31/01

Center Aisle Lighting

Alarm Panels and Circuit Packs

Redesigned alarm panels and circuit packs

Office Alarm Unit (Alarm transfer circuit packs)

6/30/01 NT3X83BA


288

Software evolution In response to customer requests and new software efficiencies, DMS SuperNode software is continuously enhanced. From time to time, to simplify ordering and to support the latest network capabilities, existing software features in some order codes are replaced by (or consolidated into) other order codes. The following table lists order codes that are scheduled to be manufacture discontinued — along with the order codes that replace them.

LEC00014, LET00014, LLT00014

Discontinued order codes Replacement order codes

NXAC0010 XA-Core Release 1 NXAC0300 XA-Core Release 2

LET00015, LLT00015

The following summarizes the order code consolidation for TOPS services. For details, refer to the two tables at the front of the Agent Services chapter, starting on page 216.


OSB00001 Basic Operator Services OSB00101 Basic Operator Services

Order codes that start with ABS ABS00101 Alternate Billing Service

Order codes that start with ADVQ OSB00101 Basic Operator Services

ENSV0001 Enhanced Services ENSV0101 Enhanced Services

ENSV0002 Auto Coin Toll Services ENSV0102 Auto Coin Toll Services

ENSV0009 External RTRS Interface ENSV0103 External RTRS Interface

All remaining codes that start with ENSV OSB00101 Basic Operator Services

EWSS0008 OPP over IP OSB00102 Provisioning Enhncmnts

All remaining codes that start with EWSS OSB00101 Basic Operator Services

OSAN0001 OSAN0002, OSAN0003, OSAN0004


OSAN0005, OSAN0006, OSAN0007 OSAN0102 OSAN Enhanced Features

OSAN0100 OSSAIN Sessions OSAN0103 OSAN Sessions

OSDA0001, OSDA0004, OSDA0006, and OSDA0008


OSDA0002, OSDA0003, OSDA0005 OSDA0102 Auto DACC with AltBill


289


OSDA0009 Directory Assistance via IP OSDA0103 Directory Assistance via IP

OSEA0001 OSEA0002, OSEA0003, OSEA0004, OSEA0006, OSEA0011, and OSEA0012


OSEA0005, OSEA0007, OSEA0009, and OSEA0013

OSEA0102 TOPS ANSI ISUP

OSEA0008 and OSEA0010 OSEA0103 TOPS US LNP

SPM00116 with LEC00015, LET00015, LLT00015


SPMS0040 OC-3 Line Timing SPMS0050 Sync Resource Module


290

Non-CM software baseline

Software loads that reside on equipment other than the Computing Module or XA-Core are referred to as “non-CM” loads (or “NCLs”). Some of these loads require certain levels of PCLs in the switch, as indicated in this table. Applications associated with operator services (TOPS) are not included.

For a given Rel•xx release, the corresponding NCL needed to implement a product must not fall below the release level shown.

Product Rel•11 Rel•12 Rel•13 Rel•14 Rel•15 Rel•17

Operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) applications

DMS SuperNode Data Manager (SDM) [releases needed for full new functionality]

SDMN0011 SDMN0012 SDMN0013 SDM00014 SDM00015 SDM00017

Access, remotes, and loop carrier platforms

AccessNode and Universal Edge 9000 (using the proprietary GR-303 CSC interface)

AN18 AN17.3 AN16 AN15

AN19 AN18

AN17.3 AN16 AN15

AN19 AN18

AN17.3 AN16 AN15

AN19 AN18

AN17.3 AN16

AN19 AN18

AN17.3

AN 19 AN 18

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM)

SPM00033 SPM00035 SPM00035 SPM00115 SPM00035

SPM00116 SPM00115

SPM00118 SPM00117

AccessNode and Universal Edge 9000 The voice software loads for AccessNode and Universal Edge 9000 BBDLC configurations that use the standard GR-303 Multi Vendor Interface (MVI) and TR-008 interfaces can be deployed without regard to PCL level at the switch. Products using the proprietary GR-303 CSC interface require PCL levels as shown in the above table.

The Universal Edge 9000 data-enabling software loads can be deployed on the Universal Edge 9000 Element Management System (uEMS) OAM platform without regard to PCL level at the switch.


291

Other products The following non-CM/XA-Core applications, arranged in alphabetical order, can be deployed without regard to PCL level at the switch:

!" Advanced Call Management Server (ACMS)

!" Audiogram Delivery System (ADS)

!" Billing Medium Converter (BMC)

!" BroadBand STP and other Signaling Server Platform solutions

!" Call Center Management Information System (CCMIS)

!" Centrex IP (Rel•12 and higher)

!" Digital Cross Connect Support System (DSS)

!" Distributed Processing Peripheral (DPP)

!" Dynamically Controlled Routing (DCR)

!" Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement Machine (EDRAM)

!" Enhanced SCM-100 URBAN (ESMU)

!" Glenayre Modular Voice Processor (MVP)

!" Magellan Digital Packet Network-100 (DPN-100)

!" Meridian Mail General Purpose (MMGP)

!" Meridian Services Module (MSM)

!" Network Applications Vehicle Intelligent Peripheral/Media Resource Unit (IP/MRU)

!" PowerView Services (PVS)

!" Real Time-1000 (RT-1000)

!" SCM-100 URBAN (SMU)

!" Universal Edge 9000 Element Management System (uEMS)

!" Universal Signaling Point (USP)


292

Changes in feature information

So you can be aware of the changes that have been made to DMS-100 Family software information since the previous FPG, the following table lists the major updates made to features in DMS PCLs since the previous edition of the DMS-100/500 Feature Planning Guide.

All page numbers in this table refer to the Feature Planning Guide 2000 (Issue 21) only.

Page in FPG

Issue 21:

Type of change:

FPG Issue 21 showed:

Now, in Issue 22:

108 Feature development deferred

NI000052 Uniform Display Text was planned to be a part of Rel•14

Future development on this feature TBD

162 Change in feature name to better reflect its capabilities

ACD00081 had a feature of Increase Secondary DNs

Now called Supplementary ACD DN Expansion

192 Feature availability changed

ENS00017 Off-Board Selec- tive Routing Interface was planned to be in Rel•14

Now available in Rel•15 PCLs

SPM NCL alignment changed

SPM00035 was originally scheduled to be available for Rel•13 PCLs

The SPM00035 NCL is now associated with Rel•14 PCLs

196+

SPM NCL numbering scheme enhanced

The NCL that was to follow SPM00035 was called SPM00039

After SPM00035, SPM NCLs have the same last two digits as associated PCLs (thus, SPM00039 has been renamed SPM00115)

204 Feature expanded and rescheduled

DS-1 Assignment Control had been in order code SPMS0001 as of release SPM00039

Functionality expanded to order codes SPMS0016 and SPMS0017 as of release SPM00115

215 TOPS standard feature development deferred

TOPS and Succession Solu- tions Interworking was planned to be in TOPS14

Future development on this feature TBD


293

New features introduced in this document

The following index arranges alphabetically all the new features (that reside in the Computing Module/XA-Core) appearing for the first time in any DMS-100/200/500 Feature Planning Guide.

Feature Order Scheduled Starting

name code Avail. page

Standard base software

CDN Command Support for Intercept Standard Rel•15 56 Datafill 110 Log Standard Rel•15 56 Double-Density ESMA Standard Rel•14 120

DTMF Default Capability Standard Rel•15 56 ESMA 2688 Voice Line Support Standard Rel•17 121 Flash Denial on 911 Calls Standard Rel•14 53

LCM Messaging Overload Management Standard Rel•14 55 NTSX05AA Processor on DTC7 Standard Rel•14 55 RDT Table Expansion Standard Rel•14 121

Optional base software Order codes that start with BAS, EQA, GETS, LNP, LOC, NBD, NXAC, and OAM

Agency Separator NBD00003 Rel•15 71 Bearer-Independent Cancel To OAM00012 Rel•17 76 Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute OAM00012 Rel•17 77 FNPA Data Call Routing LOC00258 Rel•17 68 HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing GETS0001 Rel•15 72

ISUP Call Control Channels NBD00003 Rel•15 71 Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office EQA00031 Rel•15 67 SSP Route Detection Focused on Overload Detection LNP00202 Rel•15 69 TRAVER Billing Enhancement BAS00004 Rel•17 75 UOP Enhancements LOC00257 Rel•15 66

XA-Core 2 + 1 NXAC0200 Rel•15 65 XA-Core 2+1 Additional Memory Support NXAC0200 Rel•17 65 XA-Core 3+1 Additional Memory Support NXAC0300 Rel•17 65 XA-Core 3+1 Support for 1152 Meg Memory NXAC0300 Rel•15 65

REFERENCE NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY Feature Order Scheduled Starting


294

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) Dial Pulse Converter AIN00292 Rel•15 127 Extended Ringing to StoR AIN00291 Rel•15 126

N11 Line Attributes AIN00293 Rel•15 129 Originate Disconnect Event AIN00301 Rel•17 130

PFC Trigger Line Attributes AIN00294 Rel•15 128 PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription AIN00294 Rel•15 128

Send to Resource Enhancements AIN00304 Rel•17 132 Service Enablers Base Release 9 AIN00290 Rel•15 126 Service Enablers Base Release 10 AIN00300 Rel•17 130

Timeout Event AIN00302 Rel•17 131 TSTRC Timer Enhancement AIN00303 Rel•17 131

Agent and Operator Services (TOPS) ADACC Enhancement ENSV0001 Rel•14 224 DACC Enhancements OSDA0001 Rel•14 225

End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) OSB00101 Rel•15 223 OSNC Enhancements OSEA0001 Rel•14 223 Release Link Trunking Variant 2 OSEA0001 Rel•14 224

TOPS and Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking OSB00001 Rel•14 222 TOPS and SuperNode Data Manager Interworking OSB00101 Rel•15 222

Emergency Number Services (E911) Geodetic Location Parameter ENS00005 Rel•15 177

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements ICM00010 Rel•15 194 ICM Call Held Event Reporting ICM00050 Rel•15 195 Logon Enhancements ICM00001 Rel•15 192

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REFERENCE Feature Order Scheduled Starting


295

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements NI-2 NI000035 Rel•17 114 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements NTNA NI000036 Rel•17 114 Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 NI000043 Rel•15 112

Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NTNA NI000033 Rel•15 112 Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants NI000033 Rel•15 113 NI-1 E911 NI000041 Rel•17 113

Long Distance Features (DMS-500 system) AMA Alternate Billing UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 AMA Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 Billing Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141

CDR to AMA Compatibility UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 Charge Number Delivery Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 CIC Trigger Subscription UCSB0001 Rel•15 149

Default Routing 1 UCSB0001 Rel•15 148 Default Routing 2 CAIN0100 Rel•15 153 ISDN PRI Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141

ISUP Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 150 ISUP Exit Message Support UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 Local Incoming CIC Routing UCSB0001 Rel•15 149

Miscellaneous Parameter Population CAIN0100 Rel•14 151 NetworkBuilder Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE UCSB0001 Rel•15 144 NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications CAIN0100 Rel•14 151

NetworkBuilder Tools Modification CAIN0100 Rel•14 151 Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 OM Support CAIN0100 Rel•15 154

Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening UCSB0001 Rel•15 150 Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 RTEATTR Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 147



296

SAP Parameter Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 147 Special Number Handling UCSB0001 Rel•14 144 STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 Table Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•14 143

TCAP Enhancements CAIN0100 Rel•15 153 TNS Delivery UCSB0001 Rel•14 143 TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 146

Nortel Networks Centrex Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines RES00087 Rel•15 167 Series Completing Hunt Groups MDC00009 Rel•17 168 Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility MDC00071 Rel•17 167

Residential Enhanced Services (RES) Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number RES00085 Rel•17 173 Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhancement RES00097 Rel•17 174

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) Carrier Banner Enhancements SPMS0001 Rel•14 101 Private Exchange Trunks on SPM SPMS0001 Rel•14 97 Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability SPMS0001 Rel•15 102

Reach Through Surveillance SPMS0014 Rel•14 104 Resource Module SWACT SPMS0001 Rel•17 103 SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS SPMS0050 Rel•15 106

SS7 Channelized Access SPMS0001 Rel•14 99 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – ISUP/PTS SPMS0016 Rel•15 105 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – PRI SPMS0017 Rel•15 105

Subscriber Carrier Modules SMS/SMS-R Loopback BAS00016 Rel•14 122

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REFERENCE Feature Order Scheduled Starting


297

Universal Edge 9000 platform Auto-homing of DS-30Bs UEDG0001 Rel•17 86 Enhanced Alarm Reporting UEDG0001 Rel•17 87

Firmware Download for TDM Controller Card UEDG0001 Rel•15 85 Flow-through Provisioning UEDG0001 Rel•17 86

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards UEDG0001 Rel•15 85

Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services UEDG0001 Rel•14 84

Wireless features (DMS-100 Wireless system) 3-Way Call Management A0799273 LWW00007 266 Access Robustness Package A0791359 LWW00007 244 Account Code Activatable A0799278 or A0806788 LWW00007 264

Alternate Routing of Emergency Calls Standard LWW00007 260 ANSI-41D International Roaming A0799279 LWW00007 261 CDMA BSS Manager Operational Enhancements – NBSS 9.0 Standard LWW00007 241

CDMA LTX Program A0791853 LWW00007 245 CDMA MTX Cell Expansion Standard LWW00007 241 CDMA MTX Cell Number Increase Standard LWW00007 242

Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) Pooling A0787427 LWW00007 252 DIMA Blocking Standard LWW00007 240 DualMode – TRU II Digital Radio NTAX98AA LWW00007 247

DualMode – TRU III Digital Radio NTAW99AA LWW00007 248 EX93AB (EX93AA Evolution) A0782699 LWW00007 253 Fast Connect – TDMA A0716538 LWW00007 262

Flexible GTT Type for ORREQ Routing A0716542 LWW00007 237 Flexible ISUP — Phase II A07716541 LWW00007 232 Intelligent Paging A0791358 LWW00007 243

Intelligent Peripheral Connect/Disconnect Reset Timer A0716560 LWW00007 234 Intelligent Voice Service Negotiation Standard LWW00007 242 Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity A0787648 LWW00007 254



298

Knowledge-Based Handoff A0787650 LWW00007 251 MD Selector Standard LWW00007 260 Multiple Digital Channel Control A0802652 LWW00007 253

Multiple LAPD to Cellsite A0798854 LWW00007 254 ORREQ Message Enhancements A0716559 LWW00007 235 ORREQ Message Enhancements A0716560 LWW00007 234

Per Subscriber Roaming by MSCID A0716567 LWW00007 257 Pound-Only ORREQ Trigger A0716560 LWW00007 235 Quality-Driven Channel Selection A0787653 LWW00007 255

Selective Announcement on Call Termination A0799290 LWW00007 264 Shared Wireless Access A0806795 LWW00007 265 Single Flash 3-Way Calling Standard LWW00007 263

Spectrum Peripheral Module A0806992 LWW00007 233 Time and Date Support A0799293 LWW00007 252 TRU III 1900 Radio Transceiver A0736181 LWW00007 258

Upgrade A0716559 A0716561 LWW00007 235 Voice Channel Time In Time Out (VCHTITO) A0787654 LWW00007 256

WIN T_Answer Detection Point A0802640 LWW00007 236 WIN T_Disconnect Detection Point A0802641 LWW00007 236


299

GA features: Rel•14

The following index arranges by order code all the new features (residing on the Computing Module or XA-Core) that are generally available for the first time in LEC00014, LET00014, and LLT00014.

Order Feature Starting code name page


Standard Automatic Line Insulation Test (ALIT) Enhncmnt 54 Standard Call Forward Activation 54 Standard Double-Density ESMA 120

Standard Flash Denial on 911 Calls 53 Standard Flexible Restore 53 Standard HMI Enhancements for C7LKSET 54

Standard LCM Messaging Overload Management 55 Standard NTSX05AA Processor on DTC7 55 Standard RDT Table Expansion 121

Optional base software Order codes that start with ISP7, LOC, NBD, NXAC, OAM, and SERV

ISP70008 Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP 78 LOC00025 Enhanced Table Compression Tool 66

NBD00003 Punch List Capabilities 70 NXAC0300 XA-Core 3 + 1 64

OAM00010 EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage 76 SERV0003 Redundant Feature Enhancements 74

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) AIN00280 Service Enablers Base Release 8 124 AIN00281 Terminal Resource Availability 124 AIN00282 Carrier Usage Parameter 125



300

Agent Services (TOPS) These features are listed by Rel•14 order codes (most of these codes change in Rel•15; see pages 288 and 289 for a summary of the order code consolidation).

ENSV0001 ADACC Enhancement 224 OSB00001 TOPS / Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking 222

End-of-Life Activities (TOPS14) 222

OSDA0001 DACC Enhancements 225 OSEA0001 OSNC Enhancements 223

Release Link Trunking Variant 2 224

Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ACD00081 Supplementary ACD DN Expansion 196 ACD00082 Not Ready on Secondary DN Enhancement 196

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) ICM00001 Increase ICM Sessions 192 ICM00075 ICM Support for BRI 193

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) NI000052 On Demand B-Channel Packet 91

Long Distance Features (DMS-500 system) CAIN0100 NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications 151

Miscellaneous Parameter Population 151 NetworkBuilder Tools Modification 151 Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement 152 Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements 152 TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping 152

UCSB0001 Billing Enhancements 141 Charge Number Delivery Enhancements 142 ISDN PRI Enhancements 141 ISUP Exit Message Support 142 Special Number Handling 144 STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector 142 Table Trunk Group Changes 143 TNS Delivery 143



301

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) [NCL SPM00035] SPMS0001 Black Box Fraud Prevention Over OC-3 PTS 98

Carrier Banner Enhancements 101 Internal Routing 99 LEC Echo Cancellation 100 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) 102 Private Exchange Trunks on SPM 97 SS7 Channelized Access 99

SPMS0014 Reach Through Surveillance 104 SPMS0040 OC-3 Line Timing 105

Subscriber Carrier Modules BAS00016 SMS/SMS-R Loopback 122

Universal Edge 9000 platform UEDG0001 Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services 84


302


The following index arranges by order code all the new features (residing on the Computing Module or XA-Core) that are planned to be generally available for the first time in LEC00015, LET00015, and LLT00015.



Standard CDN Command Support for Intercept 56 Standard Datafill 110 Log 56 Standard DTMF Default Capability 56

Optional base software Order codes that start with EQA, GETS, LNP, LOC, NBD, and NXAC

EQA00031 Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office 67 GETS0001 HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing 72 LNP00202 SSP Route Detection Focused Overload Detection 69 LOC00257 UOP Enhancements 66

NBD00003 Agency Separator 71 ISUP Call Control Channels 71

NXAC0200 XA-Core 2+1 65 NXAC0300 XA-Core 3+1 Support for 1152 Meg Memory 65

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) AIN00290 Service Enablers Base Release 9 126 AIN00291 Extended Ringing to StoR 126 AIN00292 Dial Pulse Converter 127 AIN00293 N11 Line Attributes 129 AIN00294 PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription 128

PFC Trigger Line Attributes 128

Agent Services (TOPS) OSB00101 End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) 223

TOPS and SuperNode Data Manager Interworking 222



303

Emergency Number Services (E911) ENS00005 Geodetic Location Parameter 177 ENS00017 Off-Board Selective Routing Interface 178

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) ICM00001 Logon Enhancements 192 ICM00010 CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements 194 ICM00050 ICM Call Held Event Reporting 195

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) NI000043 Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 112

NI000033 Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements NTNA 112 Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants 113

Long Distance Features (DMS-500 system) CAIN0100 Default Routing 2 153

OM Support 154 TCAP Enhancements 153

UCSB0001 AMA Alternate Billing 145 AMA Enhancements 145 CDR to AMA Compatibility 145 CIC Trigger Subscription 149 Default Routing 1 148 ISUP Enhancements 150 Local Incoming CIC Routing 149 Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE 144 Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening 150 RTEATTR Enhancements 147 SAP Parameter Changes 147 Trunk Group Changes 146

Nortel Networks Centrex/ Residential Enhanced Services RES00087 Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines 167



304

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) NCL SPM00115 SPMS0001 Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) 102 SPMS0016 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality

Control – ISUP/PTS 105 SPMS0017 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality

Control – PRI 105

NCL SPM00116 SPMS0001 Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability 102 SPMS0050 SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS 106

Universal Edge 9000 platform UEDG0001 Firmware Download for TDM Controller Card 85 UEDG0001 Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services

on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards 85


305


The following index arranges by order code all the new features (residing on the Computing Module or XA-Core) that are planned to be generally available for the first time in LEC00017, LET00017, and LLT00017.



Standard ESMA 2688 Voice Line Support 121 Optional base software Order codes that start with BAS, LOC, NXAC, and OAM

BAS00004 TRAVER Billing Enhancement 75 LOC00258 FNPA Data Call Routing 68 NXAC0200 XA-Core 2+1 Additional Memory Support 65 NXAC0300 XA-Core 3+1 Additional Memory Support 65 OAM00012 Bearer-Independent Cancel To 76

Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute 77 Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN)

AIN00300 Service Enablers Base Release 10 130 AIN00301 Originate Disconnect Event 130 AIN00302 Timeout Event 131 AIN00303 TSTRC Timer Enhancement 131 AIN00304 Send to Resource Enhancements 132

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

NI000035 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements NI-2 114 NI000036 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements NTNA 114 NI000041 NI-1 E911 113


MDC00009 Series Completing Hunt Groups 168 MDC00071 Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility 167



306

Residential Enhanced Services (RES) RES00085 Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number 173 RES00097 Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhncmnt 174

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) [NCL SM00117]

SPMS0001 Resource Module SWACT 103 Universal Edge 9000 platform

UEDG0001 Auto-homing of DS-30Bs 86 UEDG0001 Enhanced Alarm Reporting 87 UEDG0001 Flow-through Provisioning 86


307

GA features: LWW00007

The following arranges by Common Product Code (CPC) all the new wireless features (residing on the Computing Module of the DMS-100 Wireless system) that are generally available for the first time in LWW00007. New wireline features are the Rel•13 features detailed in the previous Feature Planning Guide, issue 21.

Standard wireless software Wireless Starting

feature name page

Alternate Routing of Emergency Calls 260 CDMA BSS Manager Operational Enhancements – NBSS 9.0 241

CDMA MTX Cell Expansion 241 CDMA MTX Cell Number Increase 242

DIMA Blocking 240 Intelligent Voice Service Negotiation 242

MD Selector 260 Single Flash 3-Way Calling 263

Optional wireless software CPC numb. CPC name Starting

• Wireless feature name Page

A0716538 Fast Connect – TDMA • Fast Connect – TDMA 262

A0716542 Flexible GTT Type for ORREQ Routing • Flexible GTT Type for ORREQ Routing 237

A0716559 ORREQ Message Enhancements • ORREQ Message Enhancements 235

A0716560 WIN Standards Phase I • ORREQ Message Enhancements 235 • Intelligent Peripheral Connect/Disconnect Reset Timer 234 • Pound-Only ORREQ Trigger 235

A0716561 WIN Standards Phase I – Upgrade A0716559 • WIN Standards Phase I – Upgrade A0716559 235

A0716567 Per Subscriber Roaming by MSCID • Per Subscriber Roaming by MSCID 257


CPC numb. CPC name Starting • Wireless feature name Page

308

A0736181 TRU III 1900 Radio Transceiver • TRU III 1900 Radio Transceiver 258

A07716541 Flexible ISUP — Phase II • Flexible ISUP — Phase II 232

A0782699 EX93AB (EX93AA Evolution) • EX93AB (EX93AA Evolution) 253

A0787427 Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) Pooling

• Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) Pooling 252

A0787648 Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity • Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity 254

A0787650 Knowledge-Based Handoff • Knowledge-Based Handoff 251

A0787653 Quality-Driven Channel Selection

• Quality-Driven Channel Selection 255

A0787654 Voice Channel Time In Time Out (VCHTITO) • Voice Channel Time In Time Out (VCHTITO) 256

A0791358 Intelligent Paging • Intelligent Paging 243

A0791359 Access Robustness Package

• Access Robustness Package 24

A0791853 CDMA LTX Program • CDMA LTX Program 245

A0798854 Multiple LAPD to Cellsite • Multiple LAPD to Cellsite 254

A0799273 3-Way Call Management

• 3-Way Call Management 266

A0799278 or A0806788 Account Code Activatable • Account Code Activatable 264

A0799279 ANSI-41D International Roaming

• ANSI-41D International Roaming 261

A0799290 Selective Announcement on Call Termination • Selective Announcement on Call Termination 264


CPC numb. CPC name Starting • Wireless feature name Page

309

A0799293 Time and Date Support • Time and Date Support 252

A0802640 WIN T_Answer Detection Point • WIN T_Answer Detection Point 236

A0802641 WIN T_Disconnect Detection Point • WIN T_Disconnect Detection Point 236

A0802652 Multiple Digital Channel Control

• Multiple Digital Channel Control 253

A0806795 Shared Wireless Access • Shared Wireless Access 265

A0806992 Spectrum Peripheral Module • Spectrum Peripheral Module 233

NTAW99AA DualMode – TRU III Digital Radio

• DualMode – TRU III Digital Radio 248

NTAX98AA DualMode – TRU II Digital Radio • DualMode – TRU II Digital Radio 247


310

GA features: DMS-STP system

The following index alphabetically arranges all the new Computing Module features that are currently scheduled to be available in product release STP005.

Feature Technical Order Starting

name reference code page


ITU (14 Bit) OMAP MRVT 19007797 Standard 268 Linkset Expansion to 432 19007799 Standard 269 Low-Speed Link/High-Speed Link Mix Support on ELPP 19007668 Standard 269

Optional software HSL SS7 Transport over ATM 19007658 STPE0006 270 Increase HSL support from 24 to 36 19007800 STPE0006 270 Multiple Point Code Support 19007804 TEL00012 271 Network Indicator Interworking 19007803 TEL00015 271 Routeset Expansion to 4000 19007801 STPE0004 272


311

Index by technical reference

So the network provider can request more information about a particular feature from a Nortel Networks representative, many software descriptions include a development code next to Technical reference, listed below.

Technical Feature Order Scheduled Starting

Reference name code Avail. page

Standard base software 59017023 LCM Messaging Overload Management Standard Rel•14 55 59017416 Call Forward Activation Standard Rel•14 54 59017962 LCM Messaging Overload Management Standard Rel•14 55 59018498 Flexible Restore Standard Rel•14 53

59018646 Automatic Line Insulation Test (ALIT) Enhncmnt Standard Rel•14 54 59019359 HMI Enhancements for C7LKSET Standard Rel•14 54 59020565 Flash Denial on 911 Calls Standard Rel•14 53 59022651 CDN Command Support for Intercept Standard Rel•15 56

59022657 DTMF Default Capability Standard Rel•15 56 59023032 Datafill 110 Log Standard Rel•15 56 59029153 ESMA 2688 Voice Line Support Standard Rel•17 121

Optional base software Order codes that start with: EQA, GETS, ISP7, ISUP, LOC, NBD, NPE, NTS, NXAC, OAM, and TEL

59015296 Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP ISP70008 Rel•14 78 59016574 EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage OAM00010 Rel•14 76 59017494 Redundant Feature Enhancements SERV0003 Rel•14 74 59017776 Enhanced Table Compression Tool LOC00025 Rel•14 66

59018013 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70 59018020 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70 59018022 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70 59018034 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70

59018041 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70 59018048 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70 59021965 ISUP Call Control Channels NBD00003 Rel•15 71

REFERENCE NORTEL NETWORKS DMS-100/500 FAMILY Technical Feature Order Scheduled Starting


312

59021972 HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing GETS0001 Rel•15 72 59021979 Agency Separator NBD00003 Rel•15 71 59022792 SSP Route Detection Focused: Overload Detection LNP00202 Rel•15 69 59024956 FNPA Data Call Routing LOC00258 Rel•17 68

59026480 UOP Enhancements LOC00257 Rel•15 66 59026486 Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office EQA00031 Rel•15 67 59028697 Bearer-Independent Cancel To OAM00012 Rel•17 76

Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute OAM00012 Rel•17 77 59029045 TRAVER Billing Enhancement BAS00004 Rel•17 75

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) 59016005 Terminal Resource Availability AIN00281 Rel•14 124 59016521 Carrier Usage Parameter AIN00282 Rel•14 125 59022490 Extended Ringing to StoR AIN00291 Rel•15 126 59022498 Extended Ringing to StoR AIN00291 Rel•15 126

59022523 Dial Pulse Converter AIN00292 Rel•15 127 59022533 PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription AIN00294 Rel•15 128 59022554 N11 Line Attributes AIN00293 Rel•15 129 59022754 PFC Trigger Line Attributes AIN00294 Rel•15 128

59028609 Timeout Event AIN00302 Rel•17 131 59028621 TSTRC Timer Enhancement AIN00303 Rel•17 131 59028631 Originate Disconnect Event AIN00301 Rel•17 139 59028643 Send to Resource Enhancements AIN00304 Rel•17 132

Agent and Operator Services (TOPS) 59015901 End-of-Life Activities (TOPS14) OSB00001 Rel•14 222 59019041 OSNC Enhancements OSEA0001 Rel•14 223

59020353 ADACC Enhancement ENSV0001 Rel•14 224 59021116 DACC Enhancements OSDA0001 Rel•14 225 59021938 TOPS / Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking OSB00001 Rel•14 222

59022000 Release Link Trunking Variant 2 OSEA0001 Rel•14 224 59022361 End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) OSB00101 Rel•15 223

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REFERENCE Technical Feature Order Scheduled Starting


313

Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 59016859 Supplementary ACD DN Expansion ACD00081 Rel•14 196 59016864 Not Ready on Secondary DN Enhancement ACD00082 Rel•14 196

Emergency Number Services (E911) 59021986 Geodetic Location Parameter ENS00005 Rel•15 177 59021993 Off-Board Selective Routing Interface ENS00017 Rel•15 178

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) 59016379 ICM Support for BRI ICM00075 Rel•14 193 59016386 Increase ICM Sessions ICM00001 Rel•14 192 59022448 ICM Call Held Event Reporting ICM00050 Rel•15 195

59022453 Logon Enhancements ICM00001 Rel•15 192 59022576 CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements ICM00010 Rel•15 194

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 59013206 On Demand B-Channel Packet NI000052 Rel•14 91 59013267 On Demand B-Channel Packet NI000052 Rel•14 91

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) 59023407 Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 NI000043 Rel•15 112

Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NTNA NI000033 Rel•15 112 59023416 Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants NI000033 Rel•15 113

59029596 NI-1 E911 NI000041 Rel•17 113 59030466 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NI-2) NI000035 Rel•17 114

Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NTNA) NI000036 Rel•17 114

Long Distance Features (DMS-500 system) 60008434 Special Number Handling UCSB0001 Rel•14 144 60008437 Charge Number Delivery Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 60008441 Billing Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141

60008447 STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 60008450 TNS Delivery UCSB0001 Rel•14 143



314

60008453 Table Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•14 143 60008663 NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications CAIN0100 Rel•14 151 60008667 NetworkBuilder Tools Modification CAIN0100 Rel•14 151

60008668 Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 60008669 ISUP Exit Message Support UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 60008690 TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping CAIN0100 Rel•14 152

60008691 Miscellaneous Parameter Population CAIN0100 Rel•14 151 60008693 Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 60008714 ISDN PRI Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141

60009555 CIC Trigger Subscription UCSB0001 Rel•15 149 60009557 OM Support CAIN0100 Rel•15 154 60009562 Default Routing 2 CAIN0100 Rel•15 153

60009563 AMA Alternate Billing UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 60009567 AMA Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 60009571 TCAP Enhancements CAIN0100 Rel•15 153

60009574 Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 146 60009577 RTEATTR Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 147 60009580 CDR to AMA Compatibility UCSB0001 Rel•15 145

60009586 Local Incoming CIC Routing UCSB0001 Rel•15 149 60009588 SAP Parameter Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 147 60009589 Default Routing 1 UCSB0001 Rel•15 148

60009590 Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening UCSB0001 Rel•15 150 60009591 ISUP Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 150 60335759 Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE UCSB0001 Rel•15 144

Nortel Networks Centrex 59022058 Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines RES00087 Rel•15 167 59029575 Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility MDC00071 Rel•17 167 59030406 Series Completing Hunt Groups MDC00009 Rel•17 168

FPG 2001, ISSUE 22 REFERENCE Technical Feature Order Scheduled Starting


315

Residential Enhanced Services (RES) 59030419 Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number RES00085 Rel•17 173 59030434 Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhncmnt RES00097 Rel•17 174

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) 59006639 SS7 Channelized Access SPMS0001 Rel•14 99 59010382 Black Box Fraud Prevention Over OC-3 PTS SPMS0001 Rel•14 98 59012158 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102

59012246 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102 59013302 LEC Echo Cancellation SPMS0001 Rel•14 100 59013504 Internal Routing SPMS0001 Rel•14 99

59013906 OC-3 Line Timing SPMS0040 Rel•14 105 59013912 OC-3 Line Timing SPMS0040 Rel•14 105 59014167 SS7 Channelized Access SPMS0001 Rel•14 99

59014406 Private Exchange Trunks on SPM SPMS0001 Rel•14 97 59014578 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102 59014583 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102

59014588 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102 59015313 Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102 59018431 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality

Control – ISUP/PTS SPMS0016 Rel•15 105 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – PRI SPMS0017 Rel•15 105

59018487 Reach Through Surveillance SPMS0014 Rel•14 104 59021056 Carrier Banner Enhancements SPMS0001 Rel•14 101 59026415 Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) SPMS0001 Rel•15 102

59026468 Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) SPMS0001 Rel•15 102 59027128 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality

Control – ISUP/PTS SPMS0016 Rel•15 105 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – PRI SPMS0017 Rel•15 105

59030631 SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS SPMS0050 Rel•15 106 59031339 SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS SPMS0050 Rel•15 106



316

59032793 Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability SPMS0001 Rel•15 102 60008896 Reach Through Surveillance SPMS0014 Rel•14 104

Subscriber Carrier Modules 59021433 SMS/SMS-R Loopback BAS00016 Rel•14 122

Universal Edge 9000 platform 59020881 Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services UEDG0001 Rel•14 84


317

Index by feature name

The following index arranges the features resident on the Computing Module or XA-Core by feature name. By request from readers, this edition of the FPG lists all the features in a single index, instead of dividing the list into service categories.

Feature Order Scheduled Starting name code Avail. page

A Access Robustness Package A0791359 LWW00007 244 Account Code Activatable A0799278 or A0806788 LWW00007 264 ADACC Enhancement ENSV0001 Rel•14 224

Agency Separator NBD00003 Rel•15 71 Alternate Routing of Emergency Calls Standard LWW00007 260 AMA Alternate Billing UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 AMA Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 145

ANSI-41D International Roaming A0799279 LWW00007 261 Auto-homing of DS-30Bs UEDG0001 Rel•17 86 Automatic Line Insulation Test (ALIT) Enhancement Standard Rel•14 54

B Bearer-Independent Cancel To OAM00012 Rel•17 76 Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute OAM00012 Rel•17 77

Billing Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141 Black Box Fraud Prevention Over OC-3 PTS SPMS0001 Rel•14 98

C Call Forward Activation Standard Rel•14 54 Carrier Banner Enhancements SPMS0001 Rel•14 101 Carrier Usage Parameter AIN00282 Rel•14 125 CDMA BSS Manager Operational Enhancements – NBSS 9.0 Standard LWW00007 241

CDMA LTX Program A0791853 LWW00007 245 CDMA MTX Cell Expansion Standard LWW00007 241 CDMA MTX Cell Number Increase Standard LWW00007 242 CDN Command Support for Intercept Standard Rel•15 56



318

CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements ICM00010 Rel•15 194 CDR to AMA Compatibility UCSB0001 Rel•15 145 Charge Number Delivery Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 142

CIC Trigger Subscription UCSB0001 Rel•15 149 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NI-2) NI000035 Rel•17 114 Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NTNA) NI000036 Rel•17 114

D DACC Enhancements OSDA0001 Rel•14 225 Datafill 110 Log Standard Rel•15 56

Default Routing 1 UCSB0001 Rel•15 148 Default Routing 2 CAIN0100 Rel•15 153

Dial Pulse Converter AIN00292 Rel•15 127 Digital Locate Receiver (DLR) Pooling A0787427 LWW00007 252

DIMA Blocking Standard LWW00007 240 Double-Density ESMA Standard Rel•14 120

DTMF Default Capability Standard Rel•15 56 Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines RES00087 Rel•15 167

DualMode – TRU II Digital Radio NTAX98AA LWW00007 247 DualMode – TRU III Digital Radio NTAW99AA LWW00007 248

E EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage OAM00010 Rel•14 76 End-of-Life Activities (TOPS14) OSB00001 Rel•14 222

End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) OSB00101 Rel•15 223 Enhanced Alarm Reporting UEDG0001 Rel•17 87

Enhanced Table Compression Tool LOC00025 Rel•14 66 ESMA 2688 Voice Line Support Standard Rel•17 121

EX93AB (EX93AA Evolution) A0782699 LWW00007 253 Extended Ringing to StoR AIN00291 Rel•15 126



319

F Fast Connect – TDMA A0716538 LWW00007 262 Firmware Download for TDM Controller Card UEDG0001 Rel•15 85 Flash Denial on 911 Calls Standard Rel•14 53

Flexible GTT Type for ORREQ Routing A0716542 LWW00007 237 Flexible ISUP — Phase II A07716541 LWW00007 232 Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP ISP70008 Rel•14 78

Flexible Restore Standard Rel•14 53 Flow-through Provisioning UEDG0001 Rel•17 86 FNPA Data Call Routing LOC00258 Rel•17 68

G Geodetic Location Parameter ENS00005 Rel•15 177

H HMI Enhancements for C7LKSET Standard Rel•14 54 HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing GETS0001 Rel•15 72 HSL SS7 Transport over ATM STPE0006 STP05 270

I ICM Call Held Event Reporting ICM00050 Rel•15 195 ICM Support for BRI ICM00075 Rel•14 193 Increase HSL support from 24 to 36 STPE0006 STP05 270

Increase ICM Sessions ICM00001 Rel•14 192 Intelligent Paging A0791358 LWW00007 243 Intelligent Peripheral Connect/Disconnect Reset Timer A0716560 LWW00007 234

Intelligent Voice Service Negotiation Standard LWW00007 242 Inter/Intra System Handoff Parity A0787648 LWW00007 254 Internal Routing SPMS0001 Rel•14 99

ISDN PRI Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•14 141 ISUP Call Control Channels NBD00003 Rel•15 71 ISUP Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 150



320

ISUP Exit Message Support UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 ITU (14 Bit) OMAP MRVT Standard STP05 268

K Knowledge-Based Handoff A0787650 LWW00007 251

L LCM Messaging Overload Management Standard Rel•14 55 LEC Echo Cancellation SPMS0001 Rel•14 100

Linkset Expansion to 432 Standard STP05 269 Local Incoming CIC Routing UCSB0001 Rel•15 149

Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 NI000043 Rel•15 112 Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NTNA NI000033 Rel•15 112

Logon Enhancements ICM00001 Rel•15 192 Low-Speed Link/High-Speed Link Mix Support on ELPP Standard STP05 269

M MD Selector Standard LWW00007 260 Miscellaneous Parameter Population CAIN0100 Rel•14 151

Multiple Digital Channel Control A0802652 LWW00007 253 Multiple LAPD to Cellsite A0798854 LWW00007 254 Multiple Point Code Support TEL00012 STP05 271

N N11 Line Attributes AIN00293 Rel•15 129 Network Indicator Interworking TEL00015 STP05 271 Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants NI000033 Rel•15 113

NetworkBuilder Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE UCSB0001 Rel•15 144 NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications CAIN0100 Rel•14 151 NetworkBuilder Tools Modification CAIN0100 Rel•14 151

NI-1 E911 NI000041 Rel•17 113 Not Ready on Secondary Directory Number Enhancement ACD00082 Rel•14 196 NTSX05AA Processor on DTC7 Standard Rel•14 55



321

O OC-3 Line Timing SPMS0040 Rel•14 105 Off-Board Selective Routing Interface ENS00017 Rel•15 178 Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement CAIN0100 Rel•14 152

OM Support CAIN0100 Rel•15 154 On Demand B-Channel Packet NI000052 Rel•14 91 Originate Disconnect Event AIN00301 Rel•17 130

ORREQ Message Enhancements A0716559 LWW00007 235 ORREQ Message Enhancements A0716560 LWW00007 234 OSNC Enhancements OSEA0001 Rel•14 223

P Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) SPMS0001 Rel•14 102 Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) SPMS0001 Rel•15 102 Per Subscriber Roaming by MSCID A0716567 LWW00007 257

PFC Trigger Line Attributes AIN00294 Rel•15 128 PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription AIN00294 Rel•15 128 Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening UCSB0001 Rel•15 150

Pound-Only ORREQ Trigger A0716560 LWW00007 235 Private Exchange Trunks on SPM SPMS0001 Rel•14 97 Punch List Capabilities NBD00003 Rel•14 70

Q Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability SPMS0001 Rel•15 102 Quality-Driven Channel Selection A0787653 LWW00007 255

R RDT Table Expansion Standard Rel•14 121 Reach Through Surveillance SPMS0014 Rel•14 104 Redundant Feature Enhancements SERV0003 Rel•14 74

Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office EQA00031 Rel•15 67 Release Link Trunking Variant 2 OSEA0001 Rel•14 224 Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements CAIN0100 Rel•14 152



322

Resource Module SWACT SPMS0001 Rel•17 103 Routeset Expansion to 4000 STPE0004 STP05 272 RTEATTR Enhancements UCSB0001 Rel•15 147

S SAP Parameter Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 147 Selective Announcement on Call Termination A0799290 LWW00007 264 Send to Resource Enhancements AIN00304 Rel•17 132

Series Completing Hunt Groups MDC00009 Rel•17 168 Service Enablers Base Release 10 AIN00300 Rel•17 130 Service Enablers Base Release 8 AIN00280 Rel•14 124

Service Enablers Base Release 9 AIN00290 Rel•15 126 Shared Wireless Access A0806795 LWW00007 265 Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number RES00085 Rel•17 173

Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility MDC00071 Rel•17 167 Single Flash 3-Way Calling Standard LWW00007 263 SMS/SMS-R Loopback BAS00016 Rel•14 122

Special Number Handling UCSB0001 Rel•14 144 Spectrum Peripheral Module A0806992 LWW00007 233 SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS SPMS0050 Rel•15 106

SS7 Channelized Access SPMS0001 Rel•14 99 SSP Route Detection Focused on Overload Detection LNP00202 Rel•15 69

STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector UCSB0001 Rel•14 142 Supplementary ACD DN Expansion ACD00081 Rel•14 196

T Table Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•14 143 Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhancement RES00097 Rel•17 174 TCAP Enhancements CAIN0100 Rel•15 153

Terminal Resource Availability AIN00281 Rel•14 124 Time and Date Support A0799293 LWW00007 252 Timeout Event AIN00302 Rel•17 131



323

TNS Delivery UCSB0001 Rel•14 143 TOPS and Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking OSB00001 Rel•14 222 TOPS and SuperNode Data Manager Interworking OSB00101 Rel•15 222

TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping CAIN0100 Rel•14 152 TRAVER Billing Enhancement BAS00004 Rel•17 75 TRU III 1900 Radio Transceiver A0736181 LWW00007 258

Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – ISUP/PTS SPMS0016 Rel•15 105 Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – PRI SPMS0017 Rel•15 105 Trunk Group Changes UCSB0001 Rel•15 146 TSTRC Timer Enhancement AIN00303 Rel•17 131

U Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services UEDG0001 Rel•14 84 Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services

on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards UEDG0001 Rel•15 85 UOP Enhancements LOC00257 Rel•15 66 Upgrade A0716559 A0716561 LWW00007 236

V Voice Channel Time In Time Out (VCHTITO) A0787654 LWW00007 256

W WIN T_Answer Detection Point A0802640 LWW00007 236 WIN T_Disconnect Detection Point A0802641 LWW00007 236

X XA-Core 2 + 1 NXAC0200 Rel•15 65 XA-Core 2 + 1 Additional Memory Support NXAC0200 Rel•17 65 XA-Core 3 + 1 NXAC0300 Rel•14 64 XA-Core 3 + 1 Additional Memory Support NXAC0300 Rel•17 65 XA-Core 3 + 1 Support for 1152 Meg Memory NXAC0300 Rel•15 65

# 3-Way Call Management A0799273 LWW00007 266


324

Index by order code

The following index arranges by order code number the new PCL features under major service categories. This index does not include: features that are standard, whose order codes are still pending, or reside in hardware other than the Computing Module or XA-Core. In response to reader requests, this index also shows in brackets (such as: [Rel•10]) the release when the order code first became generally available.

Order code [code’s lst release] Order code name • Feature name Release Page

Optional base software Order codes that start with BAS, EQA, GETS, ISP7, LNP, LOC, NBD, NXAC, and SERV

BAS00004 [GA: Rel•02] Generic OAM • TRAVER Billing Enhancement Rel•14 76

EQA00031 [GA: Rel•15] Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office • Release Link Trunking for Equal Access End Office Rel•15 67

GETS0001 [GA: Rel•08] Government Emergency Telecommunications Service • HPC Office-Wide Call Queuing Rel•15 72

ISP70008 [GA: Rel•14] Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP • Flexible ISUP CAUSEMAP Rel•14 78

LNP00202 [GA: Rel•15] SSP Route Detection Focused on Overload Detection • SSP Route Detection Focused: Overload Detection Rel•15 69

LOC00025 [GA: Rel•11] Enhanced Local Translations • Enhanced Table Compression Tool Rel•14 66

LOC00257 [GA: Rel•15] UOP Enhancements • UOP Enhancements Rel•15 66

LOC00258 [GA: Rel•17] FNPA Data Call Routing • FNPA Data Call Routing Rel•17 68

NBD00003 [GA: Rel•09] U.S. Network Broadcast Delivery • Punch List Capabilities Rel•14 70 • Agency Separator Rel•15 71 • ISUP Call Control Channels Rel•15 71

NXAC0200 [GA: Rel•15] XA-Core 2 + 1 • XA-Core 2 + 1 Rel•15 65 • XA-Core 2+1 Additional Memory Support Rel•17 65



325

NXAC0300 [GA: Rel•14] XA-Core 3 + 1 • XA-Core 3 + 1 Rel•14 64 • XA-Core 3+1 Support for 1152 Meg Memory Rel•15 65 • XA-Core 3+1 Additional Memory Support Rel•17 65

OAM00010 [GA: Rel•14] EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage • EADAS Maintenance Busy Usage Rel•14 76

OAM00012 [GA: Rel•17] New Network Management Controls • Bearer-Independent Cancel To Rel•17 76 • Bearer-Independent, Code-Specific Reroute Rel•17 77

SERV0003 [GA: Rel•09] Redundant Feature • Redundant Feature Enhancements Rel•14 74

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) AIN00280 [GA: Rel•14] Service Enablers Base Release 8

• Service Enablers Base Release 8 Rel•14 124

AIN00281 [GA: Rel•14] Terminal Resource Availability • Terminal Resource Availability Rel•14 124

AIN00282 [GA: Rel•14] Carrier Usage Parameter • Carrier Usage Parameter Rel•14 125

AIN00290 [GA: Rel•15] Service Enablers Base Release 9 • Service Enablers Base Release 9 Rel•15 126

AIN00291 [GA: Rel•15] Extended Ringing to StoR • Extended Ringing to StoR Rel•15 126

AIN00292 [GA: Rel•15] Dial Pulse Converter • Dial Pulse Converter Rel•15 127

AIN00293 [GA: Rel•15] NI-1 Line Attributes • N11 Line Attributes Rel•15 129

AIN00294 [GA: Rel•15] PFC Trigger Administration • PFC/SFC Group-Based Subscription Rel•15 128 • PFC Trigger Line Attributes Rel•15 128

AIN00300 [GA: Rel•17] Service Enablers Base Release 10 • Service Enablers Base Release 10 Rel•17 130

AIN00301 [GA: Rel•17] Originate Disconnect • Originate Disconnect Event Rel•17 130



326

AIN00302 [GA: Rel•17] Timeout Event • Timeout Event Rel•17 131

AIN00303 [GA: Rel•17] TSTRC Timer Enhancement • TSTRC Timer Enhancement Rel•17 131

AIN00304 [GA: Rel•17] Send to Resource Enhancements • Send to Resource Enhancements Rel•17 132

Agent Services (TOPS) ENSV0001 [GA: Rel•02] Enhanced Services

• ADACC Enhancement Rel•14 224

OSB00001 [GA: Rel•02] Operator Services Basic • TOPS and Spectrum Peripheral Module Interworking Rel•14 222 • End-of-Life Activities (TOPS14) Rel•14 222

OSB00101 [GA: Rel•15] Operator Services Basic • End-of-Life Activities (TOPS15) Rel•15 223 • TOPS and SuperNode Data Manager Interworking Rel•15 222

OSDA0001 [GA: Rel•02] Operator Services Directory Assistance • DACC Enhancements Rel•14 225

OSEA0001 [GA: Rel•02] TOPS Equal Access • OSNC Enhancements Rel•14 223 • Release Link Trunking Variant 2 Rel•14 224

Centrex Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ACD00081 [GA: Rel•14] Increase Secondary DNs

• Supplementary ACD DN Expansion Rel•14 196

ACD00082 [GA: Rel•14] Not Ready On SDN Enhancement • Not Ready on Secondary DN Enhancement Rel•14 196

Emergency Number Services (E911) ENS00005 [GA: Rel•02] Enhanced 911 Base

• Geodetic Location Parameter Rel•15 177

ENS00017 [GA: Rel•14] Off-Board Selective Routing • Off-Board Selective Routing Interface Rel•15 178



327

Intelligent Call Management (ICM) ICM00001 [GA: Rel•08] Intelligent Call Management Interface

• Increase ICM Sessions Rel•14 192 • Logon Enhancements Rel•15 192

ICM00010 [GA: Rel•08] Call Center Server • CDN Display and Threshold Route Enhancements Rel•15 194

ICM00050 [GA: Rel•09] Enhanced ICM Functionality • ICM Call Held Event Reporting Rel•15 195

ICM00075 [GA: Rel•14] ICM Support for BRI • ICM Support for BRI Rel•14 193

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

NI000052 [GA: Rel•09] National ISDN-2 BRI Functionality • On Demand B-Channel Packet Rel•14 91

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

NI000033 [GA: Rel•10] PRI NI-1 Base • Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NTNA Rel•15 112 • Network Side 4ESS/5ESS Variants Rel•15 113

NI000035 [GA: Rel•10] Circular Hunt Services - National ISDN 2 • Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NI-2) Rel•17 114

NI000036 [GA: Rel•10] Circular Hunt Services - NTNA • Circular Hunting OAM Enhancements (NTNA) Rel•17 114

NI000041 [GA: Rel•17] NTNA E911 Services • NI-1 E911 Rel•17 113

NI000043 [GA: Rel•10] PRI NI-2 Base • Logical Terminal Identifier Enhancements for NI-2 Rel•15 112

Long Distance Features (DMS-500 system)

CAIN0100 [GA: Rel•05] NetworkBuilder Messages • Default Routing 2 Rel•15 153 • Miscellaneous Parameter Population Rel•14 151 • NetworkBuilder Protocol Billing Modifications Rel•14 151 • NetworkBuilder Tools Modification Rel•14 151 • Off-Hook Delay Trigger Screening Enhancement Rel•14 152



328

• OM Support Rel•15 154 • Reserved CAIN Operational Measurements Rel•14 152 • TCAP Enhancements Rel•15 153 • TR-533 ACG Cause to Treatment Mapping Rel•14 152

UCSB0001 [GA: Rel•02] Universal Carrier Services Base • AMA Alternate Billing Rel•15 145 • AMA Enhancements Rel•15 145 • Billing Enhancements Rel•14 141 • CDR to AMA Compatibility Rel•15 145 • Charge Number Delivery Enhancements Rel•14 142 • CIC Trigger Subscription Rel•15 149 • Default Routing 1 Rel•15 148 • ISDN PRI Enhancements Rel•14 141 • ISUP Enhancements Rel•15 150 • ISUP Exit Message Support Rel•14 142 • Local Incoming CIC Routing Rel•15 149 • Operator Calls via CICROUTE/OPCHOICE Rel•15 144 • Post Query Digit Analysis and Screening Rel•15 150 • RTEATTR Enhancements Rel•15 147 • SAP Parameter Changes Rel•15 147 • Special Number Handling Rel•14 144 • STDPRTCT Ambiguous Code Selector Rel•14 142 • Table Trunk Group Changes Rel•14 143 • TNS Delivery Rel•14 143 • Trunk Group Changes Rel•15 146


MDC00009 [GA: Rel•02] MDC Pro • Series Completing Hunt Groups Rel•17 168

MDC00071 [GA: Rel•17] Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility • Simultaneous Ring/3-Way Compatibility Rel•17 167

RES00087 [GA: Rel•10] Dual-Line Call Management • Dual-Line Call Management for IBN Lines Rel•15 167

Residential Enhanced Services (RES)

RES00085 [GA: Rel•17] Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number • Simultaneous Ring Virtual Directory Number Rel•17 173

RES00097 [GA: Rel•17] Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhancement • Talking Call Waiting SCWID/DSCWID Enhncmnt Rel•17 174



329

Spectrum Peripheral Module (SPM) SPMS0001 [GA: Rel•10] Spectrum Peripheral Module Base

• Black Box Fraud Prevention Over OC-3 PTS Rel•14 98 • Carrier Banner Enhancements Rel•14 101 • Internal Routing Rel•14 99 • LEC Echo Cancellation Rel•14 100 • Patching on the SPM (Rel•14) Rel•14 102 • Patching on the SPM (Rel•15) Rel•15 102 • Private Exchange Trunks on SPM Rel•14 97 • Q931 and Q921 Message Trace Capability Rel•15 102 • SS7 Channelized Access Rel•14 99 • Resource Module SWACT Rel•17 103

SPMS0014 [GA: Rel•14] Reach Through Surveillance • Reach Through Surveillance Rel•14 104

SPMS0016 [GA: Rel•15] Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – ISUP/PTS • Trunk Carrier SOC – ISUP/PTS Rel•15 105

SPMS0017 [GA: Rel•15] Trunk Carrier Software Optionality Control – PRI • Trunk Carrier SOC – PRI Rel•15 105

SPMS0040 [GA: Rel•14] OC-3 Line Timing • OC-3 Line Timing Rel•14 105

SPMS0050 [GA: Rel•15] Sync Resource Module • SPM ESI Timing for DMS MS Rel•15 106

Subscriber Carrier Module (SCM) BAS00016 [GA: Rel•02] Subscriber Carrier Modules

• SMS/SMS-R Loopback Rel•14 122

Universal Edge 9000 platform UEDG0001 [GA: Rel•12] Universal Edge 9000 DMS Platform

• Auto-homing of DS-30Bs Rel•17 86 • Enhanced Alarm Reporting Rel•17 87 • Firmware Download for TDM Controller Card Rel•15 85 • Flow-through Provisioning Rel•17 86 • Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services Rel•14 84 • Universal Edge 9000 DMS Analog Voice Services on Integrated Multicircuit Line Cards Rel•15 85


330

Index by acronyms and abbreviations

The following pages list abbreviations and acronyms that appear throughout this document. As an index, this list also identifies the page numbers where these acronyms appear, as an additional aid to help you quickly find the information you need.

Entries in italics indicate pages where the acronym/abbreviation appears in an illustration or table (and not in the general text). To help make this index uncluttered and useful, the word “VARIOUS” appears for an entry that has more than seven references (however, if sections specifically highlight the acronym/abbreviation, then those pages are referenced after the word “ESPECIALLY”).

Note: this list does not include the names of data fields or translation tables.

A AA Assignment Authority ∙ 153

AABS Automated Alternate Billing System ∙ 216, 220

AAL Asynchronous Transfer Mode Adaptation Layer ∙ 43, 46-47, 49-50

ABM Access Bandwidth Manager ∙ 81

ACB Automatic Call Back ∙ 74, 170

ACD Automatic Call Distribution ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 194-197

ACE A-Interface Control Element ∙ 230

ACG Automatic Code Gapping ∙ 69, 148, 152

ACM Address Complete ∙ 78

ADACC Automated Directory Assistance Call Completion ∙ 218, 221, 224

ADAS Auto Directory Assistance Service ∙ 218, 220

ADSI Analog Services Display Interface ∙ 74, 171

ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ∙ 79-80, 82-90, 117-118

AIN Advanced Intelligent Network ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 123-132

AIS Automatic Intercept System ∙ 66-67

ALI Automatic Location Information ∙ 178-179

ALIT Automatic Line Insulation Test ∙ 54

AMA Automatic Message Accounting ∙ 68, 124, 145-146, 207

AMADNS Automated Message Accounting Data Networking System ∙ 43, 204, 206-207

AMPS Advance Mobile Phone Systems ∙ 227-228, 230, 232, 247-251

ANI Automatic Number Identification ∙ 139-140, 177, 188-189, 217-218, 221

API Application Programming Interface ∙ 42

APP Application Transport Parameter ∙ 146, 150

ASCII American Standard Code for Informational Interchange ∙ 204, 205-206

ATA ASCII Terminal Access ∙ 204, 205-206

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ∙ VARIOUS


331

B BAF Bellcore Automatic Message

Accounting Format ∙ 141, 145, 206-207, 222

BBHCA Billing Busy Hour Call Attempts ∙ 206

BER Bit Error-Rate ∙ 249, 255-256

BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts ∙ 49, 60, 254

BICC Bearer Independent Call Control ∙ 43, 149

BITS Building Integrated Timing System ∙ 96, 106-107

BLDN Blank Line Intercept ∙ 56

BRI Basic Rate Interface ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 91-92

BSAP Base Station Application Part ∙ 230

BSC Base Station Controller ∙ 230, 238-239, 241-242, 245

BSN Broadband Service Node ∙ 44-45

BSS Base Station Subsystem ∙ 238-239, 241, 245

BTS Base Transceiver Station ∙ 230, 243

C CAIN Carrier Advanced Intelligent

Network ∙ 47, 143-154

CALEA Communication Assistance for Law Enforcement Act ∙ 48, 70

CAM Communications Applications Module ∙ 276, 278, 282

CAU CDMA Application Unit ∙ 230, 239

CBT Computer-Based Training ∙ 38

CCC Call Content Channel ∙ 71

CCMIS Call Center Management Informa- tion System ∙ 181, 183, 184-185, 291

ccs Century (100) Call Seconds ∙ 120

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access ∙ 227-228, 230, 232, 238-239, 241-245, 252

CDN Change Directory Number ∙ 56; or Controlled Directory Number ∙ 181, 194

CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data ∙ 247

CD-ROM Compact Disk - Read Only Memory ∙ 88, 161, 238

CDR Call Detail Recording ∙ 47, 141, 145-146, 204, 207, 264

CEM Common Equipment Module ∙ 102, 103

CEPT Committee European Post and Telecom ∙ 263, 266

CFB Call Forward Busy ∙ 74, 168

CGLP Calling Geodetic Location Parameter ∙ 36, 177

CI Command Interpreter ∙ 54, 66, 102

CIC Carrier Identification Code ∙ 77, 149; or Circuit Identification Code ∙ 282


332

CIP Carrier Identification Parameter ∙ 149

CIU CDMA Interface Unit ∙ 230, 239

CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Ser- vices ∙ 48, 78, 156, 170, 171-172, 280

CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier ∙ 66

CM Computing Module ∙ 59, 63, 84, 200, 210-211

CMSI Call Screen, Monitor and Intercept ∙ 170

CMTS Cable Media Termination Systems ∙ 45, 48

CNAM Calling Name ∙ 280

Codec Coder / Decoder ∙ 158-160, 162, 242

CORBA Common Object Request Broker ∙ 43, 83

CPA Called Party Address ∙ 149

CPC Common Product Code ∙ 23, 231-266

CPE Customer Premise Equipment ∙ 88, 90, 102, 113, 118, 165

CPU Central Processing Unit ∙ 203

CS Communication Server ∙ 30, 44, 203

CS-1 Capability Set ∙ 123, 280

CSC Chassis Switch Card ∙ 119, 290

CSP Communications System Plat- form ∙ 52, 210

CSV Comma-Separated Values ∙ 208

CTI Computer-Telephone Integration ∙ 182-183, 186-191, 193, 195

CWT Call Waiting ∙ 74, 266

D DAL Direct Access Line ∙ 95, 97, 142-

143, 151

DAT Digital Audio Tape ∙ 62, 209

DCCH Digital Control Channel ∙ 235, 247-250, 252-253, 258-259

DCE Distributed Computing Environ- ment ∙ 199, 204, 205, 211

DDD Direct Distance Dialing ∙ 47

DDMS DMS Data Management System ∙ 204, 208

DDTR DIMA Denied Termination Response ∙ 240

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ∙ 159, 161

DID Direct Inward Dial ∙ 66

DIMA Direct Inward Mobile Access ∙ 240

DIRP Device Independent Recording Peripheral ∙ 204, 207

DLC Digital Loop Carrier ∙ 79-81, 102, 115, 120-122

DLCM Dual Line Call Management ∙ 167, 173

DLR Digital Locate Receiver ∙ 247-248, 249, 251-252, 258, 259

DMS Digital Multiplex System ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 9-18

DMT Discrete Multi-Tone ∙ 82, 88, 90, 118

DN Directory Number ∙ VARIOUS

DNI Drop and Insert feature ∙ 254

DNIS Dialed Number Inward Service ∙ 188

DOCSIS Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification ∙ 43, 48, 50


333

DP Dial Pulse ∙ 56, 126-127

DPC Destination Point Code ∙ 281

DPP Distributed Processing Peripheral ∙ 201, 291

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory ∙ 55

DSCWID Deluxe Spontaneous Call Waiting ID ∙ 74, 171-172, 174

DSL Digital Subscriber Line ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 80-90

DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer ∙ 117

DSP Digital Signal Processing ∙ 102, 159, 248, 258

DSPM Digital Signal Processor Module ∙ 249, 253

DT Digitone ∙ 56

DTC Digital Trunk Controller ∙ 61, 99, 101, 230

DTC7 Digital Trunk Controller for SS7 ∙ 55

DTCI Digital Trunk Controller for ISDN ∙ 55, 103

DTE Digital Trunk Equipment ∙ 94

DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency ∙ 56, 126-127

E E911 Enhanced 911 ∙ 26, 36, 78, 109,

111, 113, 175-179

EADAS Engineering and Administrative Data Acquisition System ∙ 76-77, 204, 208

EAEO Equal Access End Office ∙ 67-68

EANT Equal Access Network Trunk ∙ 143, 146

EBCR Enhanced Busy Call Return ∙ 170

EDAC Error Detection and Correction ∙ 55

EDRAM Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement Machine ∙ 206, 212, 287

EDSPM Enhanced Digital Signal Processing Module ∙ 231, 253

EIU Ethernet Interface Unit ∙ 192

ELPP Enhanced Link Peripheral Processor ∙ 269

EM Extended Memory ∙ 60, 63-65, 284

EMI Electromagnetic Interference ∙ 201, 258

ENET Enhanced Network ∙ 64, 120, 121, 285

ENS Emergency Number Service ∙ 175-179

ESA Emergency Standalone ∙ 116

ESI External Sync Interface ∙ 106-107

ESMA Expanded Subscriber Carrier Module-100A ∙ 52, 115, 120-122


334

ETA Enhanced Terminal Access ∙ 204, 206

ETR Easy To Reach ∙ 77

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute ∙ 43, 280

EVRC Enhanced Variable Rate Codec ∙ 239, 242-243

F FACET Flexible Advanced Capacity

Engineering Tool ∙ 284

FCAPS Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, and Security ∙ 159

FCC Federal Communications Commis- sion ∙ 43, 70, 176, 178

FCS First Customer Ship ∙ 30, 32

FGC Feature Group C ∙ 144

FGD Feature Group D ∙ 149, 153, 218, 221

FLIS Fiberized Link Interface Shelf ∙ 230

FNPA Foreign Numbering Plan Area ∙ 68

FPG Feature Planning Guide ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 34-38

FTFS Fault-Tolerant File System ∙ 61

FTP File Transport Protocol ∙ 43, 192, 207

FVS First Volume Ship (same as GA) ∙ 30, 32-33, 38, 49-50

G

GA General Availability (same as FVS) ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 32-33

GAP Generic Activation Parameter ∙ 67

GDI Guaranteed Database Integrity ∙ 214

GETS Government Emergency Telecom- munications Service ∙ 72-73

GLP Graphical Lines Provisioning ∙ 214

GOP Generic Operation Parameter ∙ 150

GSM Global System for Mobile Com- munications ∙ 199, 252, 280

GTT Global Title Translations ∙ 237, 261, 277-281

GUI Graphical User Interface ∙ 199, 206, 211, 274, 277, 279, 282

H

HDT Host Digital Terminal ∙ 81

HLR Home Location Register ∙ 229, 234

HMI Human-to-Machine Interface ∙ 54, 199

HPC TQ High Probability of Completion Trunk Queueing ∙ 72-73

HPC High Probability of Completion ∙ 72-73

HSL High-Speed Link ∙ 268-270

HTR Hard to Reach ∙ 76-77

HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning ∙ 43, 94, 121, 274


335

I IAD Integrated Access Device ∙ 45, 48,

50

IAM Initial Address Message ∙ 77, 100, 146-147, 149-150, 153, 177, 232

IBN Integrated Business Network ∙ 167, 172-173

ICCM Inter-CAM (Communications Applications Module) Communi- cations Medium ∙ 276, 277

ICM Intelligent Call Management ∙ 181, 183, 186-195

ICP Intelligent Cellular Peripheral ∙ 230, 254

ICRM Integrated Cellular Remote Module ∙ 248, 250, 254, 259

IDDD International Direct Distance Dialing ∙ 47

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force ∙ 279, 282

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for Asyn- chronous Transfer Mode ∙ 118, 119

IMAS Intelligent Multiservice Access System ∙ 83, 117-119

IN Intelligent Network ∙ 123, 134, 152, 217, 220

INAP Intelligent Network Application Protocol ∙ 280

INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service ∙ 109

IOC Input/Output Controller ∙ 178, 200, 205, 285

IOM Input/Output Module ∙ 178, 285

IOP Input/Output Processor ∙ 62, 64

IP Internet Protocol ∙ VARIOUS; or Intelligent Peripheral ∙ 131-132, 234

IPoATM Internet Protocol over Asynchron- ous Transfer Mode ∙ 50

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ∙ VARIOUS

ISP Internet Service Provider ∙ 80, 93, 108

ISSHO Inter-System Soft Handoff ∙ 241, 243

ISUP ISDN User Part ∙ VARIOUS

ITU International Telecommunications Union ∙ VARIOUS

IVR Interactive Voice Response ∙ 181-182, 187-188

IWF Interworking Function ∙ 262

K k Thousand ∙ VARIOUS

kbps Kilobits per second ∙ VARIOUS

L LAN Local Area Network ∙ VARIOUS

LAPD Link Access Procedures on the D Channel ∙ 254

LARP Line Attribute Response Processing ∙ 126, 128-129

LATA Local Access Transport Area ∙ VARIOUS

LCD Liquid-Crystal Display ∙ 160

LCM Line Concentrating Module ∙ 55, 61, 81-84, 87, 116-118

LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol ∙ 211

LEC Local Exchange Carrier ∙ VARIOUS

LED Light Emitting Diode ∙ 61


336

LEN Line Equipment Number ∙ 54

LGC Line Group Controller ∙ 61, 86

LIDB Line Information Database ∙ 280

LIT Line Insulation Testing ∙ 54

LIU Link Interface Unit ∙ 230

LIU7 Link Interface Unit for SS7 ∙ 99, 269

LNP Local Number Portability ∙ 26, 69, 154, 208, 218, 221, 280

LPP Link Peripheral Processor ∙ 61, 99, 192, 218, 220, 230, 268

LTC Line and Trunk Controller ∙ 86

LTCI Line and Trunk Controller for ISDN ∙ 156, 158-159

LTID Logical Terminal Identifier ∙ 109, 110-111, 112

M MADN Multiple Appearance Directory

Number ∙ 156, 160

MAHO Mobile Assisted HandOff ∙ 251

MAP Maintenance and Administration Position ∙ 54, 83, 86-87, 101, 103, 159, 205-206

Mbps Megabits per second ∙ VARIOUS

MBS Meridian Business Set ∙ 81, 161, 181

MDN Mobile Directory Number ∙ 177

MDU Multiple Dwelling Unit ∙ 83, 118

MEDP Meridian Enhanced Digital Processor ∙ 253

MF Multi-Frequency ∙ 223

MGC Media Gateway Controller ∙ 281

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol ∙ 43, 48

MHz Megahertz ∙ VARIOUS

MIB Management Information Base ∙ 83, 145

MIN Mobile Identification Number ∙ 240, 260-261

MIPS Millions of Instructions Per Second ∙ 253

MIS Management Information System ∙ 176, 181 (see also CCMIS)

MISP Messaging ISDN Signaling Pre-processor ∙ 255

MOSS Modified Operator Signaling ∙ 144

MPC Multi-Protocol Controller ∙ 36, 178, 201, 286

MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching ∙ 43

MRVT Message Transfer Part Routing Verification Test ∙ 268

MS Message Switch ∙ 105-106

MSC Mobile Switching Center ∙ 234, 236-237, 242, 261

MSCID Mobile Switching Center Identifi- cation ∙ 257

MSC-S Mobile Switching Center – Switch ∙ 236

MSP Modular Supervisory Panel ∙ 202

MSR Mobile Service Region ∙ 240

MTA Multi-Terminal Adapter ∙ 48

MTP Message Transfer Part ∙ 43, 268, 277-279

MTU Multiple Tenant Unit ∙ 83, 118

MTX Mobile Telephone Exchange ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 226-266

MUMR Multiunit Measured Rate ∙ 75

MVI Multivendor Initiative ∙ 123, 290

MWI Message Waiting Indication ∙ 254


337

N NACD Network Automatic Call

Distribution ∙ 182

NAG Node Assessment Graph ∙ 55

NBSS Nortel Networks Base Station Subsystem ∙ 238-239, 241-245

NCL Non-Computing Module Load ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 24

NE Network Element ∙ 104

NEBS Network Equipment Building Standards ∙ 43, 201

NFAS Non-Facility Associated Signaling ∙ 110-111

NGDLC Next Generation Digital Loop Carrier ∙ 115

NI Network Indicator (or Identifier) ∙ 271, 281

NI-2 National ISDN-2 ∙ 91, 110-112, 114

NID Network Interface Device ∙ 118

NIU Network Interface Unit ∙ 99, 285

NOA Nature of Address ∙ 144, 149, 151, 232

NPA Number Plan Area ∙ 66, 77, 144, 261, 280

NPC Number Portability Controller ∙ 280

NPS Number Portability Server ∙ 280

NR Not Ready ∙ 181

NRC Network Reliability Council ∙ 278

NTNA Nortel Networks North America ∙ 110, 112-114

NTS Number Translation Services ∙ 49

O OAM Operations, Administration, and

Maintenance ∙ VARIOUS

OAM&P Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning ∙ VARIOUS

OC-3 Optical Carrier, Level 3 ∙ VARIOUS

OC3RM OC-3 Resource Module ∙ 101

OCN Original Called Number ∙ 232

OE Office Equipment ∙ 54

OM Operational Measurement ∙ 55, 98, 152-154, 168, 208, 278

OMAP Operations, Maintenance, and Administration Part ∙ 268

OPAC Outside Plant Access Cabinet ∙ 117

OPC Originating Point Code ∙ 281-282

OPM Outside Plant Module ∙ 117

ORREQ Origination Request ∙ 229, 234-235, 237

OSNC Operator Services Network Capability ∙ 222-223

OSS Operations Support System ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 198-214

OUTWATS Outgoing Wide-Area Telephone Service ∙ 109

P PBX Private Branch Exchange ∙ 48, 66-

67, 93, 98, 109, 113, 166

PC Personal Computer ∙ 160, 182, 185, 188-189, 206; or Point Code ∙ 281

PCI Personal Computer Interface ∙ 274

PCL Product Computing-Module Load ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 20-33


338

PCR Preventive Cyclic Retransmission ∙ 278

PCS Personal Communications Ser- vices ∙ 227-229, 246, 258

PDN Pilot Directory Number ∙ 173

PE Processor Element ∙ 62-65

PFC Public Feature Code ∙ 126, 128- 129

PIC Point in Call ∙ 144, 149-150

PIN Personal Identification Number ∙ 139, 265

PLoA Private Lines over ATM ∙ 82

PM Peripheral Module ∙ 55, 206, 212

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service ∙ 79-82, 84-85, 89-90, 122, 214, 285

PRI Primary Rate Interface ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 93-114

PRSM Post Release Software Manager ∙ 96, 102

PSAP Public Safety Answering Point ∙ 36, 53, 175-179, 260

PSDS Public Switched Digital Service ∙ 143

PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network ∙ 102

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Net- work ∙ VARIOUS

PTM Packet Telephony Manager ∙ 159

PTS Per-Trunk Signaling ∙ 98, 105-106

PUMA Product Upgrade Manager ∙ 52

PXFX Private Exchange / Foreign Ex- change ∙ 95, 97

Q QCS Quality-driven Channel Selection

∙ 255

QoS Quality of Service ∙ 45, 48, 89, 117-118, 157

R RCER Remote Call Event Record ∙ 177-

178, 286

RDT Remote Digital Terminal ∙ 120-121

REL Release ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 22

RES Residential Enhanced Services ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 169-174

REX Routine Exercise ∙ 278

RLCM Remote Line Concentrating Module ∙ 117

RLT Release Link Trunking ∙ 67-68, 110, 218, 221, 224

RMU Resource Manager Unit ∙ 230

RN Routing Number ∙ 280

RoR Return on Relationships ∙ 14

RPC Remote Point Code ∙ 277; or Remote Procedure Call ∙ 104

RRIF Remote Radio Interface ∙ 249

RSC-S Remote Switching Center-S ∙ 81, 86, 116-117

RSLE Remote Subscriber Line Equipment ∙ 117

RSS Remote Subsystems ∙ 277

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator ∙ 251

RTC Real-time Controller ∙ 278

RTU Right-to-Use ∙ 105-106

RVR Roamer Verification and Reinstatement ∙ 257


339

S SAP Service Activation Parameter ∙ 146-

147, 150, 153

SBA SuperNode Billing Application ∙ 63, 206-207, 222, 287

SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part ∙ 43, 278-279, 281-282

SCF Service Control Function ∙ 236

SCM Subscriber Carrier Module ∙ 115

SCMP Series Completion list ∙ 168

SCP Service Control Point ∙ VARIOUS

SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface ∙ 278, 280

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol ∙ 281-282

SCWID Spontaneous Call Waiting ID ∙ 171-172, 174, 286

SDL Signaling Data Link ∙ 277

SDM SuperNode Data Manager ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 198-214

SDN Secondary Directory Number ∙ 181, 196-197

SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory ∙ 62

SDSL Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line ∙ 81, 83, 117-118

SERVORD Service Order ∙ 52, 56, 66, 74-75, 83, 86, 156

SFC Specific Feature Code ∙ 126, 128

SimRing Simultaneous Ring feature ∙ 167-168, 171-173

SIP Session Initiation Protocol ∙ 18, 26, 41-44, 45, 49-50, 274

SLA Service Level Agreement ∙ 89

SLM System Load Module ∙ 58-59, 63, 206, 212, 284

SLoA Switched Lines over ATM ∙ 82

SLS Signaling Link Selection ∙ 278

SM Shared Memory ∙ 62

SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface ∙ 156

SMDR Station Message Detail Recording ∙ 156, 204, 207

SMS Short Message Service ∙ 227, 239, 254; or Subscriber Carrier Module-100S ∙ 122

SMS-R Subscriber Carrier Module-100S Remote ∙ 122

SNMP Simple Network Management Pro- tocol ∙ 43, 83, 88, 159

SOC Software Optionality Control ∙ 105, 206, 212

SOHO Small Office/Home Office ∙ 79

SONET Synchronous Optical Network ∙ 43, 94-96, 101, 105-107

SPM Spectrum Peripheral Module ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 94-107

SRDB Selective Routing Database ∙ 178-179

SRF Signaling Relay Function ∙ 280

SS7 Signaling System No. 7 ∙ VARIOUS

SSA Subsystem Available ∙ 281

SSCOP Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol ∙ 278

SSP Service Switching Point ∙ VARIOUS; or Subsystem Prohibited ∙ 281

SST Subsystem Test ∙ 281

StoR Send to Resource ∙ 126-127, 132

STP Signaling Transfer Point ∙ VARIOUS

STS Serving Translation Scheme ∙ 149; or Synchronous Transport Sig- nal ∙ 101


340

SWACT Switch of Activity ∙ 61, 88, 103, 192, 286

SWIM Software Inventory Management ∙ 204

T TAPI Telephony Application Program-

ming Interface ∙ 181, 183, 187-190, 195

TCAP Transaction Capabilities Applica- tion Part ∙ 43, 145-146, 148, 151-153, 227

TCM Terminating Call Model ∙ 124; or Time Compression Multiplex ∙ 259

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol ∙ VARIOUS

TCW Talking Call Waiting ∙ 172, 174

TDM Time Division Multiplexing ∙ 16-17, 39, 41, 45-46, 80, 82, 85

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 226-266

TDP Trigger Detection Point ∙ 144, 150

TL1 Transaction Language-1 ∙ 104

TMN Telecommunications Management Network ∙ 43, 200, 246, 268

TMS Traffic Operator Position System Message Switch ∙ 217, 219

TOPS Traffic Operator Position System ∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 215-225

TPS Terminal Proxy Server ∙ 159, 161

TRA Terminating Resource Available ∙ 124-125, 230

TRAVER Translations Verification ∙ 74-75

TRN Trunk Rating Number ∙ 146

TRU Transmit Receive Unit ∙ 235, 247-253, 255-256, 258-259

U UCD Uniform Call Distribution ∙ 164

UDT Unitdata ∙ 278

uEMS Universal Edge Element Manage- ment System ∙ 24, 83, 86, 88-90

UNI User-to-Network Interface ∙ 43, 119

UNISTIM Unified Network Stimulus ∙ 159

UNPM Universal Number Portability Master ∙ 273, 275, 280

UOP Uniform Outpulsing ∙ 66-67

UserID User Identification ∙ 151, 211

USI User Service Indicator ∙ 100

USNBD United States Network Broadcast Delivery ∙ 70-72

USP Universal Signaling Point ∙ 17, 21, 22, 24, 274-275, 281-282

UTA Universal Terminal Access ∙ 211, 212

V VAD Voice-Activated Dialing ∙ 229, 235

VCHTITO Voice Channel Time In Time Out ∙ 256

VDN Virtual Directory Number ∙ 172-173

VLR Visitor Location Register ∙ 236

VME Versabus Motorola Europe ∙ 274

VoDSL Voice over DSL ∙ 83

VoP Voice over Packet ∙ 135

VPN Virtual Private Network ∙ 18, 41, 49, 140

VSP Voice Service Processor ∙ 100, 102


341

VSS Variable Speed Switch ∙ 45

VToA Voice Trunking over Asynchronous Transfer Mode ∙ 49

W W Watt ∙ 247, 249

WAN Wide Area Network ∙ 80, 188, 201-202, 205-206

WAP Wireless Application Protocol ∙ 262

WC Who’s Calling ∙ 172

WIN Wireless Intelligent Networking ∙ 227, 229-230, 234-237, 246

WLL Wireless Local Loop ∙ 227

WSMS Wireless Short Message Service ∙ 280

X XA-Core Extended Architecture Core

∙ VARIOUS, ESPECIALLY 59-65

xDSL generic Digital Subscriber Line ∙ 45, 79, 88, 117, 227

XPM Extended Peripheral Module ∙ 30, 52, 55, 96, 101-103, 110-111

XUDT Extended Unitdata ∙ 278

# 3G Third Generation ∙ 11, 234, 242,

246

What do you want the Internet to be?, Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel Networks corporate logo, the globemark design, AccessNode, ADAS, Digitone, DMS, DMS-100, DMS-100/200, DMS-200, DMS-250, DMS-500, DMS-100 Wireless, DMS-GSP, DMS-Bus, DMS-Core, DMS-MTX, DMS-STP, DPN, MAP, Meridian, OPTera, Preside, QMS, Succession, SuperNode, TOPS, and Universal Edge are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nortel Networks ADI is a registered trademark of Analog Devices, Incorporated Alcatel is a registered trademark of Compagnie Financière Alcatel Compaq and Proliant are trademarks or registered trademarks of Compaq Computers Corporation Hewlett-Packard and OpenView are trademarks or registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines, Incorporated 5ESS and NetMinder are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies, Incorporated Microsoft, TAPI, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Motorola and VME are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola, Incorporated Java, Solaris, Sun, and Sun Microsystems are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Incorporated. SPARC is owned by SPARC International, Incorporated, and licensed to Sun Microsystems for use on products based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystem, Inc NCON and SEAS are trademarks of Telcordia Technologies, Incorporated UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders

MH

Your Opinion is Important to Us… We at Nortel Networks are always looking for ways to improve communications with you. Please help us better meet your needs by completing the following questionnaire about this document. When possible, we’ll reply to your comments or questions personally (remember to include your return address). DMS-100/DMS-500 FEATURE PLANNING GUIDE 2001 (50004.11/04-01 Issue 22) 1. How do you rate this document’s effectiveness?

(Check one rating for each category)

EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR

Information is complete Product or service is clearly explained

Graphics and charts are helpful Document is well organized and easy to use

Information is timely OVERALL RATING

2. How will you use this document? (Check all that apply)

General Reference / Information Training Resource

Sales / Marketing Tariff Planning

Network Planning Other ______________________________________

3. Any comments, questions, or suggested improvements?

Company:

Position/Job Function:

Phone (optional): ( )

Please include your return address on the other side.

!2770998116!

c NO POSTAGENECESSARY

IF MAILEDIN THE

UNITED STATES

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

NORTEL NETWORKSDEPARTMENT 0526PO BOX 13010RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27709-9811

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS PERMIT NO. 1024 DURHAM NC

RETURN ADDRESS:

Name _____________________________________________________________

Title ______________________________________________________________

Company __________________________________________________________

Street Address ______________________________________________________

City _________________________________ State/Zip _____________________

Fold and Tape

*Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel Networks corporate logo, the globemark design, and DMSare trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their owners.

Copyright (C) 2001 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to changewithout notice. Nortel Networks assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

For more information, contact your localNortel Networks account representative, or call1-800-4 NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) or 506-674-5470.

Published by Nortel Networks50004.11/04-01Printed in USA April 2001

http: //www.nortelnetworks.com

In the United States:

Nortel Networks35 Davis DriveResearch Triangle Park,NC 27709USA

In Canada:

Nortel Networks8200 Dixie Road, Suite 100Brampton, Ontario L6T 5P6Canada

Nortel Networks2350 Lakeside BoulevardRichardson, TX 75082USA

Nortel Planning Guide 2001

Documents

Transcript of Nortel Planning Guide 2001